Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
FIRE STATION 48 BUILDING RENOVATIONS - 07-0052-FI
FIRE STATION #48 BUILDING RENOVATIONS PROJECT NO. 07-0052-FI CONTRACT DOCUMENTS & SPECIFICATIONS Prepared for Clearwater 0 ISSUE FOR BID JANUARY 2009 I am IDEN cnslua-?. Oslos c CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE OP Q T IS CERTIFIVA 18 tS9UED As A AAATTER OF INFORMATION LY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS WPON THfi CERTIFICATE No I1Tsupm cm GROUP ON HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR VERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. ZMWRA C;. 0Lt=/A196064 ALTER THE CO 16606 NORTE D= mama HIGMAT SOD EL 33618 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # AIC # phone. 813-963-1669 sax: 913-961-3743 k Mid-Continent Casualty CO. n waimi Mai wareeR e: wain C. CCAZF3W CORPORATION wawawu _? - 5309 EAST LONGBOAT HLVD TAVA FL 33615 esLxeaE: COVERAGES Tl1E POIxRaOF wgylWlCi Lwrca FppWyALiaaeL wwlFaTO-re LYgyaEa IIAULa Aarrt /nw we fellePpepmYOKAIEQ TOrIrvIRICTAtmllq VjW_WeOIAAt W"REWWr T0W,,,"Tfat061+PWAjEULrYE=U0QT W". W"Op MAY AY PERTAIN. . THENaUTPTCS Af PEgypN THEWO NAAf0IFal1mibxCOfnAqflNi PauCIEa KUCM T Oae68CpaFb -13 SUSAWTO PLL1?TMA3.E=LU80W00'O C,ra01Pum9f W" pf>?9MAOd1 x OiLTlL*JrM&Wft WY MWE NEE REOLfCPD FY PAID CLAaA6 AT11 OL LWYRAxaA f0L10F a/(aHl aaC L?pBLa,LfMq/IY gy,?IfgPLOL9aFLLWBUrY O&GL000153120 04/13/09 0149106 a ura'u x CONTRACTUAL LlAH oexL AoaI?aATlUwfMRaa Pvc PTY IPe S PoLgr arlvAG?a LlAw4m Orr A1TO Auo?naeSAU•w aclanwPnALnva IgimAYlCS Tollav NW AWIM aATAf? UADLR PFT•AIM clm?afUwMLIAM U" A X ocLmT C6ALS MADE ceouemm x "rem- .115000 xow&%Dvuwu wM ATT OFFICE OGUM 4.1 CN, Yfpd wdw 6PEHALPTbTagFa IMP anlw rIT ! ET 04X8161164 pEFULSfNIf aP01lIIATawi ILfJCA1gIM/ VCIICITa/ pL.LIIFiOb AaLICJ aT•aPxl/,aewtff pCaL/IILaeIOTa 04/13/09 ITQPIMTgT + 11Mf'a 6Aafwavxearfrfi T laao0o0 ETOxENTEO 100000 04/13/10 vAExlaeA sup La(P*vfflppwwn) • s EXCLU=D a 1000000 pEAaow.aAavwfaer LTagCRAL?flOTEOATE 3 2000000 's 2000000 Pf10a?a.C_euL?IaF ADO i 40M&xE?3NC'.E LraT I ? a . (4.ctlCro i TeS?r?LVwv i i ? TWF?•?1 ! SeoarixaTr ? s pAOPETTY DA4AOE ? y ? AuTOOxLr.riL.Laao[w* a fawn '' s oleET ?Ixiv Aum OILY: AM ! y tACxvuWwfwr' ;3 1000000 s 1000000 04/19/_0 AO m"'L ?--?---- s ?a s fiLfiACN N:pafixY ?t E>_M5EA5E•"VWf%ar.E : 6y a7afM6•AaL1Cr LCFIT _ i CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION am"mmcoImmm aU%*mmsauwdwII4WlmLaaDf?OM9111[L wlenel?ncaa,pLSaeaTaRVaLeaAVaerowi 30 oavkwm 1 CZTTCLH WERM 1091 CMTO RR=L TAMW M TNa L?.WT PALO= TO t* $0 WNU Bola/NO asu kim am Lrru1Y 0P fLr Pon Iwaa T1lNsum lwa AM" OR CFTr OF CLBAAIPA%gm aPRwromm P.O. Box 4768 S. 100 0 • f ? ? a.. 100 . !!YR'Y'sLs AVE. CLUAFMATO FL 346184748 ACORD 26(200MI) 0 9888-2009 ACORO CORPORATION. Ail rights reserved. The AGORD nmu and logo are reglstered marks of ACORD ?..d p6.6I ' i66'EIB' T WuBT :B 6003 IT RiaW'A ADDENDUM NO. 2 for Fire Station No. 48 Building Renovation Project Clearwater, Florida Project Number 07-0052-Fl DATE: February 23, 2009 SUBJECT: Addendum No. 2 TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned Bidders on the above project are hereby notified that the following Addenda are made to the Contract Documents: Electric Power: The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all electric power during construction, and the Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and paying all fees related to electric power use. The Contractor may use the existing electric meter by making application to Progress Energy to have the billing changed to the Contractor before construction begins and until substantial completion of the project. 2. Potable Water: The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all potable water during construction. The City's Public Utilities Department will need to install a deduct water meter for the Contractor before construction begins and until substantial completion of the project, and the Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and paying all fees related to installation and use of the water meter. 3. Staging Area: Improvements to the Fire Station 48 Site Complex were recently completed, which included new pavement around the existing Fire Station being renovated. The Contractor shall use the apparatus bay within the Fire Station for staging & storage, and the Contractor shall be responsible for restoring all areas to existing or better condition. Contractors should review Section IV, Article 37 of the Contract Documents regarding Audio/Video Recording of Work Area. 4. Fire Station Gear Room: Door No. 6 related to the Gear Room (130) shall open out into the apparatus bay instead of opening into the Gear Room. 5. Roll-off Dumpsters: If the Contractor requires the use of roll-off dumpsters to complete the specified demolition and construction activities, the Contractor shall note that only City of Clearwater Solid Waste Department's roll-off dumpsters shall be utilized as dictated by the City's exclusivity policy. Contractor shall be Addendum No.2-Fire Station No. 48 Building Renovation Project 022309.doc Page 1 responsible for coordinating and paying all fees related to use of the dumpsters. Please contact Mark Beery, (727) 2247393, for fee and delivery information. 6. Electrical Sheet E-2: A. Dorm Room 118: The key note symbol "22 (typ)" as shown in Dorm Room 118 is deleted. Key note #22 does not apply in Dorm Rooms 113 through 122. B. Chief's Office Room 110: A total of two (2) data/phone jack outlets, labeled as 2 voice and 2 data, shall be added in the Chiefs Office Room 110. Coordinate final locations with Architect and Owner. C. Key note #22 (Data/Telephone outlets) shall be read as shown below: DATA/TELEPHONE QUAD JACK OUTLETS, LABEL AS 2 VOICE AND 2 DATA. EXTEND A 3/4" C WITH 2 SEPARATE CAT 5E CABLES AND ONE VOICE CAT 5E CABLE FROM THE OUTLETS TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING AND THEN THRU 2" CONDUIT (KEY NOTE #26) IN CEILING SPACE TO NEW TELEPHONE BOARD IN IT CLOSET. THE WIRING INSTALLATION SHALL COMPLY WITH THE UNIFORM WIRING POLICY BY NETWORK SERVICES/TELECOMMUNICATIONS. D. Key note #26 shall be read as shown below: EXTEND A 2" C AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS THRU THE ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE TO IT CLOSET. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH OWNER AND ARCHITECT. THE WIRING INSTALLATION SHALL COMPLY WITH THE UNIFORM WIRING POLICY BY. NETWORK SERVICES/TELECOMMUNICATIONS. NO 90 DEGREE BENDS. 7. Response to Contractor's RFI: A. Existing Fire Alarm Control Panel: Does the client want to re-use the existing Radionics Fire Alarm Control Panel or would they like to utilize the system during construction until a new Fire Alarm system is installed and operational to avoid lack of protection? Response: Yes. The existing Fire Alarm Control Panel is to be protected and reused as part of the project. B. Existing Training Building Fire Alarm System: The adjacent Training Building has an EST 2 Fire Alarm system that is relatively new, this system may have the capacity to serve the adjacent building to be remodeled. If so, would the owner like to have one system to control and serve both building? We could have a quote provided to the owner for this. Response: No. The Contractor is to protect and reuse the existing Fire Alarm Control Panel. Addendum No.2-Fire Station No. 48 Building Renovation Project 022309.doc Page 2 C. Fire Alarm Devices: Are all of the Fire Alarm devices in the proposed remodeled building to be replaced during construction? Response: Yes. The existing fire alarm control panel is the only device that is to be protected and reused. D. Existing Fire Alarm Control Panel: The existing Bosch D7024 fire alarm control panel does not have the ability to be connected to a printer or a graphical work station, and does note have Analog capability. But the D7024 can be upgraded to an Addressable System allowing the addressable smoke detectors to send a dirty chamber report to the fire alarm control panel before causing a false alarm. Please confirm that the use of the existing Bosch D7024 is still acceptable. Response: Yes. The Contractor is to protect and reuse the existing fire alarm control panel. Since all new fire alarm devices, which shall be addressable, are to be installed as part of the project, the Contractor shall upgrade the existing fire alarm control panel to make it addressable due to the new configuration of the fire station. Connection to a printer or graphical workstation is not required. E. Electrical Conduit: Reference Specs 16100 and 16130. Found no specific reference to EMT Conduit for us in dry locations. Spec's indicated Rigid Conduit w/ Steel Fittings - Minimum Size 3/4". Can we use EMT in dry locations? If so - Set Screw Steel Fittings? Can we use 1/2" for branch circuits, other than H/R's? Response: 1. EMT [ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (THIN WALL)] - Electrical Metallic Tubing is permitted in dry location as listed below unless limited by NEC. 1.1 EMT shall be galvanized or rust-resisting alloy. 1.2 EMT COUPLINGS AND CONNECTORS shall be of the compression type for 1-inch and smaller. For conduits larger than 1-inch, the connectors may be either compression type or set screw type. All couplings and connectors shall be steel. 1.3 IF INSTALLED IN CONCRETE, couplings and connectors shall be rain tight or concrete-tight type, as required. EMT shall not be installed in slabs on grade. 1.4 EMT shall not be used in wet locations. 2. The minimum conduit size shall be 3/4". Final coordination and approval by Owner is required for the items above. F. Electrical: 1. FACP is shown existing to be rewired, please provide manufacturer and model #. Addendum No.2-Fire Station No. 48 Building Renovation Project 022309.doc Page 3 Response: Existing Fire Alarm Control Panel is Bosch D7024. See Item 7.D above. 2. Can F/A devices be reused. Response: The existing fire alarm control panel is the only device that is to be protected and reused. See item 7.C above. 3. Existing panel M.P. ckt 4 and 6 have notes next to them but the notes cannot be found. Response: Electrical load types are noted 1 thru 7. Notes for clarification on the panel are shown with (*) and ("*) and the note are below the electrical panel. 4. Is the 150amp 3 pole for the rtu existing? Response: 150 Amp, 3 pole breaker is existing and shall be reused to feed new roof top unit. The attached packaged roof top unit schedule shows the correct MCA/MOCP. 5. Please provide manufacturer and model of MP. Response: Existing panel MP is Federal Pacific, FDP-BDP Panel Board, 600 Amp, 3ph, 4W. 6. E2 note 25 new circuit or reuse existing? Response: Extend new circuit and conduit as required. Refer to sheet E-2, note 25 and HVAC unit disconnect and feeder schedule. 7. TU and TEL %" to ceiling and free wire to TTB? Response: See item 6.C above. 8. Is the owner relocating the TTB, equipment and cable? Response: The Owner is responsible to relocating the telephone terminal board, and associated equipment and cable to the IT Closet. All associated work shall be coordinated with the Owner and the Network Service/Telecommunication Department, and any wiring installation and work shall comply with the Uniform Wiring Policy by Network Service/Telecommunication. 9. Specs call for a min of 3/ grc but several note call for 3/, is % min the standard? Response: The minimum conduit size shall be 3/4". See Item 7.E above. 10. E2 note 32, please provide location of roof top JB. Response: Electrical Contractor shall install conduit to a minimum 3-foot above the lower roof level, and the Contractor shall field coordinate final location with architect and owner prior to rough-in. 11. EMG. Call system By others plans call for speakers only by EC. please confirm. Response: Electrical Contractor shall coordinate EMG system with Owner and Owner approved vendor, and the Addendum No.2-Fire Station No. 48 Building Renovation Project 022309.doc Page 4 Contractor shall be responsible for all wires, conduits, devices, final connection and to compete the EMG system. END OF ADDENDUM #2 THE CITY OF CLEARWATER PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA BY: /s/William B. Horne, II City Manager Addendum No.2-Fire Station No. 48 Building Renovation Project 022309.doc Page 5 %D N tG u? :W L LL a V a M un cn `: N a+ CD N 0 N ;;z ai M O 3 a O lL. a? a? U a rn a Go a 00 0 CD N r .Q a Y PACKAGED ROOF TOP UNIT SCHEDULE UNIT NO. RTU-1 AREA SERVED ALL MANUFACTURER AAON MODEL No. RM-010-8-A-EB19-143: LOOO-EOB-OCE-- 000-CDABDBE-00-OEOOOOOAB REFRIGERANT R-410A NOMINAL CAPACITY TONS 10.5 EER/SEER/HSPF 11.4/-/- IPLV - AIRFLOW CFM 3350 OUTSIDE AIR CFM 1250 EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE IN. H20 0.6 TOTAL CAPACITY MBH 127.14 SENSIBLE CAPACITY MBH 89.66 ENTERING AIR TEMPERATURE DBT•/WBF 81.72/68.19 LEAVING AIR TEMPERATURE DB-F/WBF 56.19/66.51 HOT GAS REHEAT CAPACITY MBH 54.0 REHEAT LEAVING AIR TEMP. F 70.00/60.74 HEAT CAPACITY MBH/KW/STEPS 102.4/30.0/4 HEAT AT 7 28.3 EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR BHP/HP 1.14/3 EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR FLA 10.6 CONDENSER FAN MOTOR FLA EA. (1) 05.4 COMPRESSORS No. 2 COMPRESSOR AMPERAGE (RLA) COMP. 1 AMPS 16.9 COMPRESSOR AMPERAGE (RLA) COMP. 2 AMPS 15.6 STEPS OF CAPACITY No. 2 CIRCUITS No. 2 L I 2 MCA/MOCP AMPS 117/125 T 370 NOTES ALL NOTES: 1. CONTACT TOM HERSEY WITH APPLIED DEHUMIDIFICATION, INC. AT PHONE: (813) 258-6609 OR TOLL FREE: (800) 276-8837 FOR SELECTION INFORMATION. 2. PROVIDE MOTORIZED OUTDOOR AIR DAMPER. 3. PROVIDE SINGLE POINT POWER CONNECTION THRU CURB, FACTORY INSTALLED DISCONNECT, & CONVENIENCE OUTLET. 4. REUSE EXISTING ROOF CURB. 5. PROVIDE VARIABLE HOT GAS REHEAT OPTION. 6. PROVIDE SMOKE DETECTORS IN SUPPLY & RETURN. 7. PROVIDE DIGITAL SCROLL COMPRESSOR ON PRIMARY STAGE. 8. PROVIDE VICONICS VT7600 SERIES THERMOSTAT. DESIGN CONDLjDa ;_ SUMMER: OUTDOORS 92F Dam/ 77F INDOORS 757 DB / 50% RH WINTER: OUTDOORS 367 DB INDOORS 707 DB ADDENDUM NO. 1 for Fire Station No. 48 Building Renovation Project Clearwater, Florida Project Number 07-0052-Fl DATE: February 6, 2009 SUBJECT: Addendum No. 1 TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned Bidders on the above project are hereby notified that the following Addenda are made to the Contract Documents: 1. Mandatory Pre-Bid Meeting: The Mandatory Pre-Bid Meeting was held on Tuesday, February 3, 2009, at 1:30 p.m. 2. Pre-Qualification: Sealed proposals will only be accepted from those Contractors that are currently City pre- qualified Contractors in the construction category of Commercial Building with a minimum pre-qualification amount of $600,00 0. It is the Contractor's responsibility to insure that they meet the pre-qualified minimum limit of $600,000, and Contractors wanting to pre- qualify to bid this project as a General Contractor must do so two (2) weeks/ten (10) workdays prior to the bid opening date. Please contact Alice Eckman of the City's Construction Services Department at (727) 462-6126 to complete this process. See Section I -- Advertisement of Bids & Notice to Contractors for more information. 3. Request for Information (RFI): All BFI's must be submitted in writing either by email (robert.mauep-myclearwater.com) or by fax (727-562-4755) to the attention of Robert Maue, and the RFI needs to include the company's name, contact person, and contact information in case clarification is needed on any issues. The last date to submit a RFI is Thursday, February 19, 2009 by 5:00pm Eastern Standard Time (EST). All Addendums issued by the City will be sent via e-mail to all Plan Holders through the City's Plan House. All a-mails from the plan house will be from notice desi nbidbuild. net and NOT the City of Clearwater. 4. Bid Proposal Forms: The Bid Proposal Forms must be complete and all quantities and costs must be filled in. Please double check your figures. Proposal Bond - must be completely filled out with the 10% bid bond amount. 5. Bid Proposal: The Contractor shall submit one (1) original sealed bid proposal along with one (1) copy of the original proposal prior to the bid opening scheduled on Thursday, February 26, Addendum No.1-Fire Station No. 48 Building Renovation Project 020609.doc Page I 2009. The bid proposal consists of pages 7 to 14 of Section V -- Contract Documents. Please refer to Section I - Advertisement of Bids & Notice to Contractors for more information. 6. Site Visits: The Fire Station 48 facility will be available for Contractor's to visit and examine the area during the week of Monday, February 9 through Friday, February 13 during the hours of 9AM to 12PM & 1 PM to 5PM. The purpose of the site visit is per Section II, Article 3.1 of the Contract Documents, which is to become familiar with the local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work, etc. All visitors to the site are requested to park their vehicles within the fenced parking lot on the west side of the fire station, which is adjacent to the existing stormwater pond. 7. Revisions to Bid Documents for Fire Station 48 Renovations: The Architect and his sub-consultants have made revisions to some of the construction plans and specifications for the Fire Station 48 Renovations Project as indicated in the attached document dated February 5, 2009, which shall be incorporated into the Contract Documents under this Addendum No. 1. See attached sheets. 7. Supplemental and/or Amendments to Contract Documents: A. Section I - Advertisement of Bids & Notice to Contractors, location of bid opening: Revise the 4th paragraph as follows: "All sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manager, at the Purchasing Office, located at the Municipal Services Bldg., 100 So. Myrtle Ave., 3`d Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520, until 1:25 P.M. on Thursday. February 26, 2009, at which time all sealed proposals will then be received by the Purchasing Manager, in Room 130, located at the Municipal Services Bldg., 100 So. Myrtle Ave., 18t Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520, until 1:30 P.M. on the same day, and publicly opened and read at that hour and place for the Fire Station 48 Renovations Project (07-0052-FI). END OF ADDENDUM #1 THE CITY OF CLEARWATER PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA By: /s/William B. Horne, II City Manager Addendum No.I-Fire Station No. 48 Building Renovation Project 020609.doc Page 2 _ 1' Plisko Architecture, P.A., AIA .:.7.. Alex Plisko, Jr., AIA, NCAR$ February 5, 2009 Mr. Robert A. Maue City of Clearwater Public Works Administration 100 S. Myrtle Avenue, Room 220 Clearwater, FL 33756 Re: Bid Documents for Fire Station #48 Renovations Dear Rob: The following needs to be released in an Addendum. 1. Add Specification Section 09653 Resilient Wall Base and Accessories. 2. Revised Specification Section 09900 Painting, Paint Schedule ONLY. 3. Revised Specification Section 01781 Project Record Documents. 4. Sheets A-2.1, A-2.2, and S-3: Building section arrow A4-02 points in the wrong direction. Building section cut arrow points left on sheet and should point right. 5. Electrical Room is noted as Room 132 on plans; the room number should be 133. No painting occurs in the Electrical Room except to touch up as required for new door installation. 6. Sheet A-6: Door Schedule: a. Door 12 shall be Type G, size 2'-8"x6"-8"xl-3/4" b. Door 13 shall be Type F c. Doors 3 and 15 shall be fully louvered 7. Sheet A-7: Room Finish Schedule: a. Restroom 103 walls shall be WT-1 b. Kitchen 105 walls shall be P-3 c. Chiefs Restroom ceiling type shall be HC-1 d. Restroom 123 walls shall be P-4 Epoxy Paint e. Room 133 is the Electrical Room and requires no interior work except touch up painting at new door jambs. f. Add Room 134 Pantries off Kitchen 103. Finishes shall be: Floor, VCT-1; Base, VB-1; Walls, P-3; Ceiling Type HC-1 at 8'-0". 8. Sheet A-7: Interior Finishes: a. Change P-2 to painted CMU semi-gloss b. Add P-4 Epoxy Paint c. WT-1: P-3 paint system to be used above wall tile. d. WT-1 courses 4 and 10 to be contrasting color as indicated on interior elevation sheets A-8 and A-9 800 Drew Street, Clearwater, Florida 33755-4516 727-442-7200 Fax: 727-461-0030 Florida Architect Corporation License Number AA 0000813 archp@verizon.net Page 2 of 2 9. Sheet A-7: Ceilings: a. Acoustical tile ceiling stops at hood b. Ceilings in Pantry shall be HC-1 10. Sheet A-9: Interior Elevations 17 and 18 should be Room 109 Chief's Restroom. 11. Sheet M-3 to be reissued: a. Exhaust louvers run through the soffit and not through the wall duct to Greenheck Elbow Discharge Model EL-10X3 b. Relocated A/C diffuser in Dorm 113 12. Sheet M-3: Provide remote damper regulators for all dampers above hard ceiling where feasible or else provide access panel for damper adjustment. See Specification Section 15850 "Ductwork - Sheet Metal - Low Pressure" Sections 2.6.C.1 and 2.6.C.2; 2.6.E.7 and 2.6.E.8; and 2.6.F.a and 2.6.F.b. 13. Sheet FP-1 to be reissued: a. Relocate sprinkler heads in Day Room 101 and Corridor 106. b. Added sprinkler head in Restroom 123. PDFs of Sheets M-3 and FP-1 are attached along with the three revised specification sections. If you have any questions or comments, please call. Thank you. Sincerely, Alex Plisko, Jr., AIA, NCARB AP/ss APA 02.09 Fire Station #48 REVISED SECTION 01781- PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. Related Sections: 1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: Submit one paper copy set and PDF electronic files of marked- up record prints and one set of plots from corrected record digital data files. Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. b. Final Submittal: Submit one paper copy set and PDF electronic files of marked-up record prints. Print each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. C. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately, Utilize personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Revised 01781 - 1 of 3 APA 02.09 Fire Station #48 B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file. 4. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect and Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Product Data as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked up paper copy of Product Data. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Revised 01781 - 2 of 3 APA 02.09 Fire Station #48 B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked up miscellaneous record submittals. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and modifications to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Revised 01781 - 3 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 09653 _ RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive resilient products. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. C. Flexco, Inc. d. Roppe Corporation, USA. B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 1. Material Requirement: Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous) or Group II (layered). 3. Style: Cove (base with toe) at VCT and Straight (flat or toeless) at carpet and rubber flooring. C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. D. Height: 4 inches. E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside Corners: Preformed. G. Inside Corners: Preformed. H. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 1 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Resilient Molding Accessory: I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. C. Flexco, Inc. d. Roppe Corporation, USA. B. Description: Carpet edge for glue-down applications, Reducer strip for resilient floor covering, Joiner for tile and carpet, and Transition strips. C. Material: Vinyl. D. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated. E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 2 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. 3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. B. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 3 of 3 APA 07.08 REVISED PAINT SCHEDULE Fire Station #48 1.1 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Sand Float Stucco: 1. First Coat: "PorterLock" #6010 Pigmented Sealer 2. Intermediate Coat: "3939 Portersept" Exterior Satin Acrylic 3. Top Coat: "3939 Portersept" Exterior Satin Acrylic B. Doors and Frames -- Galvanized Steel 1. First Coat: 2. Intermediate Coat: 3. Top Coat: 1.2 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Drywall Walls (P-1 Flat Finish): 1. First Coat: 2. Intermediate Coat: Top Coat: "Porter Guard" #215/212 series, DTM Primer "6029 Acri-Pro 100" Semi-gloss Exterior Acrylic "6029 Acri-Pro 100" Semi-gloss Exterior Acrylic `Blankit" #1129 series, Acrylic Primer "999 Silken Touch" Eggshell Interior Latex "999 Silken Touch" Eggshell Interior Latex B. Drywall Walls - Restrooms (P-3 Satin Finish): 1. First Coat: "Blankit" #1129 series, Acrylic Primer 2. Intermediate Coat: "1119 Silken Touch" Semi-gloss Interior Acrylic 3. Top Coat: "1119 Silken Touch" Semi-gloss Interior Acrylic C. Dry wall Ceilings (Flat Finish): 1. First Coat: "Blankit" #1129 series, Acrylic Primer 2. Intermediate Coat: "1119 Silken Touch" Semi-gloss Interior Acrylic 3. Top Coat: "1119 Silken Touch" Semi-gloss Interior Acrylic D. Metal Door Frames 1. First Coat: "Porterguard" #215 Series, DTM Primer 2. Intermediate Coat: "1139 Silken Touch" Semi-gloss Interior Acrylic 3. Top Coat: "1139 Silken Touch" Semi-gloss Interior Acrylic E. Concrete Sealer 1. First Coat Cantol 227 Water-based Seal and Finish for Concrete F. Drywall Walls - Restrooms (P-4 Epoxy Finish) 1. First Coat: Porter #867 Drywall Sealer 2. Intermediate Coat: Porter #9370 Duraglaze Epoxy 3. Top Coat: Porter #9370 Duraglaze Epoxy G. Interior Masonry Walls (P-2 Semi-gloss Finish) 1. First Coat: "Blankit" #1129 series, Acrylic Primer 2. Intermediate Coat: "Advantage" 900 Semi-gloss 3. Top Coat: "Advantage" 900 Semi-gloss PAINT SCHEDULE 09900 FIRE STATION #48 BUILDING RENOVATIONS p KOARCHITECI[7RE, PFL AIA eoa d18W 971887 CLSA1WA788. PL 33773 °N?-- oNN?C BELCHER ROAD ???, 727-461-0030 727-442-7200 FAX 727-447-6914 mo ° ? °O? C?J CLEARWATER. FL a oa o ? V N fy Y 0 A t g a ? ? ? ? r li ; ?? y??Y9? ?F 5k @ x I" R0, 7XI 5? • y c? N ~ I ? ~ i x ??i19 ?aa? • ' I?? L ...-J L, Jill ................... -- .... ?.......... ......... ....... i . ......- .. .... ............ ........ ..........d?......... . ............ .............. ... . ? .. t .. .... ... ........ .............. ................ e ® ........... .. ............. _.... ...... : , ........... _. i ......... J • I L.- .... rt , . _? . ® '3 -j .......... L- .. . ...................... .. ...... .. ?,.................. ............... .......... ... ,.,, • L M1 ..... ... ............. .......... _ _ • .. .... ........ .. ........... ..: ............i.. .. ...... . ..... , ............ .. ... ..... ... .,..®.... ....... a q N 1% g p 'R of 411111sry gel y ;.6A yI • 01 AIM 1" ° Ila OR q ? ?s s ?gq 1141111 ill $l ?, Jill All I 18,111 AIR Pia IlM A FIRE STATION #48 Er-111; P K0ARBET CLEARWA . PFL AIA BUILDIBLCHRERN OAD TIONS ; 727-461-0030 eTSig441 7100 a AX 717.44736914 CLEARWATER, FL SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS FIRE STATION #48 BUILDING RENOVATIONS PROJECT 07-0052-FI CLEARWATER, FLORIDA Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or purchase by prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address: www.MyClearwater.com/cityprojects9 on MONDAY JANUARY 26, 2009, until no later than close of business three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the website, reflects reproduction cost only. The work for which proposals are invited consists of: Renovations to an existin 4,384 square- foot Fire Station including demolition interior renovations of Men's and Women's Restroom/Showers; new Kitchen; new Dormitory Rooms with Lockers; new doors and windows; new ceiling-, new HVAC rooftop unit and ductwork supplies, and returns; complete, plumbing and electrical renovations. A MANDATORY Pre-Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held on TUESDAY, FEBRUARY 3 2009 at 1:30 PM in Room 130 at the Municipal Services Bldg., 100 So. Myrtle Ave., 1't Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520. All prospective bidders MUST attend this Pre- Bid Conference in order to be eligible to submit sealed proposals for this project. Representatives of the Owner and Consulting Engineer will be present to discuss this Project. Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manage , at the Purchasing Office, located at the Municipal Services Bldg., 100 So. Myrtle Ave., 3rd Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756- 5520, until 1:30 P.M. on THURSDAY FEBRUARY 26, 2009, and publicly opened and read at that hour and place for Fire Station #48 Building Renovations (07-0052-FI). A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and proposal form is available to the general public (Contractors, Sub-contractors, suppliers, vendors, etc.) for review and purchase. However, sealed proposals will only be accepted from those Contractors that are currently City pre-qualified Contractors in the construction category of Commercial Building with a minimum pre-qualification amount of 600$ ,0000_00. Contractors wanting to pre-qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks/ten (10) workdays prior to the bid opening date. A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects. The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids. The City of Clearwater, Florida George McKibben, Purchasing Manager (727) 562-4634 SectionLdoc Page 1 of 1 °'° "u""° SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Table of Contents: SECTION II .................................................................................................................................. . i 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS .................. 1 .................................................... . 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS .................................................................................. 1 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE ................................. 1 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA ....................................................................... 2 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND .................................................................................... 3 6 CONTRACT TIME .......................................................................................................... 3 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ............................................................................................. 3 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT ......................................................... 3 9 SUBCONTRACTORS ...................................................................................................... 3 10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM ....................................... 4 .......................................................... 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS .................................... 4 .............................................................. 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS .................................................... 5 13 REJECTION OF BIDS .................................................................................................... 5 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER .............................................................................. 5 15 OPENING OF BIDS ......................................................................................................... 5 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES ........................................... 5 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE ............................. 6 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT ............................................................................................... 7 19 BID PROTEST .................................................................................................................. 7 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT ................................................................................................. 8 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES ....................................................................................... 8 SectionII.doc i Revised: 7/17/2008 Section 11- Instructions to Bidders 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room -- website address: www.Myclearwater.com/cit ro'ects. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the City's Website, reflects reproduction costs only, which is non-refundable. A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid/proposal form is available only to pre-qualified bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who may be a possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a "Subcontractor" package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items. 1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub-bidders or others. 1.3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose. 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre-qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre- qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering Department, Engineering Services Division at P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758- 4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street address only) or by phone at (727) 562-4750. All qualification data must be completed and delivered to the Director of Engineering at the above address not later than fourteen (14) days prior to the time set for the receipt of bids. Bidders currently pre-qualified by the City do not have to make reapplication. 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non-technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in SectionlI,doc Page I of 9 Revised: 7/17/2008 Section I1- Instructions to Bidders preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. 3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in the General Conditions. 3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or filrnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations and tests. 3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work. 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, either by mail or facsimile transmission, to all parties recorded by the Purchasing Manager as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than ten (10) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect. Sectionil.doe Page 2 of 9 Revised: 7/17/2008 Section 11-- Instructions to Bidders 4.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the City or Engineer. 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or cashiers check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted. 5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after the Bid opening. 5.3 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida. 6 CONTRACT TIME 6.1 The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set forth in the Technical Specifications. 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement. 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications. 9 SUBCONTRACTORS 9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50%) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Sectionll.doc Page 3 of9 Revised: 7/17/2008 Section II - Instructions to Bidders Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 9.2 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or organization against whom he has reasonable objection. 10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM 10.1. The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. The Bidder must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items. 10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice- president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation or partnership. 10.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. 10.4 All names shall be typed or printed below the signature 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 11.1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a $.5"x11" manila envelope with the project name and number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or facsimile bids received by the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted. SectionII.doc Page 4 of 9 Revised: 7/17/200$ Section II -- Instructions to Bidders 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified. 12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid. 13 REJECTION OF BIDS 13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public. 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit contained in the Contract Documents. 15 OPENING OF BIDS 15.1 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids. 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. 16.2 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically Sectionll.doc Page 5 of 9 Revised: 7/17/2008 Section I1- Instructions to Bidders stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be stated by the Contractor. 16.3 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements. 16.4 The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials incorporated into the WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV - Technical Specifications and as defined in Section III - General Conditions. 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 17.1 In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied bidders have a drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six statements and the accompanying certification statement: (1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. (2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. (3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). (4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. (5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. (6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through implementation of this section. I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above requirements. Sectionll.doc Page 6 of 9 Revised: 7/17/2008 Section 11- Instructions to Bidders 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best interest of the City. 18.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be awarded to only one Contractor. 19 BID PROTEST 19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this section. 19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE: A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals. Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself. B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder, which ever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated. C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of SectionlLdoc Page 7 of9 Revised: 7/17/2008 Section II - Instructions to Bidders intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception. D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5) work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will. be fully coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager. E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he/she may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager. F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10) work days of receipt of the appeal. 19.3 PROTEST FEE: When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5% of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee paid. 19.4 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City. 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT 20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918-08) along with the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections 553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws. 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 21.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters. A. The control of construction-related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment loadings to surface waters. SectionIl.doc Page 8 of 9 Revised: 7/17/2008 Section 11 - Instructions to Bidders B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion and sediment control provisions. NPDES Management Environmental Division Management Practices. References EPA website Measures available at City of Clearwater Engineering and EPA websites to help address construction-related Best Sectionll.doc Page 9 of 9 Revised: 7/17/2008 SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents: 1 DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................. 1 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS ........................................................................................... 5 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE ............................ 5 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................ 5 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT ................................................................................................................ 5 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION ...................................................................... 5 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ........................................................................ 6 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS ............................................................................................... . 6 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT ......................................................................... 7 3.1 INTENT .......................................................................................................................... . 7 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES ................................................. . 7 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS ................................................................................................... . 8 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS ........................................................................................ . 8 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS ........................................................................... . 8 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES .................................... . 8 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS ................................................................................................... . 9 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE ........................................................................................... . 9 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND .............................. . 9 5.2 INSURANCE ................................................................................................... ............. . 9 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE ......................................................... 10 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITYAND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE ............................ 10 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE A UTOMOBILE LIABILITY .................................................... 11 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS .................................................................................................. 12 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES ..................................................................... 12 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE ............................................................. 12 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................... 13 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS .............................................................. 14 6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS........ 14 6.5 USE OF PREMISES ...................................................................................................... 15 65.1 STAGING AREAS .................................................................................................... 15 65.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS ................................................................................ 15 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES ................................... 16 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS ...................................................................................... 16 6.8 PERMITS ....................................................................................................................... 16 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION ..................................................................................... 17 6.10 EMERGENCIES ............................................................................................................ 18 6.1 1 DRAWINGS .................................................................................................................. 18 SectionIII.doc i 11/17/2008 611.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW ........................ 18 6 11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS ............................................................................................ 19 6. 11.3 CAD STANDARDS ................................................................................................... 21 6 11.4 DELIVERABLES: ......................................... .......................................................... 22 6.1.2 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE ........................... 22 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK ...........................................................•............................ 23 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION .................................................................................................... 23 7 OTHER WORK .............................................................................................................. 24 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE ........................................................................................ 24 7.2 COORDINATION ......................................................................................................... 24 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY ...................................................................................... 24 9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION .............. 25 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE ................................................................................... 25 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS ........................................................ 25 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................................................................ 25 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS .................................. 25 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES ........................................................................................ 26 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES ............. 26 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK .......................................................................................... 27 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE ................................................................... 28 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE .................................................................... 28 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT ....................... 29 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK .................................................................................................... 29 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME .................................................................... 30 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK .............................................................................................. 31 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION .......................................................................................... 31 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK ....................................................................................... 31 13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK ....................................... 32 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK ......................................... 32 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD ...................................................................... 32 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ................................................................... 33 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK ....................................................... 33 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ......................................... 34 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT ........................................................... 34 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE ............................................................... 34 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS ................................ 35 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION ............................................................................................ 35 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION ................................................................................................... 36 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT ................................................................... 36 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE ................................................................... 37 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS ................................................................................................. 37 SectionIll .doc ii 11/17/2 008 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION .................................................... 37 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK ...................................................................... . J 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE ...................................................................................... 38 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE ........................................... 39 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION ............................................................................................. 39 17 MISCELLANEOUS ....................................................................................................... 40 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS ................................................................. 40 17.2 GIVING NOTICE .......................................................................................................... 40 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM ..................................................................................................... 40 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED ..................................... 40 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT ................................................................................. 40 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION .................................................................................................... 40 18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK .............................................................. 40 19 MATERIAL USED ......................................................................................................... 41 20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ..................................... 41 21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION ....................................................... 41 22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION .......................... 41 22.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 41 22.2 EXAMPLE ..................................................................................................................... 42 23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS ............................................................................ 42 23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE .............................................................................................. . 42 23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE ................................................ . 43 23.3 FIXED SIGN ................................................................................................................ . 43 23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS ..................................................................................................... . 43 23.5 SIGN COLORING ........................................................................................................ . 43 23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT .................................................................................................... . 43 23.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................... . 43 23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN ......................................................................................... . 44 24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE ................. . 44 SectionIII.doc iii 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions 1 DEFINITIONS Addenda Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents. Agreement The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Application for Payment The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Approve The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Bid The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the work to be performed. Bidding Documents The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). Bonds Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security. Change Order A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement. City The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida. Construction Inspector A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the intent of the Contract Documents. Construction Manager The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the Owner's Representative during construction. Sectionlll.doc Page 1 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions Construction Coordinator A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and is responsible for the administration of construction documents. Contract Documents The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid (including documentation accompanying the bid and any post-Bid documentation submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement. Contract Price The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work. Contract Time The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work. Contractor The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of this contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative. Critical Path Method Construction Schedule-CPM A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution of the schedule. Day A calendar day of twenty-four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment. Drawings The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement, which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. Engineer The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. SectionllLdoc Page 2 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions Engineer's Consultant A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. F. D. O. T Specifications The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition). Furnish The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and install complete in place and ready for service". Inspection The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or overseeing. Laws and Regulations Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction. Liens Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property. Milestone A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to the final completion date. Notice to Proceed (NTP) A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under the Contract Documents. Owner Person The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed. For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. A natural person or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial entity. Project The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Partial Utilization Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work. SectionIII.doc Page 3 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions Representative of Contractor The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre-construction conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City Engineer. Request for Information (RFI) An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from the Contractor to the Engineer. Shop Drawing All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. Specifications Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. Substantial Completion The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. Supplementary Conditions The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions. Supplier A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor. Surety Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid, Performance or Payment Bond. Underground Facilities All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, SectionIII.doe Page 4 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or water. Unit Price Work Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. Work The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. Work Change Directive A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this contract. 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS Engineer shall furnish to Contractor two (2) copies of Contract Documents for execution. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy SectionIll.doc Page 5 of 45 11/17/2008 Section Ill - General Conditions in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of the Owner or Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Within twenty (20) days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Owner's Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures. Typically, oversight of the project officially passes from the Engineering Department to the Construction Department at the preconstruction conference. In these cases, the preconstruction conference is run by the Construction Department and chaired by the City's Construction Manager. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the Preconstruction Conference a color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at this conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also bring a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the preconstruction conference a completed Emergency Call List and a completed Authorized Signature List. The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a project disk that has all of the necessary data and survey control points for the purpose of construction stakeout and as-built survey. The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a Contractor evaluation package. This is for the purpose of rating the Contractor's performance for reference when considering future contracts and bid prequalification. 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a look-ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting, and all material test reports generated in the same time period. The City's Construction Coordinator typically chairs these meetings. SectionIII.doc Page 6 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 3.1 INTENT The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well- known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents, shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's Representative, or any of their agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's Representative for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. SectionIII.doc Page 7 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions. 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory. SectionlIl.doc Page 8 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a City survey crew is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with a minimum charge of one hour. 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner. 5.2 INSURANCE Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily Sectionlll.doc Page 9 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v) Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by the Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with this paragraph. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and maintained shall: (i) include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional liability) Owner of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and include coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include completed operations insurance; (iii) include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, shall remain in effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall furnish the Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to the Owner and any such additional insured, of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and telephone number of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer. The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations: 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory (2) Employer's Liability $500,000. $1,000,000. 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE Comprehensive General Liability including Premise/Operations; Explosion, Collapse and Underground Property Damage; Products/Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual, Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities: SectionIII.doc Page 10 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate Aggregate (2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate Aggregate (3) Personal Injury, with $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual employment exclusion deleted Aggregate Aggregate 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY including all owned (private and others), hired and non-owned vehicles: Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Person $500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Accident (2) Property Damage $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from Owner. Longshore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932, requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self insurer. For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7, 8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to secure the payment of compensation. SectionIll.doc Page 11 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Sub-contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment. 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contacted whenever necessary. Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed Sectionlll.doc Page 12 of 45 11/17/2008 Section 111 - General Conditions from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the Owner's Representative. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $60.00 per hour. Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer. 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without the Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work. All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment to be incorporated into the WORK under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Contract Documents. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures. SectionIll.doc Page 13 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Owner's Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability. 6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to communicate with the Engineer through Contractor. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be performed by any specific trade. All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Sectionlll.doc Page 14 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his Subcontractors or between Subcontractors. 6.5 USE OF PREMISES Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 6.5.1 STAGING AREAS The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction. 6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right-of-ways, is very important to the Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed: • Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days. • Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times. • All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP. • Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days. Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times. SectionIII.doc Page 15 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions • Sod must be restored with ten (10) consecutive calendar days of a successful pipe pressure test. It must be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times. If the project or a portion of it does not involve right-of ways, then a different schedule of sod restoration may be considered. 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work. 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above. 6.8 PERMITS Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. SectionIII.doc Page 16 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner of Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be waived. 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. Sectionlll.doc Page 17 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions 6.10 EMERGENCIES In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action. 6.11 DRAWINGS 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design, criteria, materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each submittal within twenty-one (21) consecutive calendar days. The Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within twenty-one (21) consecutive calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for a delay claim from the Contractor. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's SectionI11-doc Page 18 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor. 6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As-Built Drawings, in good order and legible condition to be continuously marked-up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed during the construction period. The As-Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant, and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project. The As-Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As-Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked-up blueline prints do not conform to the "As-Built Drawings" requirements. As-Built Drawings shall be submitted to the Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As-Built Drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness. Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains. The Owner's acceptance of the "As-Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As-Built Drawings. 6.11.2.1 General The Contractor shall prepare an "AS-BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 61G17-6, Florida Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As-Built Drawings and an AutoCAD file. SectionIII.doc Page 19 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III -General Conditions 61G17-6.002 Definition: (10)(a) As-Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and/or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also know as Record Survey. This survey shall be clearly titled "As-Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the Owner with the required As-Built Survey. 6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems 1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. 2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted. 6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain) All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points. 6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring The as-built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as-built drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional conduit runs, 1-line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder diagram. 6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control The As-Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department. SectionIII.doc Page 20 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions 6.11.2.6 Standards The As-Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 61G17 and the Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that pertain to the as-built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes. 6.11.2.7 Other The As-Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans. 6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS 6.11.3.1 Layer Naming 6.11.3.1.1 Prefixes and Suffixes DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line work and symbols TX suffix denotes text - use for all text, no matter the prefix 6.11.3.1.2 Laver Naming Definitions: GAS gas lines and appurtenances ELEC power lines and appurtenances PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances BOC curbs WALK sidewalk WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers STORM storm lines and appurtenances TREES trees, bushes, planters SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances FENCE all fences BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation DRIVE driveways EOP edge of pavement without curbs SectionIIl.doc Page 21 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III -- General Conditions TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes TOPBANK top of bank TOESLOPE toe of slope TOPBERM top of berm TOEBERM toe of berm SEAWALL seawall CONCSLAB concrete slabs WALL walls, except seawall SHORE shoreline, water elevation CL centerline of road CLD centerline of ditch CLS centerline of swale CORNER property corners, monumentation BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks Other layers may be created as required, using above format. 6.11.3.2 Layer Properties All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer. All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer. All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts. 6.11.3.3 Text Styles Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0°, and a text height of .008 times the plot scale. Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5°, and a text height of .010 times the plot scale. 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES: The as-built survey shall be produced on vellum or bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1 "=20' unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format. Acceptable file formats include: DWG, DXF of a shape file. Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562-4762 or e-mail address Thomas.Mahony@myclearwater.com. 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, SectionllI.doc Page 22 of 45 11/17/2008 Section 111-- General Conditions modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non-execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance". Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work, which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's Representative, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer. 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified parry by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person. If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against the Owner on such account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, the Owner shall notify Contractor, who Section111.doc Page 23 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub-contractor, Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers, directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any of them. 7 OTHER WORK 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for these purposes. The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with the Contractor's work or schedule. 7.2 COORDINATION If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. S OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative. The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General Conditions. The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The Work. The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the Article on Tests and Inspections. SectionIII.doc Page 24 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III -- General Conditions In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances. Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE Dependant of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner and Engineer. 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. All other clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued form the Owner's Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an_adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time. 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection SectionIII.doc Page 25 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions with Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and Completion. 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty (30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60) days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and Contractor. When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution. 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall SectionIlI.doc Page 26 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work. Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants. 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided). If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for Uncovering Work. The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments recommended by Owner's Representative covering: changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties; changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and SectionIII.doc Page 27 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work. Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for directed changes in the WORK, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and other items of direct costs required for the directed work. The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items: 1. Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes SectionIll.doc Page 28 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with negotiating the subject change. 2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall be substantiated through vendors' invoices. 3. Rental or equivalent . rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation costs if specifically used for the WORK. The rental rates shall not exceed the current rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as the full-unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor-owned equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for equipment on stand-by. 4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed by the Contractor or Subcontractor. A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15%) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five percent (5%), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10%). B. A fixed fee often percent (10%) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above. C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4. The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense. 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to SectionIll.doc Page 29 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid. 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence, unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. SectionIII.doc Page 30 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Work. 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation of the Work. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's Representative has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. SectionIII.doc Page 31 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price. 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and SectionIIl.doc Page 32 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the Owner. 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors, and Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Sectionlll.doc Page 33 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the Owner of the owner's rights and remedies hereunder. 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including as-built survey and Inspector overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract. The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on-site marked up as-built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the Contract Documents. In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any progress payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is provided. 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at the Oweer's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the SectionllLdoc Page 34 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) days after receipt of each Application for payment, either indicate a recommendation of payment and present Application to the Owner, or return the Application to Contractor indicating Owner Representative's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Owner's Representative may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to Owner. Owner's Representative may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Owner Representative's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's Representative has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination. The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's Representative because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner to a set- off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor immediate notice of refusal to pay with a copy to the Owner's Representative, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject to the following: Sectionlll.doc Page 35 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will produce a final punch list and assign a date for this work to be completed. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, As-built/Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (1) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii) consent of the surety, if any or if necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to the Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by the Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any Lien. SectionIII.doc Page 36 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition. 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims. If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon, Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount recommended by Owner's Representative. 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Sectionlll.doc Page 37 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time); if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative; if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed. The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not release Contractor from liability. Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items): SectionIII.doc Page 38 of 45 11/17/2008 Section Ill - General Conditions for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE If, through, no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety (90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven (7) day's written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article. 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration. SectionlII.doc Page 39 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions 17 MISCELLANEOUS 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner. 17.2 GIVING NOTICE Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs. 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to notice of assignment. 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to two (2) years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the ContractorNendor. All terms, conditions and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction Department. 18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the Contractor shall work and order thereof. SectionIII.doc Page 40 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions 19 MATERIAL USED All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all materials. 20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications, Technical Specifications, Drawings. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. 21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION The Owner reserves the right, when identified during the bidding process as part of the project's documents, to contract with the Contractor to purchase certain portions of materials identified in the project as a sales tax savings option in compliance with Florida Law since the Owner is exempt from payment of sales tax. The Contract price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment, which will be a part of the Contractor's work. The Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Contractor's contract. The Owner purchasing of construction materials, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. Additionally, Purchase Orders will include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number. See SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION for ODP items included in the Contract Documents and the APPENDIX for ODP Documents. 22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 22.1 GENERAL The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500-foot radius, unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4-1/4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours. SectionIII.doc Page 41 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items provided in the contract proposal. 12919 FXAMPI F CITY SEAL Of CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION TODAY'S DATE: / / PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE We are the construction contractor performing (state type of contract) for the City of Clearwater in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property. This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property owners of the pending start of construction. (Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners) The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way. Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors, textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within the right-of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere. We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Superintendent at (727) Construction is anticipated to begin on: We will be more than happy to assist you. Company Name Company Address Contractor Phone Number 23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION. SectionIII.doc Page 42 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions 23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on sign at the preconstruction conference. 23.3 FIXED SIGN Fixed sign shall be 4-foot by 6-foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2-inches. Sign shall be attached to a minimum of two (2) 4-inch by 4-inch (4"x4") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24-inches above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint. 23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24-inches by 30-inches (24"00") in size and will be attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080- inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade. 23.5 SIGN COLORING Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign itself. Each sign shall depict the City's sun and waves logo. The color of the sun shall be pantone yellow; the wave shall be process blue; and the text shall be black. 23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right-of-way, the signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right-of- way, the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place until the request for final payment. 23.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement, removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced. SectionIIl.doc Page 43 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions 23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN F,• PROJECT NAME (CONTRACT NUMBER) (DEPARTMENT NAME) PROJECT CONTRACTOR:. - COMPLETION DATE: FUNDING: - OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: C1arwater U _I. 2,- ?."x?" ?., -yp 24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the Engineer gives written notice to proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 of these General Conditions. It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number of consecutive calendar da s as determined in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Sectionlll.doc Page 44 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III -- General Conditions Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars ($480.00) per each eight-hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment. The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. SectionIII.doc Page 45 of 45 11/17/2008 SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table of Contents: 1 SCOPE OF WORK ........................................................................................................... 1 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................. 1 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST ................................................................................ .. 2 2 FIELD ENGINEERING .................................................................................................. 3 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR ............. .. 3 2. 1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS ............................................................................ . 3 2. 1.2 LAYOUT DATA ...................................................................................................... . 4 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY ............................... .. 4 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS ............................................................................................... 4 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS ....................................................................................... .. 4 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS ......................................................................... .. 4 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK ................................................................ 6 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK .......................................................... 6 6 CONCRETE ......................................................................................................................7 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK .......................................... 7 7.1 EXCAVATION .............................................................................................................. .. 7 7.2 FORMS ......................................................................................................................... .. 7 8 REINFORCEMENT .........................................................................................................7 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. .. 8 9 OBSTRUCTIONS .............................................................................................................8 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT ............................................................................................ 8 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS .................................................................. 9 12 DEWATERING ................................................................................................................. 9 12.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... .. 9 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 10 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL ................................................................................... 10 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROMANYNON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY ........................... 10 13 SANITARY MANHOLES .............................................................................................. 12 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE .......................................................................................................... 12 13.2 PRECAST TYPE .......................................................................................................... 13 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) ........................................ 13 13.3 DROP MANHOLES ..................................................................................................... 13 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS ............................................................................................ 14 SectionIV.doc i 10/13/2 008 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS .............................................................................................. 14 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES ............................................................................. 14 14 BACKFILL ...................................................................................................................... 14 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC ........................................................................................ 14 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES ................................................................................................................ 15 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 15 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL ..................................................................... 15 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 15 ................................................................................ 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................. 15 18 UNDERDRAINS ............................................................................................................. 15 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 16 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 16 19 STORM SEWERS .......................................................................................................... 16 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION ......................................................................................... 16 19.2 TESTING ...................................................................................................................... 16 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 17 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS .............................................................. 17 20.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 17 20.1.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 17 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ............................................................................................. 17 20.2 INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................... 18 20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 18 20.2.2 FORCEMAINPIPE ............................................................................................. 18 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS ............................................................................................... 18 20.4 TESTING ...................................................................................................................... 18 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITYSEWERS ........................................................................ 18 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS .............................................................................. 19 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 19 20.5.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 19 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ............................................................................................. 19 21 DRAINAGE ..................................................................................................................... 19 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE .......................................................................... 19 22.1 BASE ............................................................................................................................ 19 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ................... 21 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ............................... 21 22.2 SUBGRADE ................................................................................................................. 21 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ................................................................................ 22 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................ 22 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS ................................................................... 22 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE ........................................................................................... 22 SectionlV.doc ii 10/13/2008 23.1.1 AGGREGATE ................................................................ ........................................ 22 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS ................................................................................. 22 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................ 22 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES .................................................................... 23 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS ............................... 23 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 24 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION .............................................................. 24 23.61 CRACKS ................................................................................................................ 24 23.6 POTHOLES ........................................................................................................... 25 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES ............................................................................... 25 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 25 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE .................................................................... 26 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 26 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT ...............................................................................•................. 27 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT .................................. 27 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................. 27 25.1 IRRIGATION ................................................................................................................ 27 25.1..1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 27 25.1.2 PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................... 29 25.1.3 EXECUTION ......................................................................................................... 33 25.2 LANDSCAPE ............................................................................................................... 36 25.2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 36 25.2.2 PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................... 41 25.2.3 EXECUTION ......................................................................................................... 44 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING ................................................... 51 26.1 INTENT ........................................................................................................................ 51 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ........................ 51 26.3 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 51 26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION .................................................................... 52 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ....................................................................................... 52 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 53 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ..................................................................................... 53 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................... 53 26.9 PAYMENT .................................................................................................................... 53 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS ........................................................................................... 53 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 54 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 54 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS ................................ 54 29 CONCRETE CURBS ..................................................................................................... 54 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 54 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 54 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS ......................................................... 54 SectionIV.doc 111 10/13/2008 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS .......................................................................................... 54 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS ......................................................................................... 55 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 55 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 55 31 SODDING ........................................................................................................................ 55 32 SEEDING ......................................................................................................................... 56 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES ................................................................................................................ 56 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES ................................................................................ 56 33.2 PRECAST TYPE .......................................................................................................... 57 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 57 34 MATERIAL USED ......................................................................................................... 57 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ...................................... 57 36 STREET SIGNS .............................................................................................................. 57 37 AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS .................................................. 57 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING ................................ 57 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING ................................................... 57 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS ....................................................................... 58 37.4 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................... 58 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO ...................................................................... 58 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO ....................................................................... 58 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION ............................................................................................ 58 37.8 LIGHTING ................................................................................................................... 59 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL .................................................................................................... 59 37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX ................................................................................................... 59 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE ............................................................................................... 59 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES ................................................................................... 59 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL ................................................................... 59 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS ................................................................. 59 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES ............................. 60 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS .................................... 60 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES ........................................................................ 60 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS ....................................................................................... 60 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES ...................... 60 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS .................................................................... 61 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION ....................................................... 61 38.9 MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................................... 61 38.10 COMPLIANCE ............................................................................................................. 61 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING ................................................................. 64 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE .................... 64 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES ....................................................................................................... 64 SectionIV.doc iv 10/13/2008 41.1 SCOPE .......................................................................................................................... 64 41.2 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 65 41.2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 65 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS ..................................................................... 65 41.2.3 GATE VALVES ...................................................................................................... 67 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES ...................................................................................................... 67 41.2.5 HYDRANTS ........................................................................................................... 68 41.2.6 SER VICE SADDLES ............................................................................................. 69 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS .................................................................. 69 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS ................................................................................ 69 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES ............................................................................................. 70 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS ...................................................................................... 70 41.3 CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................................................ 70 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING ....................................................................................... 70 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING ....................................................................................................... 70 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS ......................................... 72 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES ............................................................... 72 41.4 TESTS ........................................................................................................................... 73 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS ......................................................................................... 73 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST ................................................................................................ 73 41.5 STERILIZATION ......................................................................................................... 73 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT .......................................................................................... 73 4.1.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM ............................................................................................ 73 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE ............................................. ............ 73 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS ............................................................................ 74 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS .............................................................................................. 74 41.6 ME ASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ........................................................................... 74 41.61 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 74 41.62 FURNISHAND INSTALL WATER MAINS ........................................................... 75 41.63 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS ................................................................... 75 41.64 FURNISHAND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS ................................................................................................................ 75 41.65 FURNISHAND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS ....................................................... 75 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 76 43 TENNIS COURTS .......................................................................................................... 76 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS .......................................................................................... 76 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS ............................................................................................. 76 43.1.2 BASE COURSE ..................................................................................................... 76 43.1.3 PRIME COAT ....................................................................................................... 76 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE ........................................................................................... 76 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE ............................................................................................. 76 43.1.6 COLOR COAT ...................................................................................................... 77 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS ............................................................................................ 78 43.2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 78 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION ............................................................................................ 79 43.2.3 SLOPE ................................................................................................................... 79 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................... 80 SectionIV.doc v 10/13/2008 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING ....................................................................................... 80 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE ............................................................................................. 80 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER ................................................................................................... 80 43.2.8 FENCING ............................................................................................................. 81 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS .................................................................................................... 81 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT .......................................................................................... 81 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE ........................................................................................... 83 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) .................................................................................. 83 43.2.13 CONCRETE .......................................................................................................... 83 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING ................................................ 83 43.2.15 WATER COOLER ................................................................................................. 84 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION .............................................................................................. 84 43.2.17 WARRANTY ........................................................................................................... 84 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ......................................................................... 85 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ......... 85 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN .............................................................. 85 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY ......................................................................................... 85 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES ....................................................................... 86 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS ................................................................................................... 86 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS ................. 86 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS ......................................................... 86 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS ............................................................................................. 86 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN ................................... 86 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION .................... 87 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ............................................. 87 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR............ 87 45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING .............................................................................. 87 45.1 INTENT ........................................................................................................................ 87 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTORANSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ........................ 88 45.3 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 88 45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION .................................................................... 88 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ....................................................................................... 89 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 89 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ..................................................................................... 89 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................... 89 45.9 PAYMENT .................................................................................................................... 89 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING ..................................... 90 46.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 90 46. 1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS ........................................................................................... 90 461.2 QUALITYCONTROL ........................................................................................... 90 461.3 SAMPLES .............................................................................................................. 90 46.1.4 REJECTION .......................................................................................................... 90 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS ..................................................................................................... 90 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES ................................................................................. 91 463.1 HANDLING OF PIPE .......................................................................................... 91 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS .................................................................... 91 SectionIV.doc A 10/13/2008 46 3.3 PIPE JOINING ..................................................................................................... 91 463.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE ............................................................ ................. 91 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE ....................................................................... ................. 91 464.1 PIPE REQUIRF,MENTSAND DIMENSIONS ..................................... ................. 91 464.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION .......................................................... ................. 91 464.3 INSERTION ,SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS ......................................... ................. 92 464.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER ............................................................... ................. 92 464.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES ..................................................... ................. 92 464.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED ............................... ................. 92 464.7 BACKFILLING .................................................................................... .................93 464.8 POINT REPAIR .................................................................................... ................. 93 464.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS .................................................................. ................. 93 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE ..... ................. 93 47.1 SCOPE ......................................................................................................... ................. 93 47.2 MATERIALS ............................................................................................... ................. 93 47.3 PIPE ............................................................................................................. ................. 93 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM ..................................................................................... ................. 94 47.5 FITTINGS .................................................................................................... .................94 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................... ................. 94 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT ............................................................... ................. 94 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE ................. 94 48.3 COMPOSITION .......................................................................................... ................. 94 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS ................................................................. ................. 95 48.5 MATERIALS ............................................................................................... ................. 95 48.6 WATER ........................................................................................................ ................. 95 48.7 REINFORCEMENT .................................................................................... .................95 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS ...................................................................... ................. 95 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION ........................................................................ ................. 96 48.10 PROPORTIONING ...................................................................................... .................96 48.11 MIXING ....................................................................................................... .................96 48.12 APPLICATION ............................................................................................ .................96 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ........................................................................ ................. 97 48.14 SURFACE FINISH ...................................................................................... ................. 97 48.15 CURING ...................................................................................................... ................. 97 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION .................................................... ................. 97 48.17 INSPECTION .............................................................................................. ................. 98 48.18 EQUIPMENT .............................................................................................. ................. 98 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION .......... ................. 99 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT ................................................................................ ................. 99 49.2 PAYMENT ................................................................................................... ................. 99 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS ........................................................... ................. 99 49.3.1 MATERIALS ......................................................................................... .................99 49.3.2 INSTALLATIONAND EXECUTION ................................................... ............... 100 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM ............................... ............... 100 49.4.1 MATERIALS ......................................................................................... ...............101 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL ....................................................................... ............... 101 SectionIV.doc vii 10/13/2008 49.6 GROUTING MIX ....................................................................................................... 101 49.7 LINER MIX ................................................................................................................ 101 49.8 WATER ..................................................................................•---...........---................... 102 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS ................................................................................................ 102 49.10 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................. 102 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION ....................................................................... 102 49.11.1 PREPARATION ................................................................................................... 102 49.11.2 MIXING ..............................:................................................................................ 103 49.11.3 SPRAYING .......................................................................... .... 103 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING ......................................................................................... 103 49.11.5 CURING .............................................................................................................. 103 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE ...................................................... 104 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM ....... 104 49.12.1 SCOPE ...................................................... ................................................ 104 49.12.2 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................ 104 49.12.3 INSTALLATIONAND EXECUTION .................................................................. 106 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS .......................................................................... 108 51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM ............................................................ 108 51.1 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................ 108 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS ..................................................................................... 109 51.2.1 ASPHALT ............................................................................................................ 109 51.2.2 CONCRETE ........................................................................................................ 109 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX ........................................................................... 109 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT ......................................................... 109 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE .......................................................... 110 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION .............•---................................................................... 110 51.6 PLAYING LINES ....................................................................................................... 110 51.7 GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 110 51.8 LIMITATIONS ........................................................................................................... 110 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION ......................... .111 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES ................................................................................. .111 53.1 MATERIAL ................................................................................................................ .111 53.1.1 GABIONAND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL .................................................. .111 53.1.2 GABIONAND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL :.............................................. .113 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE ............................................................................................... .114 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC ....................................................................................... .114 53.2 PERFORMANCE ....................................................................................................... 114 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................... .115 54.1 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................ 115 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK ........................................................................................ 115 54.3 WORK METHODS ........................................... ..... 116 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING ....................................................................... .116 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT ........................................................................... .116 54.4 LITTER ....................................................................................................................... 116 54.5 VISUAL CHECK ....................................................................................................... 116 SectionIV.doc viii 10/13/2008 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING .......................................................... 116 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.)..... 116 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL .................................................................................................. 116 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL ................................................................................................ 117 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY ............................................................................................ 117 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION .......................................................................................... 117 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA ......................................................... 117 54.13 MULCH CONDITION ............................................................................................... 117 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR .................................................................... 117 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL ..................................................... 117 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION ............................................................................................ 117 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION ............................................................................................ 118 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE ................................................................................................. 118 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK ....................................................................................... 118 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL .............................................................................. 118 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS ........................................................................................... 118 55 MILLING OPERATIONS ............................................................................................119 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE ...................................... 119 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... 119 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS ................................................................................. 120 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS ..................................................................................... 120 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES .................. 120 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES ............................................................ 120 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING ................................................................................................ 120 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS .............................................................................. 121 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 121 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 121 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING ................................................................................... 121 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 121 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 121 57 RIPRAP ......................................................................................................................... 121 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 121 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 122 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY ................................................................................ 122 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL ............................................................................................. 122 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING ................................................................ 122 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS ........................................... 122 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 123 60 S IGNING AND MARKING ......................................................................................... 123 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 123 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING .............................................................................................. 123 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 123 SectionIV.d oc ix 10/13/2008 62 TREE PROTECTION ..................................................................................................124 62.1 TREE BARRICADES ................................................................................................ 124 62.2 ROOT PRUNING ....................................................................................................... 124 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING ........................................................................................ 125 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES .............................................................................................. 126 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN ............................................................................................... 126 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES ..................................................................... 126 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE ....................................................... 126 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS ........................................................................................... 127 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS ............................................................................................ 127 63.6 POSTING .................................................................................................................... 127 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES ............................................................................................ 127 SectionIV.doc x 10/13/2008 Section IV -- Technical Specifications 1 SCOPE OF WORK 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION Project Name: Fire Station #48 Building Renovations Project Number: 07-0052-FI Scope of Work: Renovations to an existing 4,384 square-foot Fire Station including demolition, interior renovations of Men's and Women's Restroom/Showers; new Kitchen; new Dormitory Rooms with Lockers; new doors and windows; new ceiling; new HVAC rooftop unit and ductwork, supplies, and returns; complete plumbing and electrical renovations. The Contractor shall provide ONE fixed project sign as described in SECTION III, ARTICLE 18 of the Contract Documents. CONTRACT PERIOD: 250 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS SectionIV.doc Page I of 127 10/13/2008 Section IV -- Technical Specifications 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST Project Name: Fire Station #48 Building Renovations Project Number: 07-0052-FI The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X" as shown below: 1 ® Scope Of Work 2.1 Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The Contractor 2.2 ? Line and Grade Shall Be Performed B The City 3 ® Definition Of Terms 4 ® Order And Location Of The Work 5 ® Excavation For Underground Work 6 ® Concrete 7 ® Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work 8 ® Reinforcement 9 ® Obstructions 10 ® Restoration Or Replacement Of Driveways, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement 11 ® Work In Easements Or Parkways 12 ® Dewaterin 13 ? Sanitary Manholes 14 ® Backfill 15 ? Street Crossings, Etc. 16 ? Raisin Or Lowering Of Sanitary Sewer, Storm Drainage Structures 17 Unsuitable Material Removal 18 ? Underdrains 19 ? Storm. Sewers 20 F1 I Sanitary Sewers And Force Mains 21 ? Drainage 22 ? Roadway Base And Sub grade 23 ? Asphaltic Concrete Materials 24 ? Adjustment To The Unit Bid Price For Asphalt 25 General Planting Specifications 26 ? Hd e Deformed - Reformed Pipe Lining 27 ? Plant Mix Driveways 28 ? Reporting Of Tonnage Of Recycled Materials 29 El I Concrete Curbs 30 ? Concrete Sidewalks And Drivewa s 31 Z Sodding 32 ? Seeding 33 ? Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures 34 Material Used 35 ® Conflict Between Plans And Specifications 36 ? Street Signs 37 ® AudioNideo Recording Of Work Areas 38 ® Erosion And Siltation Control SectionIV.doc Page 2 of 127 10/13/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 39 ® Utility Tie In Location Marking 40 Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee 41 ? Potable Water Mains, Reclaimed Water Mains and Appurtenances 42 ? Gas System Specifications 43 Tennis Courts 44 ? Work Zone Traffic Control 45 ? Cured-In-Place Pipe Lining 46 ? Specifications for Polyethylene Sli linin 47 ? Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Ribbed Pipe 48 Gunite Specifications 49 ? Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration 50 ® Project Information Signs 51 ? In-Line Skating Surfacing System 52 ® Resident Notification of Start of Construction 53 Gabions and Mattresses 54 ? Lawn Maintenance Specifications 55 ? Milling Operations 56 ? Clearing and Grubbing 57 ? Ri ra 58 Treatment Plant Safet 59 ? Traffic Signal Equipment and Materials 60 ? Signing And Markin 61 Roadway Lighting 62 ? Tree Protection 63 ? Project Web Pages 2 FIELD ENGINEERING 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals under the laws of the state of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As- built Survey to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents. 2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any such markets. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the SectionIV.doc Page 3 of 127 10/13/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Land Surveyor qualified under the laws of the state of Florida. 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record drawings for the project. 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the project Record construction drawings. 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS For the purpose of these Technical Specifications, the definition of terms from SECTION III, ARTICLE 1 -,DEFINITIONS of these Contract Documents shall apply. For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining thereto. 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise. 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS Abbreviations used in the Contract Documents are defined as follows: AA Aluminum Association, Inc. AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers' Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AMA Acoustical Materials Association AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. ANSI American National Standards Institute SectionIV,doc Page 4 of 127 10/13/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications APA American Plywood Association ASAE American Society of Agricultural Engineers ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWG American Wire Gauge AWMA Aluminum Window Manufacturer's Association AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association CFR Code of Federal Regulations CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CS Commercial Standards and National Bureau of Standards DEP Department of Environmental Protection (Florida) DOT Department of Transportation (Florida) EPA Environmental Protection Agency FAC Florida Administrative Code FBC Florida Building Code FFPC Florida Fire Prevention Code FGC Florida Gas Code FMC Florida Mechanical Code FPC Florida Plumbing Code FedSpec Federal Specifications HI Standards of Hydraulic Institute IBBM Iron Body, Bronzed Mounted IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IPS Iron Pipe Size MIL Military Specification NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NPT National Pipe Thread NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers' Association PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute SBC Standard Building Code (SBCCI) SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. SDI Steel Door Institute SFPC Standard Fire Prevention Code (SBCCI) SGC Standard Gas Code (SBCCI) SJl Steel Joist Institute SMACCNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association SectionIV.doc Page 5 of 127 10/13/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications SMC Standard Mechanical Code (SBCCI) SPC Standard Plumbing Code (SBCCI) SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council TCA Title Council of America UL Underwriters' Laboratories 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 18 - ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK. 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor. For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent Person to City staff at the start of construction. City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense. The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain sufficient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and trench-shoring methods in compliance with all safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to complete the project. Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid SectionIV.doc Page 6 of 127 10/13/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place, excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling and compaction to grade shall be done in such mariner as the Engineer shall direct, without compensation. 6 CONCRETE Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33. All ready mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C-94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5", except when admixtures or special placement considerations are required. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all concrete placement. All concrete shall be tested in the following manner: Placement of less than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3 compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and compensation or denial thereof. 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 7.1 EXCAVATION Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the dry" 7.2 FORMS Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or springing. 8 REINFORCEMENT When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the SectionIV.doc Page 7 of 127 10/13/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/A77 M-86 requirements. 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit price for the item of work specified. 9 OBSTRUCTIONS Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains, or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made. Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means. 10 RESTORATION OR _REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards, whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as base destroyed plus 2", if over 6", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T- 180. Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor, materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or square yard of base. The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense. The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot. SectionlV.doc Page 8 of 127 10/13/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work. 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the construction progress. The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests. Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work. The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission. Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre- construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory requirements. 12 DEWATERING 12.1 GENERAL Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity underdrain system, or sumps with pumps. Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer. The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures. SectioniV.doc Page 9 of 127 10/13/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL The City of Clearwater will hold the Contractor responsible for obtaining a Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from Any Non-Contaminated Site Activity prior to dewatering or discharging into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways. Prior to discharging produced groundwater from any construction site, the contractor must collect samples and analyze the groundwater, which must meet acceptable discharge limits. The following document has been incorporated into this section for reference... 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY City_ Notification Procedure - Contractor must provide the City of Clearwater Environmental Department with the following information prior to beginning dewatering activities: 1) A copy of all groundwater laboratory results 2) A copy of the FDEP Notification Failure to follow the above procedure will result in a Violation and a Stop Work Order will be placed on the project. Depending on the severity of the Violation, the City's Engineering Department may be required to notify the Department of Environmental Protection for enforcement action. The following procedure will be followed: 1 st occurrence - Stop Work Order 2nd occurrence - Notification to FDEP It is recommended that the Contractor call or meet with the City Environmental staff if you have any questions. You may contact the City at 562-4750 for direction or further assistance. ' STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION GENERIC PERMITOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY The facility is authorized to discharge produced ground water from any non-contaminated site activity which discharges by a point source to surface waters of the State, as defined in Chapter 62- 620, F.A.C., only if the reported values for the parameters listed in Table 1 do not exceed any of the listed screening values. Before discharge of produced ground water can occur from such sites, analytical tests on samples of the proposed untreated discharge water shall be performed to determine if contamination exists. Minimum reporting requirements for all produced ground water dischargers. The effluent shall be sampled before the commencement of discharge, again within thirty (30) days after commencement of discharge, and then once every six (6) months for the life of the project to maintain continued coverage under this generic permit. Samples taken in compliance with the provisions of this permit SectionIV.doc Page 10 of 127 10/13/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications shall be taken prior to actual discharge or mixing with the receiving waters. The effluent shall be sampled for the parameters listed in Table 1. TABLE 1 Screening Values for Discharges into: Parameter Fresh Waters Coastal Waters Total Organic Carbon (TOC) 10.0 mg/1 10.0 mg/1 PH, standard units 6.0-8.5 6.5-8.5 Total Recoverable Mercury - by Method 1631 E 0.012 pg/1 0.025 µg/l Total Recoverable Cadmium 9.3 µg/1 9.3 µg/l Total Recoverable Copper 2.9 µg/l 2.9 µg/l Total Recoverable Lead 0.03 mg/1 5.6 µg/l Total Recoverable Zinc 86.0 4g/1 86.0 µg/1 Total Recoverable Chromium (Hex.) 11.0 µg/1 50.0 µg/l Benzene 1.0 µg/l 1.0 µg/l Naphthalene 100.0 µg/l 100.0 µg/l If any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, except TOC, the discharge is not authorized by this permit orb the Ci o Clearwater. (a) For initial TOC values that exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, which may be caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds, the permittee may request to be exempted from the TOC requirement. To request this exemption, the permittee shall submit additional information with a Notice of Intent (NOI), described below, which describes the method used to determine that these compounds are naturally occurring. The Department shall grant the exemption if the permittee affirmatively demonstrates that the TOC values are caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds. (b) The NOI shall be submitted to the appropriate Department district office thirty (30) days prior to discharge, and contain the following information: 1. the name and address of the person that the permit coverage will be issued to, 2. the name and address of the facility, including county location; 3. any applicable individual wastewater permit number(s); 4. a map showing the facility and discharge location (including latitude and longitude); SectionIV.doc Page 11 of 127 10/13/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 5. the name of the receiving water; and 6. the additional information required by paragraph (3)(a) of this permit. (c) Discharge shall not commence until notification of coverage is received from the Department. For fresh waters and coastal waters, the pH of the effluent shall not be lowered to less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units for coastal waters, or raised above 8.5 units, unless the permittee submits natural background data confirming a natural background pH outside of this range. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units in coastal waters, the pH shall not vary below natural background or vary more than one (1) unit above natural background for fresh and coastal waters. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be higher than 8.5 units, the pH shall not vary above natural background or vary more than one (1) unit below natural background of fresh and coastal waters. The permittee shall include the natural background pH of the receiving waters with the results of the analyses required under paragraph (2) of this permit. For purposes of this section only, fresh waters are those having a chloride concentration of less than 1500 mg/l, and coastal waters are those having a chloride concentration equal to or greater than 1500 mg/l. In accordance with Rule 62-302.500(1)(a-c), F.A.C., the discharge shall at all times be free from floating solids, visible foam, turbidity, or visible oil in such amounts as to form nuisances on surface waters. If contamination exists, as indicated by the results of the analytical tests required by paragraph (2), the discharge cannot be covered by this Generic Permit. The facility shall apply for an individual wastewater permit at least ninety (90) days prior to the date discharge to surface waters of the State is expected, or, if applicable, the facility may seek coverage under any other applicable Department generic permit. No discharge is permissible without an effective permit. If the analytical tests required by paragraph (2) reveal that no contamination exists from any source, the facility can begin discharge immediately and is covered by this permit without having to submit an NOT request for coverage to the Department. A short summary of the proposed activity and copy of the analytical tests shall be sent to the applicable Department district office within one (1) week after discharge begins. These analytical tests shall be kept on site during discharge and made available to the Department if requested. Additionally, no Discharge Monitoring Report forms are required to be submitted to the Department. All of the general conditions listed in Rule 62-621.250, F.A.C., are applicable to this Generic Permit. There are no annual fees associated with the use of this Generic Permit. 13 SANITARY MANHOLES 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe. SectionIV.doc Page 12 of 127 10/13/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 301. 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. Interior of built up manholes which have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a force main shall have the inside plastered with 1/2-inch of grout and coated as precast manholes below. The exterior and interior of all precast manholes shall be coated with at least 15 mils dry thickness of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite. 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling. 14 BACKFILL Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar material. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means. Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98% compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement. Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a minimum of 95% compaction of AASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test. The cost of Backfill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure. 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the Engineer. The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation. SectionIV.doc Page 14 of 127 10/13/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off- site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall either be shown on the plans, or determined in the field by the Engineer in conjunction with the City's Materials Tester. 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal. 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item. 18 UNDERDRAINS The Contractor shall construct sub-surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface covered with a non-degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8" diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F-758 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189 described in FDOT Section 948-4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35. Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454E or 12454C, manufactured per ASTM F949-93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint. Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non-perforated pipe with compacted backfill. All poly-chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure SectionIV.doc Page 15 of 127 10/13/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6) inches in thickness with 6/6 x 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways. 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted. 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 31 SODDING Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor, equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the SectionIV.doc Page 55 of 127 10/13/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. 32 SEEDING Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic conformance with the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured. When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work. 33 STORM_ MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to 235. When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans and applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the Engineer. Said structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other causes until acceptance of the work. 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of concrete base. The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of the manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer. SectionIV.doc Page 56 of 127 10/13/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 33.2 PRECAST TYPE The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option. Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using O ring between precast sections will not be acceptable for storm structures. 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis. 34 MATERIAL USED This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 19 - MATERIAL USED. 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 20 - CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 36 STREET SIGNS The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROHIBITED. All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal. 37 AUDIONIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of a pre-construction conditions. 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty-one (21) days prior to construction in any area. SectionIV.doc Page 57 of 127 10/13/2008 Section 1V - Technical Specifications 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of pre-construction color audio-video recording documentation. 37.4 EQUIPMENT All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations. 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom-in and zoom out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation shall be recorded in SP mode. 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. SectionIV.doc Page 58 of 127 10/13/2008 Section iv -Technical Specifications 37.8 LIGHTING All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping shall be done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping shall not exceed forty-four (44) feet per minute. 37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date. 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc. within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at any one time. 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work. 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping. SectionIV.doc Page 59 of 127 10/13/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days. 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by sediment traps such as secured bay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and modified as required by construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer before installation. 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and/or prevent the transport of sediment onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters, dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one week of installation. 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans. During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City. The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before installing any permanent subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of contain-ing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular removal of sediment from the basin. 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land alteration, development and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after the in channel work is completed. SectionIV.doc Page 60 of 127 10/13/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity. 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards: a. No more than 400 lineal feet of trench shall be open at any one time; b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway. 38.9 MAINTENANCE All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required. 38.10 COMPLIANCE Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order". City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 and 607 are examples of accepted methods that may be used or required to control erosion and siltation. SectionIV.doc Page 61 of 127 10/13/2008 Section TV - Technical Specifications City of Clearwater - Erosion Control This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible for soil erosion control on their site. The City of Clearwater Engineering Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount of soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways. The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and subcontractors accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways. When erosion takes place, a City Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The procedure will be as follows: 1 st occurrence - Warning 2nd occurrence - $32 reinspection fee 3rd occurrence - $80 reinspecion fee 4th occurrence - Stop work order Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Engineering Department may elect to rectify the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly. The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check. If the contractor would like to meet with a City inspector on any particular site, please contact Construction Services at 462-6126 or Planning & Development Services at 562-4741. Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on all land development projects. Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder. Contact Engineering Department with specific questions at 562-4750. SectionlV.doc Page 62 of 127 10/13/2008 C w U 6] C] CIO V 0 U on a w d d W a U w O U W N O O r? M1 O w wz 00 W Uj O? CCU dd O W? Up w H V] OW v w GQ W H W r? W H H z?o OU?U 0 OOH F"' W H d as 0 Quo d?7W O O WWL nW? QHo O ? n?W UUJ ?zo d Q?z O 3 ww C C N o p 5R COS V) W a W U O H 00 U n N ?D tn n N n C/] U FN a 0 W W A z z a a `V N ?D N ?D n N n O U F?1 Cl) U V a a Q H W Q Q U z 0 U C C] ? .o bU w rri p s O U ? C b O h y U rL.+ ? U O ? ? 3 0 cd ] pp w 15 0 3 •C 'D C v cFa ? ?b Oq O U dA con I.. O U Q' W O z Y...1 W O O 4 a d H 0 0 N M O r cq w 0 M Q. 0 b 0 Section IV -Technical Specifications 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection. Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by the American Public Works Association as follows: SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission Municipal Electric Systems HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission Oil Distribution and Transmission Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems Police and Fire Communications Cable Television SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems LAVENDER RECLAIMED WATER WHITE PROPOSED EXCAVATION Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be 6-inch x 3-inch and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be 4-inch X 2-inch and be placed on the curb face. 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 24 - AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE. 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES 41.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in connection with the construction of potable water mains, reclaimed water mains and appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up. SectionIV.doc Page 64 of 127 10/13/2008 Section IV -- Technical Specifications 49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING 1. Dampen surface. 2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application. 3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches) has been achieved. 4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole. 5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish. 6. Allow for a 24-hour cure time prior to epoxy coating. NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing times. 49.12.3.7 EPOXY COATING Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6) hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours. 49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area. 49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12.3.10 WARRANTY All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years, provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used. 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 - PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS. 51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM 51.1 SCOPE 1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finish System over recreational areas intended for In-Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the SectionIV,doc Page 108 of 127 10/13/2008 Section .1V -- Technical Specifications 4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings. 5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun. 6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use. 7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring. 8. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In-line Skates. 9. Coefficient of friction = 0.78 10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to 1 hour at 70°F with 60% relative humidity. 11. Keep court clears. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery. In-Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear. 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 22 - RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION. 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 53.1 MATERIAL 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL 53.1.1.1 PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non-raveling construction and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge 12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal Specifications QQ-W-461H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish 5, Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A-641. The weight of zinc coating shall be determined by ASTM A-90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B-6, Table 1. Uniformity of coating shall equal or exceed four 1-minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A-239. The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4 1/2 inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 10), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 13 %), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger-Tite SectionIV.doc Page 111 of 127 10/13/2008 APA 07.08 January 9, 2009 Fire Station #48 SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Section IVa Fire Station #48 Building Renovations 1700 North Belcher Road Clearwater, Florida ARCHITECT: STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: MECHANICAL ENGINEER: ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: Plisko Architecture, PA, AIA 800 Drew Street Clearwater, FL 33755 727-442-7200 McCarthy & Associates, Inc 2555 Nursery Road Suite 101 Clearwater, FL 33764 727-536-8772 Griner Engineering, Inc. 1628 First Avenue North St. Petersburg, FL 33713 (727) 822-2335 Griner Engineering, Inc. 1628 First Avenue North St. Petersburg, FL 33713 (727) 822-2335 Address all communications regarding this work to the Architect at the address listed above. COVER I of 1 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 Building Renovations 1700 North Belcher Road Clearwater, Florida SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS January 9, 2009 • Cover Page • Table of Contents • Schedule of Drawings Fire Station #48 Section Section Page Number Title Number DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 ................ Summary ....................................................................................................... 01100 - 1 of 2 01320 ................ Construction Progress Documentation ........................................................ 01320 - 1 of 3 01322 ................ Photographic Documentation ....................................................................... 01322 - 1 of 2 01330 ................ Submittal Procedures .................................................................................... 01330 -- 1 of 6 01500 ................ Temporary Facilities and Controls............................... ................................ 01550 - 1 of 3 01524 ................ Construction Waste Management ................................................................ 01524 - 1 of 1 01600 ................ Product Requirements .................................................................................. 01600 --- 1. of 4 01731 ................ Cutting and Patching -----............................................................................... 01731 - 1 of 3 01732 ................ Selective Demolition .................................................................................... 01732 - 1 of 3 01770 ................ Closeout Procedures ..................................................................................... 01770 - 1 of 4 01781 ................ Project Record Documents ........................................................................... 01781 - 1 of 2 DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 02361 ................ Termite Control ............................................................................................02361 - 1 of 2 02821 ................ Vinyl Fencing ................... DIVISION 3 --- CONCRETE 03300 ................ Cast-in-Place Concrete ................................................................................. 03300 - 1 of 14 03320 ................ Precast Concrete U-Lintels and Sills ...........................................................03320 - 1 of 2 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04200 ................ Unit Masonry ......----...............--..... ...............................................................04200 - 1 0 2 DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 ................ Structural Steel .............................................................................................05210 - 1 of 5 05310 ................ Steel Deck ..................................................................................................... 05310 - 1 of 4 TOC 1 of 3 APA 07.08 Schedule of Drawings Architectural A-1 .................. Title Sheet A-1.2 ............... 1" = 40' Site Plan A-2.1 ............... 1/4" Demolition Floor Plan A-2.2 ............... 1/4" Proposed Floor Plan A-3.1 ............... 1/4" North & East Exterior Elevations A-3.2 ............... 1/4" South & West Exterior Elevations A-4 .................. 1/4" Building Sections A-5 .................. 1/2" Wall Sections A-6 .................. Door/Window Schedules and Details A-7 .................. 1/8" Reflected Ceiling Plan & Room Finish Schedule A-8 .................. 3/8" Interior Elevations (1-16) A-9 .................. 3/8" Interior Elevations (17-21) Structural S-1 ...................Structural Specifications S-2 ...................1/4" Foundation Plan S-3 ...................1/4" Roof Framing Plan Mechanical M-1 .................Mechanical Legend, Notes and Schedules m-2 .................Mechanical Demolition Plan m-3 .................Mechanical Renovation Plan M-4 .................Mechanical Details M-5 .................Mechanical Details Electrical E-1 ..................Electrical Lighting Plan E-2 ..................Electrical Power Plan E-3 ..................Electrical System Plan E-4 ..................Electrical Riser and Fire Alarm Diagrams E-5 ..................Electrical and Fire Penetration Details E-6 ..................Electrical Symbol Legend and Panel Schedules Plumbing P-1 ..................Existing/Demolition Supply Plan P-2 ..................Existing/Demolition Sanitary Plan P-3 ..................Renovation Supply Plan P-4 ..................Renovation Sanitary Plan P-5 ..................Gas Piping Plan P-6 ..................Plumbing Riser P-7 ..................Plumbing Riser P-8 ..................Plumbing Schedule, Notes, & Details P-9 ..................Plumbing Details Fire Protection FP- 1 ................Fire Sprinkler Head Location Fire Station #48 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS 1 of 1 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTIC 06402 ................ Interior Architectural Woodwork ................................................................. 06402 - 1 of 3 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210 ................ Building Insulation... .................... ......................07510 - 1 of 3 07510 ................ Built-Up Bituminous Roofing (Asphalt) ............................... 07920 ................ Joint Sealants ................................................................................................07920 - 1 of 5 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08100 ................ Steel Doors and Frames ................................................................................ 08100 - 1 of 4 08211 ................ Flush Wood Doors ........................................................................................ 08211 - 1 of 3 08411 ................ Aluminum-Framed Entrances ...................................................................... 08411 - 1 of 5 08520 ................ Aluminum Windows .................................................................................... 08520 - 1 of 3 08710 ................ Finish Hardware ........................................................................................... 08710 - 1 of 7 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09111 ................ ................... Non-Load-bearing Steel Framing ............................................. 09111 -- 1 0 3 09220 ................ Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco) ................................................................ 09220 - 1 of 4 09250 ................ Gypsum Board .............................................................................................. 09250 - 1 of 4 09310 ................ Ceramic Tile ................................................................................................. 0931.0 - 1 of 5 09511 ................ Acoustical Panel Ceilings............................................................................. 09511 - 1 of 6 09651 ................ Resilient Floor Tile....................... 09653 ................ Resilient Wall Base and Accessories ........................................................... 09653 -1 of 3 09680 ................ Carpet ............................................................................................................ 09680 - 1 of 2 09900 ................ ...................................................................... Painting ................................... 09900 - 1 of 8 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES ..................................................10155 - of 3 10155 ................ Toilet Compartments.................................. 10431 ................ Signage.......................................................................................................... 10431 - 1 of 4 10505 ................ Metal Lockers ...............................................................................................10505 - 1 of 2 10520 ................ Fire-Protection Specialties ...........................................................................10520 - 1 of 3 10801 ................ Toilet and Bath Accessories ......................................................................... 10801 - 1 of 3 DIVISION 11- EQUIPMENT (not used) DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS 12492 ................ Vertical Louver Blinds .................................................................................12492 - 1 of 2 DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13910 ................ Basic Fire Suppression Materials and Methods ..........................................13910 - 1 of 7 13930 ................ Wet-Pipe Fire Suppression Sprinklers ......................................................... 13930 - 1 of 5 TOC 2 of 3 APA 07.08 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS (not used) DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL Fire Station #48 15000 ................ Common Requirements for Mechanical Work ............................................ 15000 - 1 of 9 15005 ................ Instructions and Maintenance Manuals ....................................................... 15005 - 1 of 1 15007 ................ Identification of Mechanical Systems .......................................................... 15007 - 1 of 2 15010 ................................................... ................ Plumbing Piping ........................................ 15010 - 1 of 6 15020 ................ Piping and Fittings: Soil, Waste Vent and Drain ....................................... 15020 - 1 of 1 15031 ................ Piping: Condensate Drains - PVC ............................ ................................... 15031 - 1 0 1 15110 ................ Pipe, Valves, and Fittings: Potable Water .................................................. 15110 - 1 of 2 15190 ................ Hangers, and Supports, Piping Systems ...................................................... 15190 - 1 of 1 15200 ................ Plumbing ....................................................................................................... 15200 - 1 of 1 15201 ................ Plumbing Fixtures, Trim, and Specialties .................................................... 15201 - 1 of 3 15220 ........................................................... ................ Sanitary Drainage Systems................ 1522 - 1 of 2 15221 ........................................................ ................ Water Heater: Electric......................... 15221 - 1 of 1 15400 ................ Insulation, Thermal ....................................................................................... 15400 - 1 of 5 15611 ................ Fans, Ceiling Cabinet Centrifugal, Light Duty ........................................... 15611 - 1 of 2 15736 ................ Packaged Roof Top Units .................. .............................................15800 - 1 0 3 15800 ................ Air Distribution Equipment............................. 15850 ................ Ductwork - Sheet Metal - Low Pressure ....................................................15850 - 1 of 9 1.5963 ................ Building Automation System/Automatic Temperature Control .................15963 --l of 17 15980 ................ Test and Balance - Final ..............................................................................15980 - 1 of 3 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16050 ................ Basic Electrical Materials and Methods ...................................................... 16050 - 1 of 2 16060 ................ Grounding and Bonding ............................................................................... 16060 - 1 of 4 16070 ................ Electrical Hangers and Supports .................................................................. 16070 - 1 of 9 16075 ................ Electrical Identification ................................................................................ 16075 - 1 of 5 16100 ................ Wiring Methods ............................................................................................ 16100 - 1 of 4 16123 ................ Building Wire and Cable .............................................................................. 16123 - 1 of 4 16130 ................ Raceway and Boxes ...................................................................................... 16130 -1 of 8 16131 ................ Cabinets and Enclosures ............................................................................... 16131 - 1 of 3 16140 ................ Wiring Devices ............................................................................................. 16140 - 1 of 5 16150 ................ Wiring Connections ...................................................................................... 16150 -1 of 3 16411 ................ Enclosed Switches ........................................-----........................................... 16411 - 1 of 3 16423 ................ Enclosed Contactors ..................................------............................................. 16423 - 1 of 3 16442 ................ Panel Boards ---------------.......................................................--.--...................... 16442 - 1 of 4 16491 ................ Fuses ..................................----------...........................................................---... 16491 - 1 of 3 16510 ................ Interior Luminaires ....................................................................................... 16510 - 1 of 5 16530 ................ Emergency Lighting ..................................................................................... 16530 -- 1 of 4 16721 ................ Fire Alarm and Detection System ................................................................ 16721 - 1 of 8 End of Table of Contents TOC 3 of 3 APA 07.08 SECTION 01100 -- SUMMARY PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Access to site. 4. Coordination with occupants. 5. Work restrictions. 6. Specification and drawing conventions. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: Fire Station #48 Building Renovations 1. Project Location: 1700 North Belcher Road Clearwater, Florida B. Owner: City of Clearwater 1. Owner's Representative: Perry Lopez C. Architect: Plisko Architecture, P.E. 800 Drew Street Clearwater, Florida 33755 Fire Station #48 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of the Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. Renovations to an existing 4,384 square-foot Fire Station including demolition, interior renovations of Men's and Women's Restroom/Showers; new Kitchen; new Dormitory Rooms with Lockers; new doors and windows; new ceiling; new HVAC rooftop unit and ductwork, supplies, and returns; complete plumbing and electrical renovations. B. Type of Contract. 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.4 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section. B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Limits: Confine construction operations to area indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. 1.5 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period, with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction SUMMARY 01100 - 1 of 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. 1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes. C. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances within the existing building is not permitted. 1.7 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B. Division 1 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 1 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on the Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on the Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 _ EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01100 SUMMARY 01100 - 2 of 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: I . Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Daily construction reports. 3. Field condition reports. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. PDF electronic file and two paper copies. B. Start-up Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. D. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals. E. Field Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule form date established for commencement of the Work to date of Substantial Completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 -1 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station 948 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, CPM Schedule in color, Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of Work. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar. 2.3 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or other precipitation. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events. 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 2 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 3 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station # 48 SECTION 01322 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. B. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting digital media as Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Include same label information as corresponding set of photographs. B. Construction Photographs: Submit two prints of each photographic view within seven days of taking photographs. 1. Format: 8-by-10-inch (203-by-254-mm) smooth-surface matte prints on single-weight photographic paper, enclosed back to back in clear plastic sleeves that are punched for standard 3-ring binder. 2. Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber-stamped impression with the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Date photograph was taken if not date stamped by camera. C. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. 3. Digital Images: Submit a complete set of digital image electronic files with each submittal of prints as a Project Record Document on CD-ROM. Identify electronic media with date photographs were taken. Submit images that have same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Photographer Qualifications: An individual who has been regularly engaged as a photographer of construction projects. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA A. Digital Images: Provide images in uncompressed JPEG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 4.0 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 1024 by 768 pixels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs. B. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location. PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01322 - 1 of 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station # 48 C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. 2. Date and Time: Include date and time in filename for each image. 3. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images on CD-ROM in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images same as for those submitted to Architect. D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of demolition, take digital photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. 1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs. 2. Take eight photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work. 3. Take eight photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction. E. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take eight digital photographs weekly, with timing each month adjusted to coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. END OF SECTION 01322 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01322 - 2 of 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. See Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule. C. See Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction photographs. D. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties. E. See Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - I of 6 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.01.A). i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 1. Other necessary identification. E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned. G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "REVIEWED." 1. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to ,manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "REVIEWED" taken by Architect. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. I . If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. C. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. e. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. f. Printed performance curves. g. Operational range diagrams. h. Compliance with specified referenced standards. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 2 of 6 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 i. Testing by recognized testing agency. 4. Number of Copies: Submit seven copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return five copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. C. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Notation of coordination requirements. j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. k. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. 1. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. M. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and .field-installed wiring. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches. 3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. C. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit three full sets of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 3 of 6 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample. E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. 1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. F. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." G. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. 1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 1. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 4 of 6 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. M. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. N. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. 0. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. P. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." Q. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. R. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. S. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 2. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. T. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. U. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation." V. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect. 1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return them for resubmittal. 2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 5 of 6 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 I . If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: 1. Reviewed. 2. Revise. 3. Rejected. 4. Furnish as Corrected. C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect willforward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 6 of 6 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - I of 3 APA 07.08 PART 3 - EXECUTION Fire Station 448 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 1 Section "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to private system indicated as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. F. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. H. Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service, including electronic mail in field office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. C. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 2 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 3.4 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. I . Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 3 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 01524 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. B. See Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 01524 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524 -1 of 1 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. I. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. I . Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 -1 of 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: I. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: I . Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16. Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 2 of 4 APA 07.08 PART2-PRODUCTS fire Station #48 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 3 of 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 4 of 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 SECTION 01731- CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 1.2 ' SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: I. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted. 6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure. 7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 1 of 3 APA 07.08 PART 2 - PRODUCTS Fire Station 448 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-care drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 2 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. END OF SECTION 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 3 of 3 APA 07.08 SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION Fire Station #48 PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B. See Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management" for disposal of demolished materials. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver therm to Owner. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Predemolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Comply with Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work begins. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. C. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in construction to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. 1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 -1 of 3 APA 07.08 PART 3 - EXECUTION Fire Station #48 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Division I Section "Photographic Documentation." F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and sea] or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 2 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire- suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Construction Waste Management." B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 3 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: I. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion construction photographic documentation. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete with request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 1.4. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 1 of 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will. be issued. I. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. b. Three paper copies, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. 1.5 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-1 I-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 2 of 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide table of contents at beginning of document. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that meet Green Seal GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. S. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. j. Remove labels that are not permanent. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 3 of 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. 1. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. in. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. P. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report. END OF SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 4 of 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints. B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product ,Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. D. Refer to General Conditions Section Three for additional City requirements/ PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. 3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. I . Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 1 of 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded .later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable.. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. ' Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 2 of 2 APA 07.09 Fire Station 448 SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I . Soil treatment with termiticide. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the EPA-Registered Label. B. Product certificates. C. Soil Treatment Application Report: Include the following: 1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Brand name and manufacturer of term iticide. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used. 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located. B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides according to the EPA-Registered Label. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. I . Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' continuing service including monitoring, inspection, and re-treatment for occurrences of termite activity. Provide a standard continuing service agreement. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period; and terms for future renewal options. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Termiticides: a. Aventis Environmental Science USA LP; Termidor. b. Bayer Corporation; Premise 75. C. Dow AgroSciences LLC; Dursban TC, Equity. d. FMC Corporation, Agricultural Products Group; Talstar, Prevail FT, Torpedo. e. Syngenta; Demon TC. TERMITE CONTROL 02361 - 1 of 2 APA 07.09 Fire Station 948 2.2 SOIL TREATMENT A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. General: Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations. B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer. 3.2 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly. 1. Slabs-on-Grade: Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab, and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; also along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 3. Masonry: Treat voids. 4. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated. B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground- supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions. D. Post warning signs in areas of application. E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION 02361 TERMITE CONTROL 02361 - 2 of 2 APA 10.28 Fire Station #48 SECTION 02821 - VINYL FENCING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes the following: 1. Polypropylene fence and gate components. 2. Concrete for post footings. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section. I. Section 02200-Earthwork 2. Section 03300-Cast-in-Place concrete 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Posts are the vertical structure support members of the fence. B. Rails are the horizontal structural support members of the fence or gate frame. C. Pickets are the vertical, non-structural members between bottom and top rails. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the conditions of the contract. B. Product Data: In the form of manufacturer's technical data, specifications, and installations for fence, posts, post caps, and accessories. C. Samples for verification of color in form of 9-inch lengths of actual product to be used in color selection. D. Shop Drawings showing fence design. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has at least three years experience and has completed at least five ornamental fence projects with same material and of similar scope to that indicated for this project with a successful construction record of in-service performance. B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain composite fences and gates, including accessories, fitting, and fastenings, from a single source. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for fences and gates shown on the drawings in relation to the property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field measurements. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: 30 year nonprorated limited warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FENCE MATERIALS A. General: Provide composite fence materials recognized to be of type indicated and tested to show compliance with indicated performances. B. Available Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include: VINYL FENCING 02821 - 1 of 3 APA 10.28 Fire Station 448 L CertainTeed 2. Style Name: Bufftech "Chesterfield" (Smooth finish); Height, 6'-0"minimum 3. Color Match White 2.2 POLYPROPYLENE ORNAMENTAL FENCE COMPONENTS A. General: Posts, rails, and uprights shall be of composite long strand polypropylene material. B. Fence Posts: One piece pultruded, of lengths indicated and pre-routed to receive rails at spacing indicated. 1. Cross Section: 4" minimum 2. Wall Thickness: 0.0140" minimum 3. Corner Radius: 11/32" minimum C. Rails: One piece pultruded, of lengths indicated and pre-routed to receive pickets at spacing indicated. 1. Cross Section: 2" x 6" minimum 2. Wall Thickness: 0.090" minimum 3. Corner Radius: 5/16" minimum D. Pickets: One piece pultruded, and predrilled of lengths indicated. 1. Cross Section: 7/8" x 7" minimum 2. Wall Thickness: 0.060" minimum 3. Corner Radius: 3/16" minimum E. Post/Picket Caps: Molded, one piece, polypropylene material. 1. Cross Section: Match post, gate upright or picket cross section. 2. Thickness: 0.100" minimum. Configuration: Flat, Pyramid or Decorative styling as required for installation on top of posts and pickets. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Rail Lock Rods: One piece stainless steel or fiberglass, of length indicated. B. Fasteners and Anchorage: Stainless steel or galvanized. All fasteners to be concealed or colored heads match. Provide sizes as recommended by fence manufacturer. 2.4 CONCRETE A. Concrete: Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33, and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2000 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cubic yard, 1-inch maximum size aggregate, 3-inch maximum slump. Use 1 /2 inch maximum size aggregate in post where required. B. Packages Concrete Mix: Mix dry-packaged normal-weight concrete conforming to ASTM C 387 with clean water to obtain a 2 to 3 inch slump. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install fence in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions. During installation, composite fiberglass and polypropylene components shall be carefully handled and stored to avoid contact with abrasive surfaces. Install components in sequence as recommended by fence manufacturer. 1. Install fence as indicated on the drawings provided. 2. Variations from the installation indicated must be approved. VINYL FENCING 02821 - 2 of 3 APA 10.28 Fire Station #48 3.2 FENCE INSTALLATION (Refer to Prestige Ornamental Fence Installation Instructions for complete details from manufacturer) A. Excavation: Drill or and-excavate (using post hole digger) holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated, in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. 1. If not indicated on drawings, excavate holes for each post to a minimum diameter of 12 inches. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, excavate hole depths no less than 30 inches or to frost line. B. Posts: Install posts in one piece, plumb and in line. Space a maximum of six feet o.c. unless otherwise indicated. Enlarge excavation as required to provide clearance indicated between post and side of excavation. 1. Protect portion of posts above ground from concrete splatter. Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Check each post for vertical and top alignment and hold in position during placement and finishing operations. a. Unless otherwise indicated, terminate tip of concrete footings 3 inches below adjacent grade and trowel to a crown to shed water. b. Secure posts in position for manufacturers' recommendation until concrete sets. C. Remove concrete splatters from fence material with care to avoid scratching. C. Assemble Fence Section: 1. Install pickets in one piece into routed holes fabricated in rails. 2. Align drilled picket holes with rail lock rod slot in rails. 3. Slide rail lock rods through hole in end of rail and through each picket hole to lock in place. D. Install Fence Section: 1. Insert first post in hole at approximate height. 2. Insert rails of section into routed holes of first post until rails reach designed stop. 3. Install second post in its proper hole and insert rail ends into post until they reach the designed stop. 4. Fill holes around posts with concrete mix. 5. Square, plumb and level section and posts. 6. Secure top rail inside post with screws provided. E. Caps: Install picket and post caps as necessary. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove all traces of dirt and soiled areas. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper maintenance of fence components. END SECTION 02821 VINYL FENCING 02821 - 3 of 3 AFA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE OF WORK 1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete all cast-in-place concrete work, including formwork, reinforcing steel and all related work as shown and specified, except as specifically excluded hereinafter. 2. In addition to construction of cast-in-place concrete work, the work includes the items listed below: a. Setting anchor bolts, frames, and other items indicated to be embedded in concrete b. Grouting of structural steel bearing on concrete c. Concrete curbs d. Dowels for masonry walls e. Concrete walks f. Concrete pavement g. Laboratory field testing services 3. Cooperate with affected personnel or contractors in setting and/or fastening sleeves, piping, inserts, conduits, hangers, ties and similar items in the forms, where such items are to be furnished and installed under other subdivisions of these specifications. B. RELATED WORK NOT SPECIFIED UNDER THIS SUBDIVISION 1. Foundations and pads not shown on architectural, civil or structural drawings. 2. Furnishing steel frames and grating. 3. Furnishing miscellaneous steel shapes and plates embedded in concrete. 4. Furnishing anchor bolts for structural steel. 5. Furnishing piping and conduit embedded in concrete. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. APPLICABLE STANDARDS 1. Provide all materials and perform all work in accordance with the latest issue of ACI 301 "Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete A" and the reference specifications listed therein. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 1 of 14 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 2. The applicable provisions of the latest issue of the following ACI and CRSI Standards are made a part of these specifications. Where the provisions of any reference specification conflict with those of ACI 301, the more stringent provisions govern. ACI NUMBER TITLE 302.1 R Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction 304.8 Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete 304.2R-91 Placing concrete by pumping methods. 305R Hot Weather Concreting 306R Cold Weather Concreting 308 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete 309R Guide for Consolidation of Concrete 315 Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures 318-89 & 89R Building code requirements for reinforced concrete 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork 70-56 Guide for Use of Epoxy Compounds with Concrete - Committee 503 Report 75-18 Concrete committee 503 report. Cold weather concreting. CRSI NUMBER TITLE 63 Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, not less than 21 days prior to placing of concrete, the following proposed concrete mix design data: 1. Intended usage and location for each type 2. Mix design for each type 3. Cement content in pounds per cubic yard 4. Coarse and fine aggregate in pounds per cubic yard 5. Water-cement ratio by weight 6. Cement type and manufacturer 7. Slump range 8. Air content range 9. Admixture types and manufacturers 10. Percent of admixtures by weight 11. Strength test data required to establish mix design B. Submit complete detail and placing shop drawings for all reinforcing steel including accessories that have been reviewed and stamped by the General Contractor. C. Refer to Section 01300 for all submittals. PART2 PRODUCTS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 2 of 14 APA 07.08 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS Faze Station #48 A. Portland Cement - ASTM C 150, Type I. Type III may be used where authorized by the Engineer. B. Air-Entraining Admixtures - ASTM C 260, Darax AEA, W. R. Grace & Company, SIKA AER, SIKA, MB-AE90, Master Builders, Air Mix, Euclid Chemical Corp. C. Water-Reducing Admixtures - ASTM C 494, Type D. WRDA-64, W.R. Grace & Company Plastiment, SIKA, Pozzolith N, Master Builders. D. No accelerators, retarders or admixtures containing chlorides will be permitted. E. Use fresh, clean and drinkable water for concrete. F. For normal weight concrete use coarse and fine aggregate to conform to ASTM C33 G. Super Plasticizer ASTM C494 Type F or G where authorized by the Engineer. H. Fly-ash ASTM C618 Type C618. Maximum loss on ignition shall not exceed 3% by weight. The combined weight of fly-ash shall not exceed 20 percent of the total weight of cementitious material. The fly-ash present in blended cement conforming to ASTM C595 shall be included in the calculated percentage. Do not use for architectural concrete. Ground granulated blast-furnish slag ASTM C989. the combined weight of GGBFS shall not exceed 50 percent of the total weight of cementitious material. Slag used in blended hydraulic cement confirming to ASTM C595 shall be included in the calculated percentage. 2.02 PROPORTIONING A. Concrete Strength - See structural drawings for minimum concrete compressive strength at 28 days. B. PROPERTIES 1. Provide concrete having the general properties specified for each class of concrete with the following tables to provide workability and consistency so concrete can be worked readily into forms and around reinforcement without segregation or bleeding, and to provide an average compressive strength adequate to meet acceptance requirements of ACI 301. 2.03 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE A. Concrete must be batched, mixed and transported in accordance with specifications for ready-mixed concrete ASTM C 94. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 3 of 14 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 B. Concrete shall be batched to produce a slump of 4" plus/minus 1". Refer to 2.02B unless noted otherwise. C. Provide at the site, delivery tickets for each batch of concrete showing the following: 1. Batch number, volume and date 2. Time of loading 3. Design 28-day compressive strength 4. Concrete type 5. Cement content in pounds per cubic yard 6. Water content in pounds per cubic yard 7. Admixtures in amount per cubic yard 8. Maximum amount of water that may be added at the job site. D. Restrict the addition of mix water at the job site. Do not add water without the approval of the general contractor and do not exceed slump limitations or total allowable water to cement ratio. Use cold water from the truck tank and remix to achieve consistency. The reports shall indicate how much water was added at the job site. Note on delivery ticket amount of water added and name of person authorizing. E. During hot weather, conform to the detailed recommendations of ACI 305. F. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 degrees F., reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 minutes. When air temperature is higher than 90 degrees, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. G. Concrete should be deposited as nearly as practicable to its final position to avoid segregation of materials due to re-handling or flowing. H. Concreting should be carried on at such a rate that the concrete is at all times plastic and flows readiy into spaces between reinforcement. 1. The use of the following is prohibited: 1. Partially hardened concrete 2. Contaminated concrete 3. Re-tempered concrete 4. Concrete that has been re-mixed after it has taken its initial set. J. After concreting has been started, it should be carried on as a continuous operation until placing of a panel or section, as determined by its boundaries or joints, is completed. K. All concrete should be thoroughly consolidated by suitable means during placement and should be worked around reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into corners of forms. 2.04 PLACING CONCRETE A. GENERAL 1. Inner surfaces of conveying equipment must be free of hardened concrete and foreign materials. 2. All reinforcing bars are to be tied in proper position prior to placing concrete. 3. Provide sufficient time for inspection of all preparatory work before proceeding with the placing of concrete. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 4 of 14 APA 07.08 B. Fire Station #48 4. Immediately prior to placing concrete, sprinkle semi-porous sub-grades sufficiently to eliminate suction and seal porous sub-grades, except where a vapor barrier is used. 5. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers continuously, no deeper than 18 inches. Horizontal cold joints will not be permitted. Fill forms completely using methods to ensure even distribution of aggregate around reinforcement and into corners of forms. 6. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 minutes. When air temperature is higher than 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 7. Concrete shall have a wet cure time of 7 days minimum at 50 degrees minimum temperature. 8. Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable to its final position to avoid segregation of materials due to re-handling or flowing. 9. Concreting shall be carried on at such a rate that the concrete is at all times plastic and flows readily into spaces between reinforcement. 10. The following conditions are prohibited: a. Partially hardened concrete. b. Contaminated concrete. C. Re-tempered concrete. d. Concrete that has been re-mixed after it has taken its initial set. 11. After concreting has been started, it shall be carried on as a continuous operation until placing or a panel or section, as determined by its boundaries or joints, is completed. CONSOLIDATION Consolidate concrete by vibration in accordance with the detailed C. recommendations of ACI 309. 2. Internal vibrators must be used in beams, girders and framed slabs and along bulkheads or slabs-on-grade to thoroughly consolidate the concrete. Do not use grossly oversized equipment. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete within forms. FINISHING 1. Finish concrete slabs in accordance specified in ACI 301, and the detailed all finishes with Architect. 2. Dusting of slabs with cement or other is strictly prohibited. with the finishes and tolerances as recommendations in ACI 302. Confirm materials to absorb excess bleed water TOLERANCE ITEM CLASS Exterior Pavement B Exterior Walks/Curbs B Interior Slabs A Exterior Steps A 3. For flat, very flat and super flat floors, "F" numbers flatness and levelness. Refer to ACI 301.1R, Fig. required "F" numbers for type of slab use. FINISH Broom or belt Fine broom Troweled Nonslip re required for defining 8.15.1.1, for minimum CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 5 of 14 APA 07.08 D 2.05 A. B. C Fire Station #48 NONSLIP FINISH 1. Give surface a dry shake application as specified in ACI 301 using crushed selected abrasive aggregate of aluminum oxide. The rate of application of blended mixture should not be less than 25 pounds per 100 square feet of surface. 2. Acceptable products are: TYPE MANUFACTURER Grip-It L&M Construction Chemicals Frictex N.S. Sonneborn Nonslip Euclid Chemical Co. Emag 20 Lambert Corp. REINFORCEMENT GENERAL 1. Details of concrete reinforcement and accessories not covered herein or shown on drawings to be in accordance with ACI 315. 2. Reinforcement is to be secured in proper position and thoroughly clean of loose rust, scale, grease or other coatings. REINFORCING MATERIALS 1. Unless otherwise indicated, for all reinforcing shown provide deformed bars conforming to ASTM A 615, or a 616 Grade 60. 2. Smooth dowels - ASTM A 615 and A 616, plain bars having a minimum yield strength of 60,000 psi. 3. Welded wire fabric - ASTM A 185 plain wire fabric in flat sheets. 4. Plain wire to conform to ASTM A 82. 5. Accessories to conform to ACI 315. 6. Where reinforcing rods are used as supports, use rods no lighter than No. 5. 7. Where concrete surfaces are exposed, make those portions of all accessories in contact with the concrete surface or within 112 inch thereof, of plastic or stainless steel. 8. Reinforcing steel should be free of kinks and non-shop bends. Field bends should be only as approved by the architect. FIBROUS REINFORCING (Synthetic) 1. Reinforcing fibers to be virgin 100% polypropylene fibers, per ASTM C1116, specifically manufactured for use in concrete, containing no reprocessed olefin materials, with the following minimum physical characteristics: a. specific gravity: 0.91 b. modulus of elasticity: 500-700 KSI C. tensile strength: 70-110 KSI d. fiber length: multi-design gradation, 314" maximum. 2. Reinforcing fibers to be supplied by the following approved manufacturers: a. "FIBERSTRAND 100", Euclid Chemical Company b. "FIBERMESH INFORCE e3 or STEALTH e3, SI Concrete Systems C. "FORTA SUPER-NET", Forta Corporation CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 6 of 14 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 d. "NYCON FIBERS", Nycon, Inc. 3. Fibers to be added in manufacturer's approved amount with a minimum of 1.5 pounds per cubic yard for poly and 1.0 pounds per cubic yard for nylon. 4. Concrete to be batched and mixed in accordance with fiber manufacturer's recommendations for uniform and complete dispersion of fiber bundles into single strands within concrete. 5. Reinforcing fibers may be used in concrete slabs-on-grade in lieu of WWF with approval of the engineer. 6. Submit product data for review and approval. 7. For a "non-hairy" surface use a monofilament fiber. Collated fibrillated fibers wear away in a short period of time. D. FIBROUS REINFORCING (alternate to wwf on composite metal decks) 1. All fibers must meet the criteria in the Steel Deck Institute design manual (Publication No. 30). 2. Cold drawn steel fibers meeting the criteria of ASTM A820, at a minimum addition rate of 25 Ib/yd3 (14.8 kg/rrt3) and possessing an average residual strength of at least 80 psi 550 kpa when tested ASTM C1399, may be used as a suitable alternative to the welded wire fabric specified for temperature and shrinkage reinforcement. 3. Reinforcing fiber to be supplied by the following approved suppliers: a. "NOVOMESH 850, or NOVOCON 1050" by SI Concrete Systems b. "DRAMIX 65/60" by Bekaert 4. Steel fibers do not replace rebar overgirders, which are used to control negative moment. 5. Steel fibers are to be added at the batch plant and in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations foruniform and complete dispersion. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACING A. GENERAL 1. Place reinforcing in conformance with the requirements of CRSI 63. Place reinforcement in proper position prior to placing concrete. Placing reinforcement during concrete placement will not be permitted. 2. Unless otherwise shown or indicated, provide minimum concrete protective covering for reinforcement as follows: a. Concrete deposited against the ground, 3". b. Formed surfaces exposed to weather or in contact with the ground, 2" for reinforcing bars No. 6 or larger, and 1-1/2" for reinforcing bars No. 5 or smaller. C. Interior surfaces, 1-1/2" for beams, girders and columns, 3/4" for slabs, walls and joists. d. See drawing for special conditions. 3. Support reinforcing for slabs-on-grade on staggered concrete bricks or metal or plastic bar chairs and spacers with metal plates. 4. Unless specifically authorized, do not bend reinforcement partially embedded in hardened concrete. 5. Support and fasten all dowels in the formwork prior to placing concrete. Do not place dowels after concrete is in place. 3.02 JOINTS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 7 of 14 AFA 07.08 A. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Fire Station #48 1. Construction joints not shown in the contract documents must be located and made to least impair the strength of the structure. 2. No horizontal construction joints will be permitted in beams, girders or slabs. 3. Location of any construction joint not shown is subject to review and acceptance by Engineer. 4. Reinforcing is continuous through all construction joints. Obtain bond by roughening surface of concrete in an acceptable manner which will expose aggregate uniformly and will not leave any latence, loosened particles or aggregate or damaged concrete at surface. 5. Construction joints shall be cleaned, wetted, and standing water removed. 6. All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by suitable means during placement and should be worked around reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into corners of forms. 7. Concrete wet cure time to be 7 days minimum at 50 degrees minimum temperature. B. EXPANSION JOINTS 1. Reinforcement or other embedded metal items bonded to the concrete (except dowels in floors bonded on only one side of joints) will not be permitted to extend continuously through any expansion joint. C. DOWELED SLIP JOINTS 1. Use completely smooth round bars for dowels. 2. For construction joints, paint half of bar with red lead paint. When dry, coat painted end with satisfactory grease to insure against bond with concrete. 3. For control joints, paint and grease entire bar. 4. For expansion joints, paint, grease and provide a metal expansion cap for one end. 5. Place in forms to insure that bars are perpendicular to joint face. Stop reinforcement at doweled slip joints so that it will not extend through joint. D. JOINT MATERIALS 1. Expansion joint filler non-bituminous type - ASTM D 1752, resin impregnated fiberboard Homosote 300 or Thermosetting Polyurethane, W. R. Meadows' Rescor. Asphalt impregnated materials are unacceptable. 2. Polyethylene Film - ASTM D 2103 minimum 6 mil. 3. Horizontal Joint Sealer - 2-component self-leveling urethane conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-227E, Type 1, Class A. Color to match concrete. Acceptable products are : TYPE MANUFACTURER Daraseal-U A. C. Horn Sonolastic SL2 Sonneborn Pourthane W. R. Meadows 4. Vertical Joint Sealer - 1-component Polyurethane conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-002306, Type II, Class A, color to match concrete. Acceptable products are: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 8 of 14 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 TYPE MANUFACTURER SIKAFLEX IA SIKA SONOLASTIC NPI Sonneborn 5. Epoxy Joint Sealer - semi-rigid epoxy, MM80 as manufactured by Metzger McGuire Co., master fill 300 by Master Builders. 6. Epoxy Bond - 2-component 100 percent solids epoxy resin, amine cured. Acceptable materials are Concresive Series by Master Builders, Sonneborn=s Epogrip and Epiweld 580 by Lambert Corp. 7. Epoxy Grout - Epoxy bond filled with suitable mineral filler, 100 percent passing the No. 100 sieve, in ratio to insure thixotropic action without impairment of adhesive properties. 8. Compressive Joint Material - expanded polystyrene having a compressive strength not less than 8 psi when the board is compressed to a deformation of 5 percent of its original thickness when tested in conformance with ASTM C 165, modified to change drying temperature to 150°F. 9. Felt - 30 pound asphalt or coal tar roofing felt ASTM D 226 or D 227. E. PLACING DOWELS IN EXISTING CONCRETE Use deformed reinforcing bars as dowels. Drill holes in existing concrete of size 1/2" larger in diameter than the dowel using power-driven drill with tungsten-carbide tipped bit ground to insure against oversize hole. Clean out holes with air Thoroughly swab surfaces of hole and embedded portion of dowel with epoxy grout. Force dowel into place. Wipe off excess grout and let set for not less than 12 hours at a temperature above 60°F. 3.03 FORMWORK A. GENERAL 1. Provide and construct formwork in accordance with ACI 301 and 347. 2. Form design by P.E. registered in the State of Florida. 3. Observe and check formwork continuously while concrete is being placed to determine that there are no evidences of changes of elevations, plumbness, or camber and adjust forms as necessary. If, during construction, any such evidence or other defect appears, stop the work, remove concrete placed, if necessary, and repair formwork or supports before proceeding. 4. Earth cuts may be used as forms for footing vertical surfaces increase size 2 inch. 5. Forms and shoring is the responsibility of General Contractor. B. FORMWORK MATERIALS 1. Make forms of lumber, plywood, metal or other materials suitable to provide the strength and tolerances specified herein before and the surface finishes specified hereinafter. 2. Forming exposed surfaces use any of the following materials as suitable for the specified finish, and to produce smooth uniform surfaces, true-to-line, in order that surfaces produced will require little finishing: a. New plastic-bonded natural plywood, American Plywood Association, HD Overlay Plyform Class I, Ext-APA, or equal. 3. For forming exposed surfaces use plywood, or other nonmetallic surfaces free from knots, warps, breaks, or other defects likely to cause irregular surfaces. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 9 of 14 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 4. Provide commercial formulation form coating compounds with maximum VOC of 350 mg/1 that will not bond with stain or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent surface treatments. C. REMOVAL OF FORMS 1. Forms and shoring in the formwork supporting the weight of concrete, in beams, slabs and other structural elements are to remain in place until the concrete has reached its specified 28-day compressive strength. 2. Formwork and facing forms for members such as grade beams, foundation walls and spread footings not supporting the weight of concrete may be removed as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from the removal operations. 3. Arrange shores and other vertical supports so that the non-load carrying form- facing material may be removed without loosening or disturbing the shores and supports. 4. Whenever the formwork is removed during the curing period, continue curing of both the unexposed and exposed concrete by one of the methods specified in section "Curing and Protection". D. REMOVAL STRENGTH Removal Strength - The concrete will be presumed to have reached its specified strength when additional test cylinders (paid for by contractor) are field cured along with the concrete they represent and have reached the strength specified. 3.04 REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS A. GENERAL 1. Patch all tie holes and repair all honeycombed and defective areas immediately after form removal. 2. For surfaces other than those to be backfilled against, use patching mortar. 3. For surfaces to be backfilled against, use mastic damp-proofing compound, except that where reinforcing is exposed, use patching mortar. 4. Remove all honeycombed and defective concrete down to sound concrete prior to patching. Thoroughly clean the holes of dirt and debris. B. PATCHING MORTAR 1. Cut edges of honeycombed and defective concrete to form dove-tail (undercut) joints. No feather edges will be permitted. 2. Apply a chemical bonding agent to voided surface. An acceptable product is L&M Construction chemicals - Everbond or equivalent. 3. Patch the cement mortar as specified in ACI 301, or with proprietary patching compounds, except that proprietary patching mixtures may be not used on exposed surfaces. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 10 of 14 APA 07.08 C. Acceptable proprietary patching mixtures are: a. Euclid Chemical Corporation - Poly Patch b. SIKA - Sikaset Mortar C. Emaco R Series - Master Builders d. Lambert Corp, Lambco Vinyl Patch e. Sonneborn - Sonopatch MASTIC DAMP-PROOFING COMPOUND Fire Station #48 Patch full depth of hole and flush the surface with emulsified asphalt mastic heavy viscosity for trowel application. Prepare and place in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Acceptable products are: a. W. R. Meadows - Sealmastic Trowel Mastic b. Euclid Chemical Company - Damp-proofing Asphalt Coatings C. Sonneborn - Hydrocide 700 Mastic d. Lambert Corp - Waterban 60M 3.05 A. 3.06 A. FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES - GENERAL After removal of forms, give surfaces of concrete the following finishes as specified in ACI 301. SURFACE Unexposed Exposed Exposed to Public View CURING AND PROTECTION GENERAL FINISH Rough Form Smooth Form Smooth Rubbed 1. Conform to the applicable detailed recommendations of ACI 301 and 308. 2. Hot weather curing to be in accordance with applicable ACI Standard 305. 3. All cast-in-place concrete must be maintained with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature for a minimum of 7 days following the placing of the concrete by the use of a water spray, water saturated fabric, moisture retaining membrane or liquid curing compound. 4. Full curing days will be determined by the cumulative number of days or fractions thereof during which the temperature of the air in contact with the concrete is above 50°F. 5. Cure slabs-on-grade for the first 72 hours by the use of: a. fog spraying b. ponding c. sprinkling d. continuously wet absorptive mats or fabric e. continue curing by use of moisture retaining cover until concrete has obtained its specified 28 day compressive strength f. or liquid curing compound after finishing process is completed. g. concrete wet cure time to be 7 days minimum at 50 degrees minimum temperature. 6. Submit materials and method of curing for review. 7. Do not use moisture retaining curing compounds for curing surfaces to receive the following coverings, unless it has been demonstrated that such compounds will not prevent bond of: a. Carpet CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 11 of 14 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 b. Flexible flooring c. Ceramic tiled floors d. Other specified floor systems B. MATERIALS 1. Where moisture retaining membranes or curing compounds are used for curing, provide only materials conforming to the following requirements: a. Polyethylene Film - ASTM C171, Type II b. Waterproof Paper - ASTM C 171, Type I C. Absorptive Cover - AASHTO M 182, Class 3, Burlap cloth made from Jute or Kenaf or ASTM C 440 cotton mats d. ASTM C309 spray on at max. C. TEMPERATURE, WIND AND HUMIDITY 1. Do not permit concrete not fully cured to be exposed to excessive temperature changes or high winds. 3.07 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. GENERAL 1. Prior to concreting, place all embedded items to be provided under this subdivision or to be furnished under other subdivisions for installation under this subdivision. 2. Give all contractors whose work is related to the concrete or must be supported by it, ample notice and opportunity to introduce and/or furnish embedded items before the concrete is placed. 3. Make certain that all embedded items furnished and set in forms by them are secured in position, and exercise due care not to disturb or damage their work while placing concrete. 4. Set anchor bolts for steel and equipment in accordance with setting drawings or templates which have been reviewed and found satisfactory. 5. Where holes in concrete for such purposes as recesses for railing posts, passageways for pipes, and the like are shown formed by sleeves, the contractor may, at his option, provide such holes by drilling with a acceptable diamond or tungsten carbide tipped drill bits. Fill with epoxy seal after railings are in place. B. EMBEDDED ITEMS TO BE PROVIDED UNDER THIS SUBDIVISION 1. Dovetail anchor slots and dovetail brick anchors - DAS-G20 beehive dovetail anchor slot as manufactured by Gateway Building Products, together with DBA-G14 dovetail brick anchors. provide masonry trades with one anchor for each 16" of anchor slot or fraction thereof plus one additional anchor for each vertical section. Place anchor slots 1'4" on center in beams and wails where masonry abuts and one slot in each face of each column faced with masonry. Furnish anchors to space 16" on center in slots. 2. Plastic reglets for above and below grade counter flashing. Make of Type A rigid polyvinyl chloride, 0.060" thick, as manufactured by Superior Concrete Accessories, Inc. or equal. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 12 of 14 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 3. Sleeves - galvanized steel pipe ASTM A 120, or plastic pipe ASTM D 2661, ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 2852, bituminized fiber pipe conforming to ASTM D 1861 or Wilson anchor bolt sleeve. 4. Anchor Bolts - ASTM A 307. Furnish with one leveling nut plus one nut and one washer. 5. Cast Iron Frames and Grates - as manufactured by Neenah Foundry Company. Castings as manufactured by Flockhart Foundry Company or McKinley Iron Works may be acceptable, provided the dimensions and design are comparable in all respects. 6. Water stops locations as shown on drawings. 3.08 VAPOR BARRIER 1. Provide sub-grade under concrete slabs-on-grade with vapor barrier consisting of polyethylene film not thinner than 6 mils, conforming to ASTM C171, or asphalt laminated reinforced Kraft paper with polyethylene coating on both sides. Moistop as manufactured by FortiFiber Building Systems Group. 2. Provide film in width and length not less than one foot larger than dimensions of slab sub-grade unless patently impracticable. Where joints are necessary, lap edges not less than 6" and tape continuously, Take care to avoid puncturing film. Immediately prior to placing concrete, tape-seal all tears, cuts and holes. 3.09 GROUTING OF BASE PLATES 1. Nonferrous grout acceptable products are: TYPE Crystex Five Star Sonogrout Euco N.S. Construction Grout Vibroprvf #11 MANUFACTURER L&M Construction Chemicals U.S. Grout Sonneborn Euclid Chemical Company Master Builders Lambert Corp. 2. Mix and place in conformance with printed instructions of the manufacturer 3.10 TESTING A. GENERAL 1. The services of an independent testing laboratory shall be retained for obtaining test specimens and performing quality control work, routine testing of materials or proposed mix designs and of resulting concrete for compliance with technical requirements of specifications. 2. Testing of field-cured test cylinders, or testing required because of changes requested by contractor in materials or proportions of the mix, as well as any extra testing of concrete or materials occasioned by failure to meet specification requirements, to be at contractor's expense. 3. Failure of the testing laboratory to detect any defective work or materials is not in any way to prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered, nor is it to obligate the owner for final acceptance. 4. The testing agency and/or its representatives are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge or release any requirement of the specifications, not to approve or accept any portion of the work, not to act as foreman or perform other duties for contractor. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 13 of 14 APA 07.08 B 3.11 A. SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE TESTING AGENCY Fire Station #48 1. Field Sampling - Secure from different batches, on a truly random basis, composite samples for all field testing required below in accordance with ASTM C 172 where applicable. Take all samples at discharge end of conveying system. Clearly mark each test specimen master as to exact part of the structure represented, class of concrete curing conditions, temperature of concrete, and time and date of sample. 2. Compressive Strength Test - mold and cure test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C 31 and test each cylinder for strength in accordance with ASTM C 39. Take one "test set" consisting of four cylinders for each day's pour of 50 cubic yards, or fraction thereof. Test cylinders one at 7 and two 28 days, one hold. 3. Slump Tests - determine slump range for each "test set" in conformance with ASTM C 143. 4. Air Content Test - determine air content for each "test set" for air-entrained concrete in accordance with ASTM C 231. 5. Submit two copies of the results in each of the above tests and inspection to the contractor and the owner's representative and Engineer. 6. Should any of the test results fail to meet the requirements specified, make an immediate telephone report to the contractor and the owner's representative. 7. Furnish evaluation reports of compression tests as recommended by ACI 214 when any compression test fails to meet the specified strength. 8. Criteria for acceptance of concrete cylinder tests: a) Every arithmetic average of any consecutive three tests equals or exceed fc, and b) No individual strength test (average of two cylinders) <fc by more than 500 psi. ACCEPTANCE OF STRUCTURE GENERAL Acceptance of structure will be made in-conformance with ACI 301, except that contractor must pay all costs incurred for providing any additional testing or analysis required when strength of structure is considered potentially deficient. B. CRACKS 1. The contractor will be required to restore without cost to the owner any concrete which develops cracks within a period of one year after placement which has not been caused by action of the owner or others in over stressing the concrete. 2. Repair the cracks by means that will restore the cracked members to their designed strength and appearance by acceptable methods which will not impair the appearance of the affected surfaces, if exposed. Such repairs must be performed by use of suitable epoxy cements employed by an organization having satisfactorily demonstrated ability in the techniques necessary to effect such repairs, or by other acceptable methods. END OF SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -Page 14 of 14 APA 07.08 PART 1 1.01 A. SECTION 03320 PRECAST CONCRETE U-LINTELS AND SILLS GENERAL SUMMARY Section includes: precast concrete U-lintels and sills B. Related Sections: 1. Concrete Masonry Units 2. Concrete Reinforcement 3. Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.02 A, B. C. D. 1.03 A. B. 1.04 REFERENCES Fire Station 448 American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) 1. C33 -- Specification for Concrete Aggregates 2. C150 -- Specification for Portland Cement Precast/Pre-Stressed Concrete Institute (PCI) Standards: Manual for Quality Control for Precast and Pre-Stressed Concrete MNL-116. American Concrete Institute: Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI 318) American Concrete Institute: Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures (ACI 530) SUBMITTALS Provide manufacturer's catalog engineering data. Manufacturer shall rate U-lintel units for gravity, uplift, and lateral loads in units of pounds per linear foot. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator's Qualifications: Units shall be fabricated by a firm engaged in the manufacturing of precast and pre-stressed concrete U-lintels and sills for a minimum of 5 years. Fabricator shall have a quality assurance program that complies with the procedures of Manual 116 by the Precast/Pre-Stressed Concrete Institute (PCI). B. Plant records of production and quality control shall be kept in accordance with PCI recommendations and made available upon request for the Architect. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. If storage is required prior to erection, take all necessary precautions to provide protection to prevent damage prior to installation. Maintain units free of dirt and airborne pollutants until immediately prior to erection. B. Replace all units that are damaged due to mishandling at the job site. PRECAST CONCRETE U-LINTELS AND SILLS 03320-Page 1 of 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete Materials 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150 Type I or III, gray color 2. Aggregates: ASTM C33 3. Water: Potable 4. Admixtures: Shall not contain calcium chloride or chloride ions 2.02 FABRICATION A. Unless specified otherwise, conform to PCI MNL-116. B. All U-lintel units 14 feet in overall length and shorter shall be made of concrete with a minimum strength of 3500 psi at 28 days. C. All U-lintel units exceeding 14 feet in overall length shall be made of concrete with a minimum strength of 6000 psi at 28 days and shall be pre-stressed concrete. D. All sill units shall be made of concrete with a minimum strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. E. All units shall be sand block finish except pre-stressed, 6" wide, and 12" wide U-lintels shall be smooth form finished. F. Tolerances shall be per PCI MNL-116. G. Minor patching in plant is acceptable provided structural adequacy of units is not impaired. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FURNISHING A. Furnish to the concrete masonry unit installer, all units that will be installed as part of the work of that section. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Protect all stored and installed units from job site debris and impact. B. Units damaged during storage shall be replaced if beyond repair to restore its structural adequacy. END OF SECTION 03320 PRECAST CONCRETE U-LINTELS AND SILLS 03320-Page 2 of 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply this Section. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide labor, material, equipment and perform operations necessary for, and incidental to, erection of masonry work. B. Related sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: Division 3 section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" C. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include the following: 1. Steel lintels in unit masonry are specified in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrication". 2. Wood nailers and blocking built into unit masonry are specified in Division 6 "Section "Rough Carpentry". 3. Reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing are specified in Division 7 Section Flashing and Sheet Metal". 4. Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings are specified in Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and f=rames". 5. Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings are specified in Division 8 Section "Custom Hollow Metal Work". 6. Sealants 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths (fm): 1. f'm = 1500 psi on net area. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review, manufacturers literature and/or drawings of material that is pre- fabricated or pre-assembled. 1. Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product indicated. 2. Shop drawings for reinforcing detailing fabrication, bending, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcing" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of masonry reinforcement. 3. Submitted shop drawings must be checked and signed by the General Contractor. UNIT MASONRY 04200-Page 1 of 12 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 4. Material certificates signed by manufacturer and Contractor certifying that each type of masonry unit complies with requirements specified in referenced unit masonry standard, including fire performance characteristics. 5. Hot weather construction procedures evidencing compliance with requirements specified in referenced unit masonry standard. 6. Results from tests and inspections performed by Owner's representatives will be reported promptly and in writing to Architect and Contractor. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unit masonry standard: ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 "Specifications for Masonry Structures". B. Fire performance characteristics: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistances has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting organization, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Single source responsibility for masonry units: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from the manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate. D. The contractor shall retain a qualified testing laboratory to perform the following tests: 1. Sample and test grout in accordance with ASTM C1019 for each 5000 square foot of masonry. 2. Slump tests - ASTM C143. E. When requested by the Architect/Engineer, a qualified testing laboratory shall be retained to perform masonry prism test in accordance with ASTM E447, Method B, modified as follows: 1. Prisms shall be stack bond, one unit long and thick with a full mortar bed. 2. Limit height/thickness ratio from 1.33 - 5.00 3. Provide a minimum of one joint. One set of three (3) prisms prior to construction and during construction for each 5000 square feet of wall. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver masonry material to project in undamaged condition. B. Store and handle masonry units off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, and other causes. If units become wet, do not place until units are in an air-dried condition. C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in dry location. D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. E. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. UNIT MASONRY 04200-Page 2 of 12 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. B. Extend cover to minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. C. Where one wythe of multi-wythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. D. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. E. Stain prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately any grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. F. Protect base of walls from rain splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of covering spread on ground and over wall surface. G. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. H. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finish from mortar droppings. 1. Hot weather construction: Comply with referenced unit masonry standard. PART2 GENERAL 2.01 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements specified in this Section applicable to each material indicated. 2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. General: Comply with requirements indicated below applicable to each form of concrete masonry required. B. Masonry Units for Fire-Rated Walls Provide fire-rated units which are rated product of manufacturer listed in latest revision of building materials list, published by UL. In lieu of above rating, furnish fire resistive units on basis of examination, tests and report by nationally recognized testing agency acceptable to governing authorities and codes having jurisdiction. Report must state that units proposed to be furnished are equivalent in fire rating to those products furnished by producers in above UL building materials list. C. Size: Provide concrete masonry units complying with requirements indicated below for size that are manufactured to specified face dimensions within tolerances specified in the applicable referenced ASTM specification for concrete masonry units. UNIT MASONRY 04200-Page 3 of 12 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 D. Concrete masonry units: Manufactured to specified dimensions of 3/8 inch less than nominal widths by nominal heights by nominal lengths indicated on drawings. E. Provide Type II, non-moisture controlled units. F. Exposed faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. G. Hollow load-bearing concrete masonry units: ASTM C 90, Grade N and as follows: 1. Unit compressive strength: Provide units with minimum average net area compressive strength indicated below. Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce concrete unit masonry construction of compressive strength indicated. 2. Use inspection and cleanout holes at bottom of wall reinforced vertical cells for grouting lifts over 5 feet high. Cleanout holes should be 3" minimum, see ACI 530.1-02, Section 3.2F. See grout space requirements for various grout pour heights in ACI 530.1-02, Section 3.5C with Table 7. See Florida Building Code page 35.1 H. Weight classification: Normal weight 2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Mortar - Type M or S B. Grout - 2500 psi at 28 days C. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Provide natural color. D. Ready-mixed mortar: Cementitious materials, water, and aggregate complying with requirements specified in this article, combined with set controlling admixtures to produce a ready-mixed mortar complying with ASTM C 270. E. Hydrated lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. F. Aggregate for mortar: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than 1/4 inch use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. G. Aggregate for grout: ASTM C 404. H. Water: Clean and potable. 2.04 REINFORCING STEEL A. General: Provide reinforcing steel complying with requirements of referenced unit masonry standard and this article, formed from the following: 1. Galvanized carbon steel wire, coating class as required by referenced unit masonry standard for application indicated. B. Description: Welded wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner an tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below: 1. Wire diameter for side rods: 0.1483 inch (9 gage). UNIT MASONRY 04200-Page 4 of 12 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 C. For single wythe masonry provide type as follows with single pair of side rods: Ladder design with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches O.C. D. For multi-wythe masonry provide type as follows: 1. Ladder design with perpendicular cross spaced not more than 16 inches O.C. 2. Number of side rods for multi wythe concrete masonry: One side rod for each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches or less in nominal width. E. Tab design with single pair of side rods and rectangular box-type cross ties spaced not more than 16 inches O.C., with side rods spaced for embedment within each face shell of backup wythe and ties extended to engage the outer wythe by at least 1-1/2" inches. F. Use units with adjustable two piece rectangular ties where horizontal joints of facing wythe do not align with those of backup by more than and where indicated. G. Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering joint reinforcement that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: AA Wire Products/Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. Dur-O-WaI, Inc. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America 2.05 TIES AND ANCHORS A. General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with requirements for metal and size of reference unit masonry standard and this article. B. Galvanized carbon steel wire: ASTM A 82, coating class as required by referenced unit masonry standard for application indicated. C. Wire diameter: 0.1875 inch. D. Galvanized heavy thickness steel sheet: ASTM A 635 (commercial quality) hot-rolled carbon steel sheet hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 525, Class B3, for rigid anchors fabricated from steel sheet or strip with a thickness of 0.180 inch and greater. E. Steel plates and bars: ASTM A 36, hot dipped galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153, Class B3, as applicable to size and form indicated. F. Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Dur-O-WaI, Inc. 2. Heckman Building Products, Inc. 3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. UNIT MASONRY 04200-Page 5 of 12 APA 07.08 2.06 BENT WIRE TIES Fire Station #48 A. Individual units prefabricated from bent wire to comply with requirements indicated below: 1. Tie shape for hollow masonry units laid with cells vertical: Rectangular with closed ends and not less than 4 inches wide. B. Type for masonry where coursing between wythes align: Unit ties bent from one piece of wire. C. Type for masonry where coursing between wythes does not align: Adjustable ties composed of two parts, one with pintles, the other with eyes, maximum misalignment 1-1/4 inches. 2.07 ADJUSTABLE ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL WORK A. General: Two piece assemblies as described below allowing vertical or horizontal differential movement between wall and framework parallel to plane of wall, but resisting tension and compression forces perpendicular to it. B. For anchorage to concrete framework, provide manufacturer's standard with dovetail anchor section formed from sheet metal and triangular shaped wire ties section seized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face and as follows: Wire diameter: 0.1875 inch 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A. Unit type masonry inserts in concrete: Cast iron or malleable iron inserts of type and sized indicated. B. Dovetail slots: Furnished dovetail slots, with filler strips, or slot size indicated, fabricated from 0.0336 inch (22 gage) sheet metal. 2.09 POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS A. Anchors as described below, with capacity to sustain, without failure, load imposed within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory. 1. Type: Chemical anchors 2. Type: Expansion anchors B. Corrosion protection: Carbon steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild). C. For cast-in-place and post-installed anchors in concrete: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times loads imposed by masonry. D. For post-installed anchors in grouted concrete masonry units: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times loads imposed by masonry. UNIT MASONRY 04200-Page 6 of 12 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Non-metallic expansion joint strips: Pre-molded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Type 2 (closed cell), Class A (cellular rubber and rubber-like materials with specific resistance to petroleum base oils), Grade 1 (compression deflection range of 2-5 psi), compressible up to 35 percent, of width and thickness indicated, formulated from the following material: 1. Neoprene 2. Urethane 3. Polyvinyl chloride B. Pre-formed control joint gaskets: Materials as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. 1. Styrene-Butadiene rubber compound: ASTM D 2000, Designation 2AA-805 2. Polyvinyl Chloride: ASTM D 2287, General Purpose Grade, Type PVC-65406 C. Bond breaker strips: Asphalt saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). 2.11 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Job mixed detergent solution: Solution of trisodium phosphate (1/2 cup dry measure) dissolved in one gallon of water. B. Job mixed muriatic solution: Solution of 1 part muriatic acid and 10 parts clean water, mixed in a non-metallic container with acid added to water. C. Proprietary acidic cleaner: Manufacturer's standard strength, general purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry surfaces of type indicated below without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. D. For masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a concentrated blend of surface acting acids, cheating, and wetting agents. E. For masonry subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a liquid blend of organic and inorganic acids and special inhibitors. F. Available products: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that may be used to clean until masonry surfaces includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. "Sure Klean No. 600 Detergent", ProSoCo, Inc. 2. "Sure Klean No. 101 Lime Solvent", ProSoCo, Inc. 3. "Sure Klean Vana Trol", ProSoCo, Inc. 2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES UNIT MASONRY 04200-Page 7 of 12 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 A. General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air-entraining agents, antifreeze compounds, or admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. B. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. C. Procedures of ASTM C780 is to be used to test and evaluate mortar and establish pre-construction datum and quality control testing for types of mortar indicated below: Type M or S D. Grout for unit masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 and referenced unit masonry standard. 2.13 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Concrete masonry unit tests: For each type, class, and grade of concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be tested by qualified independent testing laboratory for strength, absorption, and moisture content per ASTM C 140, if required by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other specific conditions, and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. B. Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Mix mortar and grout in power driven, drum type mixers. Operate mixer a minimum of 5 minutes after addition of all materials. B. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness indicated. C. Build chases and recesses as shown or required to accommodate items specified in this and other sections of the specifications. Provide not less than 8 inches of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases and recesses. Coordinate masonry with all adjacent work of other trades. D. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installation of equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening. E. Cut masonry units with motor driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining constructions. Use full size units without cutting where possible. UNIT MASONRY 04200-Page 8 of 12 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 F. Matching existing masonry: Where applicable, match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of new masonry with existing masonry. G. Do not use masonry units with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations or other defects. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Comply with construction tolerances of ACI 530 or N.C.M.A. 3.04 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations. B. Lay up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other construction. C. Bond pattern for exposed masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4 inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. One half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. D. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bounded by lapping not less than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4 inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. E. Stopping and resuming work: In each course, rack back 1/2 unit length for one-half running bond or 1/3 unit length for one -third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly (if required), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. F. Re-temper mortar as necessary to keep plastic. Use no mortar after setting has begun or after 2 1/2 hours of initial mixing. G. Built-in work: As construction progresses, built-in items specified under this and other sections of the specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. H. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. J. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3 courses (24 inches) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. K. Reinforced vertical concrete blocks cells, grouting solid where indicated on plan. 3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING UNIT MASONRY 04200-Page 9 of 12 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells. 3.06 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch of exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches. B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bed reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. D. Provide horizontal joint reinforcement at doors and windows for first and second block course above and below apertures. Run reinforcing continuous or extend two feet from aperture edge. 3.07 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 26 inches o-c. horizontally. 3.08 MOVEMENT (CONTROL AND EXPANSION) JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build in related items as masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Fit bond breaker strips on in ends of block units on one side of control joint. Fill the joint with mortar and rake joints in exposed faces. 3.09 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than V-0" for brick size units and 2'-0" for block size units are shown without structural steel or other UNIT MASONRY 04200-Page 10 of 12 APA 07.08 C. 3.10 A. B. C. D. E. 3.11 Fire Station #48 supporting lintels. Provide reinforced precast concrete lintels. Cure precast lintels before handling and installation. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY General: Install reinforced unit masonry to comply with requirements or referenced unit masonry standard. Temporary formwork: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. Contractor is completely responsible for the proper design and construction of all temporary forms and bracing. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units and in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up all joints including corners, openings, and adjacent construction to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for application of sealants. C. Final cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet all surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean concrete masonry by means of cleaning method indicated in N.C.M.A. TEK 45 applicable to type of stain present on exposed surfaces. UNIT MASONRY 04200-Page 11 of 12 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY 04200-Page 12 of 12 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All requirements of the general provisions of the contract including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 0 and Division 1 forms a part of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE OF WORK This Section includes fabrication, delivery, unload and store in locations directed and erect all structural steel work, as shown on drawings and specified, including schedules, notes, and details showing size and location of members, typical connections, and types of steel required. B. Related work not specified under this subdivision: 1. Steel joist 2. Setting of anchor bolts, cast in concrete, or masonry. 3. Metal fabrications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review, complete shop drawings covering fabrication and erection of all work under this subdivision, including schedules, notes, and details showing size and location of members, typical connections, and types of steel required. B. Submitted shop drawings must be checked and signed by the General Contractor. C. Test reports conducted on shop and field bolted and welded connections. Include data on type(s) of test conducted and test results. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and standards: Comply with applicable provisions of the latest issue of the following, except as otherwise indicated: 1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" - except paragraph 4.2.1. AISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings", including "Commentary". 2. "Specifications and Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections. 3. Structural Welding Code (AWS D1.1) 4. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) B. Qualifications for welding work: Qualify welding procedures and welding operations in accordance with AWS "Qualification" requirements. C. Welders to have current certificates, If re-certification of welders is required, re-testing will be Contractor's responsibility. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - Page 1 of 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station 948 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress or work. Store on site only in authorized locations. B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in- place concrete or masonry, in ample time to not to delay work. C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground. Protect steel members and packaged materials from exposure to the weather. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Misc. structural shapes, plates, etc...: ASTM A 36 B. Structural beams, columns, etc...: ASTM A36 or ASTM A992 GR.50 - Refer to structural drawings. C. Hot-formed steel tubing: ASTM A 501 D. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B; or ASTM A501 E. Anchor bolts: ASTM A 307, non-headed type, with nuts and washers. F. Unfinished threaded fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular low-carbon steel bolts, nuts, and washers. Provide hexagonal heads. G. High strength threaded fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers, complying with ASTM A325. H. Electrodes for welding: Comply with AWS Code. Use E70XX electrodes. 1. Grout: non-shrink, non-metallic, flowable or plastic with minimum of 7,000 psi at 28 days in accordance with CRD-C 621, Army Corps of Engineers. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Properly mark-match materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. B. Work shall be executed by skilled workmen under experienced supervision. C. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections. D. Bolt field connections with high-strength bolts, except where welded connections are indicated. E. Field verify all existing dimensions and elevations prior to fabrication. F. High strength bolted construction: Install high strength threaded fasteners in STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - Page 2 of 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 accordance with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 Bolts". Use bearing type bolts with threads included in shear plane. G. Welded construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. H. Holes for other work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on final shop drawings. 2.03 SHOP PAINTING A. General: Shop paint all structural steel, except anchor bolts and surfaces to be field welded. B. Paint all members after fabrication, except where surfaces would be inaccessible for surface prep and painting. C. Apply paint in sufficient volume or coats to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 3 but not more than 5 mils. D. Surface preparation: Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC - SP3 Power Tool Cleaning). E. Proprietary Paints 1. Gray metal alkyd-oil primer of any of the following: Manufacturer Designation Porter No. 298 Mobile No. 13F812 Tinemec No. 1009 Ameron No. 5102 Amercoat 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspections at tests in mill, shop, and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. B. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components that do not comply. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Must conform to the applicable provisions of AISC specifications. B. Temporary planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete work. C. Setting bases and bearing plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - Page 3 of 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 surface of base and bearing plates. D. All anchor bolts shall be built into connections work in advance. E. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on leveling nuts. Do not use wedges of shims. F. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. G. Field assembly: Set structural frame accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. H. All bolts, including anchor bolts, shall have enough projection to expose not less than 1-112 threads after nuts is tightened. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances. 1. If steel is damaged or does not fit-up, Contractor shall submit proposed corrective measures for review by Engineer. J. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins. Drill or ream holes that must be enlarged to accommodate next larger fastener, where possible. K. The use of a gas cutting torch in field for correcting fabrication errors in primary structural members will not be permitted. L. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas where shop coat was damaged. Spot and prime areas using same material as used for shop coat. M. Set all members so that, in their final location, level, plumbness and alignment are within the tolerances prescribed by AISC Code. 3.02 QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing and inspection agency shall be retained to inspect structural steel members high strength bolted connections and welded connections. B. Testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests, state in each report whether test specimens comply with requirements, and specifically state any deviations therefrom. Submit 3 copies of each report to Owner's representative. C. Provide access for testing agency to places where structural steel work is begin fabricated or produced so that required inspection and testing can be accomplished. D. Minimum required testing: 1. Visually inspect all structural steel beams, columns, etc. 2. Visually inspect all bolted and welded connections. 3. Test all beam or column splices. 4. Test a representative sample of all full or partial penetration welds. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - Page 4 of 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 E. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work that inspections have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at Contractor's expenses, as necessary to reconfirm any non-compliance of original work and to show compliance of corrected work. 3.03 FINAL CLEANUP A. All temporary guys, braces, falswork, cribbing, rubbish and other debris are to be removed upon completion of erection. END OF SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - Page 5 of 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE OF WORK 1. This section includes fabrication, delivery, unload and store in locations directed and erect all roof deck units as shown on drawings and specified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification section. B. Product data including manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of decking and accessories. C. Shop drawings showing layout and type of deck units, anchorage details, and conditions requiring closure strips, supplementary framing, sump pans, cant strips, cut openings, special jointing, and other accessories. 0. Submitted shop drawings must be checked and signed by the General Contractor. E. Welder certificate: See Section 05120 for certification submittal requirement. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and standards: Comply with provisions of the following Codes and Standards, except as otherwise indicated: 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), "Specification for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members". 2. American Welding Society (AWS), D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel". 3. Steel Deck Institute (SDI), "Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof Decks". B. Qualification of field welding: Use qualified welding processes and welding operators in accordance with "Welder Qualifications" procedures of AWS. Welded decking in place is subject to inspection and testing. C. FM listing: Provide steel roof deck units that have been evaluated by Factory Mutual System and are listed in "Factory Mutual Approval Guide" for "Class I" fire-rated construction. D. See Structural Steel 05120, 3.02 for testing requirements. STEEL DECK 05310 - Page 1 of 4 APA 07.08 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS Fire Station 448 A. Roof deck to be 1-1/2 inch deep, 22 gauge, wide rib (Type B) with galvanized finish. Minimum properties are as follows. Computation of properties shall reflect the "Effective Compress Flange Width" concept. 22 Gauge 1 = 0.169 in." (4) Sp = 0.189 in." (3) S„ = 0.192 in.' (3) Maximum live load deflection = 1/240 of span. Maximum working stress = 20 ksi B. Floor deck to be 2 inches deep, 20 gauge, galvanized permanent composite form deck. Minimum properties are as follows: 20 Gauge 1 = 0.418 in.' (4) S, = 0.355 in. (3) (3) S„ = 0.360 in. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Marlyn Steel Products, Inc. 2. H. H. Robertson Company 3. Vulcraft Div., Nucor Corporation 2.03 MATERIALS A. Steel for galvanized metal deck units: A653 Grade 33 with coating designation G60. B. Miscellaneous steel shapes: ASTM A 36. C. Sheet metal accessories: ASTM A 924, galvanized, G60. D. Galvanizing repair: Where galvanized surfaces are damaged, prepare surfaces and repair in accordance with procedures specified in ASTM A 780. E. Flexible closure strips: Manufacturer's standard mineral fiber closures. 2.04 FABRICATION A. General: Form deck units in lengths to span three or more supports, with flush, telescoped, or nested 2 inch laps at ends and interlocking or nested side laps, of metal thickness, depth, and width as indicated. STEEL DECK 05310 - Page 2 of 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 B. Roof deck units: Provide deck configurations that comply with SDI "Specification and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck". C. Roof sump pans: Fabricate from single piece of 0.071 inch min. (14 gauge) galvanized sheet steel with level bottoms and sloping sides to direct water flow to draining. Provide sump pans of adequate size to receive roof drains and with bearing flanges not less than 3 inches wide. Recess pans not less than 1-1/2 inches below roof deck surfaces unless otherwise shown or required by deck configuration. Holes for drains will be cut in the field by others. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Delivery and storage: Deliver deck to job site in bundles and store off ground with one end elevated for water drainage. Cover with waterproof covering, ventilated to avoid condensation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, shop drawings, and as specified herein. B. Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with end accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks. C. Align deck units for entire length of run of cells and with close alignment between cells at ends of abutting units. D. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or deflection. E. Suspended ceiling, light fixtures, ductwork, piling or other utilities shall not be suspended from decking. F. Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating decking bundles to prevent overloading of structural members. G. Fasten roof deck to supporting steel by welding. See drawings for weld pattern. H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc weld, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welded work. Minimum puddle welded size = 5/8 inch diameter. I. Use care in selecting electrodes and amperage to provide positive weld and to prevent blow-out holes. J. Use welding washers for all decking 24 gage or thinner. K. Mechanically fasten side laps of adjacent deck units between supports with No. 10 self-tapping machine screws. L. Uplift loading: Install and anchor roof deck units to resist gross uplift loading. See plan for uplift loading requirements. STEEL DECK 05310 - Page 3 of 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 M. Cutting and fitting: Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking, as shown. N. Reinforcement at openings: Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as required for strength, continuity of decking, and support of other work shown. 0. Roof sump pans: Place over openings provided in roof decking and weld to top decking surface. Space weld not more than 12 inches o.c. with at least one weld at each corner. Detail on architectural drawings. P. Closure strips: Provide metal closure strips at open uncovered ends and edges of roof decking and in voids between decking and other construction. Weld into position to provide a complete decking installation. Q. Touch-up painting: After decking installation, wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust spots on top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members. R. Touch-up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK 05310 - Page 4 of 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Plastic-laminate cabinets. 2. Plastic-laminate countertops. B. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. C. Samples: 1. Plastic-laminates, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of woodwork. B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards." 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and I VAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Wood Products: I. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Particleboard: None to be used. 3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay. B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural woodwork. B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of opening, self-closing. C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches (100 mm) long, 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter. D. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. 1. Heavy Duty (Grade IRD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides. E. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 1 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Interior Woodwork Grade: Custom. 2. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. B. Plastic-Laminate Cabinets: 1. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. 2. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate manufactured by Nevamar® as follows: a. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. b. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS. C. Edges: Grade VGS. 3. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS. 4. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber. 5. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. 6. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range of solid colors and patterns, matte finish. C. Plastic-Laminate Countertops: 1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade manufactured by Nevamar®: HGS. 2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range of solid colors and patterns, matte finish. 3. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. 4. Core Material at Sinks: Exterior-grade plywood. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. Examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. B. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mrn in 2400 mm). Shim as required with concealed shims. D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 2 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with toggle bolts through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish. G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." END OF SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 3 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concealed building insulation. 2. Vapor retarders. Sound attenuation insulation around office 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Plenum Rating: Provide glass-fiber insulation where indicated in ceiling plenums whose test performance is rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products per "Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or on comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking, flaking, peeling, or delamination of interior surface of duct assembly, after testing for 4 hours at 2500-fpm (13-m/s) air velocity. 2. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of mold growth, delamination, or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidity, after inoculation with Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 days at 100 percent relative humidity in the dark. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A. Foil-Faced, Poly isocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class I or 2, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, based on tests performed on unfaced core on thicknesses up to 4 inches. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. Dow Chemical Company. C. Rmax, Inc. 2.3 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Available Manufacturers: CertainTeed Corporation. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. Johns Manville. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1 of 3 APA 07.08 4. Knauf Fiber Glass. 5. Owens Corning. Fire Station #48 B. Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim- polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face. C. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated: 1. 3 1/2" thick with R-11 rating. 2. 3" thick sound-attenuation glass-fiber blankets. 2.4 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by insulation manufacturers for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor-retarder facings. B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. C. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 D. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements. 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures. 4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves. 5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs. E. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by attaching furring at 16" o.c., as noted on drawings. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN WALLS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION A. Install 3-inch thick, unfaced glass-fiber blanket insulation in walls as indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 07510 - BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING (ASPHALT) PART 1 - 1.1 GENERAL A. Apply asphalt built-up roof to surfaces indicated on the drawings. 1. The word "bitumen" where used, shall mean asphalt. B. Guarantee: The bid amount shall include the cost of the Manufacturer's inspection and No Dollar Limit Twenty (20) year warranty on roofing and flashing. C. Qualification: Built-up bituminous roofing shall be applied by an applicator approved and/or franchised by the manufacturer of the materials proposed for use on the project. 1. The following manufacturers of built-up roofing materials are approved, provided they meet the requirements of this Section. MANUFACTURERS Certain-Teed Products Co. Or Equal 1.2 MATERIALS A. Built-Up bituminous Roofing - All materials and methods of application for roofing and flashing shall strictly comply with the requirements specified for a bituminous built-up roof surfaced with Modified Bitumen sheets. 1. Asphalt for embedment of insulation (if any), and for interply mopping shall be ASTM D 312, Type III or Type IV. 2. Asphalt for the application for the Modified Bitumen embedment shall be ASTM D 312, Type IV. B. Felts -- 1. Glass fiber ply sheets shall conform to ASTM D 2178-81a, Type IV. 2. Base sheets shall be Ultrapoly SMS. C. Nails, Fasteners, and Anchors - I . Roofing nails, for nailing into wood, shall be non-ferrous or zinc-coated steel, with shank not greater than 10 gauge nor less than 12 gauge, with ads not less than 3/8 inch diameter. 2. Fasteners for base sheets installed over wood substrate shall be roofing nails with integral caps (Example: Simplex). 3. Fasteners for base sheets installed over gypsum concrete or light weight concrete roof decks shall be Zonotite fasteners or equal, having I-90 metal discs. 4. Metal discs for use with roofing nails shall be flat and at least one inch in diameter. 5. Metal discs for use with other fasteners shall comply with the manufacturer's requirements. D. Bituminous cement shall conform to ASTM D 2822-75, Type H. E. Surfacing Materials - 1. Modified Bitumen as provided by the Manufacturer, Mop Grade, Granular Surfaced Sheets, Premium FR-P. F. Base Ply: Where insulation is to be part of the roof system, mechanically attach the Manufacturer's specified base sheet to nailable decks and/or mop solidly to non-nailable decks. G. Asphalt Primer: Asphalt primer meeting ASTM D41-73 or Fed. Spec. SS-A-701. H. Emulsion: Emulsion or any fibrated emulsion conforming to MIL. SPEC. MIL-R-3472 or ASTM D1127, Type I. 1. Aluminum Coating: Conforming to Fed. Spec. TT-P-320C, Type 11, Class C, or ASTM D2824, Type 11. BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING (ASPHALT) 07510 - 1 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 J. Roof Insulation: Poly isocyanurate board insulation with felt or glass-fiber mat facing on both major surfaces, thickness as indicated on drawing. 1.3 EXECUTION OF THE WORK A. This specification establishes the minimum requirements for the construction and application of bituminous built-up roofing with aggregate surface. 1. Modified Bitumen surfaced, 20 Year NDL warranted asphalt built-up roof. a. The built-up roofing shall consist of not less than the quantities shown in the following table, for each 100 square feet of roofing, and expressed in the term "pounds per 100 square feet." 1 ply Ultra Poly SMS 45 2 plies glass ply VI sheet 1.9 3 moppings of asphalt 100 Modified Bitumen GMS FR-P 100 Total 264 pounds B. Application of Roofing - 1. Bitumen shall not be heated above the Manufacturer's EVT maximum. a. Bitumen temperature shall not be lower than Manufacturer's EVT minimum at the point of application. b. Layers of roofing shall be laid free of wrinkles, buckles, at right angles to the deck, and be broomed immediately behind the mop. 1) Layers of roofing shall be laid in at least 25 lbs. of asphalt per square for solid mopping applications. 2) Bitumen shall uniformly cover all roof area to provide effective bond. 3) Carefully broom-in the surface of the ply sheets as applied with a soft fiber type floor broom to obtain complete adhesion between plies and to eliminate air pockets. 4) Each ply sheet shall be carried up abutting vertical surfaces at least 4 inches, or to the top of the cant. 2. The applied built-up bituminous roofing shall be free of wrinkles, buckles, fishmouths, blisters, and other imperfections. Roll in all end and edge laps of field sheets. Roll in all flashing sheets to ensure adhesion. a. Mechanical Application - When mechanical roofing application equipment is used, planks, plywood, or other approved protection shall be placed over roof insulation or roofing where mechanical equipment is stored or serviced. Traffic shall be confined to the protected area. Felt machines shall contain a sufficient quantity to bitumen at the proper temperature to ensure no holidays in the bitumen application. Mechanical application shall not be used in the application of M.B. sheets. b. Mechanically fasten polyisocyanurate board insulation to metal decking to meet 2004 Florida Building Code. Roofing contractor to submit signed and sealed fastening layout by a Florida-registered engineer for insulation attachment. C. Flashing - Provide flashing in the angles formed at walls and other vertical surfaces and where required to make the work water-tight, except where metal flashing is indicated or specified in the Section "Sheet Metal Work." Flashing shall be provided and installed immediately after the top ply of roofing is placed; and shall be returned and sealed, or capped and sealed, to waterproof edges and ends. Details of the application shall follow the Manufacturer's manual for application of flashing. d. Strip Flashing - Roof flanges of lead and sheet metal flashing, such as gravel stop, base flashing, and plumbing flashing, provided under other Sections of the BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING (ASPHALT) 07510 - 2 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 Specifications, shall be set in a bed of plastic cement, mechanically attached, and stripped with two layers of roofing felt. After installation of flashing over the top ply of roofing, two layers of roofing felt, 9 inches and 12 inches wide shall be successively mopped on top of the roof flange to form a watertight joint between roofing and flashing. C. Surfacing - 1. After roofing felts have been laid and flashing installed, the entire roof surface, except cants, shall be mopped uniformly with hot bitumen at the specified rate. 2. While the bitumen is still hot, the Modified Bitumen Sheets shall be embedded therein, placed in the manner and quantity to form a water-tight overlay in accordance to the Manufacturer's Instruction Guidelines. Modified Sheets shall be unrolled and allowed to relax prior to installation. D. Coatings - 1. All exposed bituminous surfaces shall receive two (2) coats aluminum coating applied at the rate of one gallon per square per coat. Apply first coat and allow to dry. Apply second coat 90 degrees to the application of the first coat. 1.4 SUBMITTAL DATA A. Sample of the Manufacturer's no dollar limit warranty covering roofing and flashing for a minimum of twenty (20) years. B. Manufacturer's built-up roofing specification proposed for use, including Manufacturer's General Requirements section. C. Manufacturer's flashing specification proposed for use. D. A sample of Modified Bitumen sheet proposed for use on this project. E. One fastener of each type proposed for use on this project. END OF SECTION 07510 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING (ASPHALT) 07510 - 3 of 3 APA 07.08 SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL Fire Station #48 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section: 1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 2. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 4. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water- resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. C. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1 of 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 to ASTM C 920 for Class l or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated. D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. E. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant: 1. Available Products: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. b. GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. C. Tremco; Tremsil 2UU 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. F. Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant: 1. Available Products: a. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM 7200. b. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - 2c NS TG. C. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; NP 2. d. Tremco; Vulkem 227. e. Tremco; Vulkem 322 DS. 2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. G. Multicomponent Pourable Urethane Sealant: 1. Available Products: a. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 550. b. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; POURTHANE. C. Pacific Polymers, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 227 High Shore Type I (Self Leveling). d. Pacific Polymers, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 227 Type I (Self Leveling). e. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-200. f. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-270SL. g. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM 7201. h. Tremco; THC-901. i. Tremco; THC-900. j. Tremco; Vulkem 245. k. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR 300, Type H. 1. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR 300, Type M. 2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and P (pourable). 3. Use Related to Exposure: T (traffic). 4. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. H. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: 1. Available Products: a. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - I a. b. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Ultra. C. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; NP 1. d. Tremco; Vulkem 116. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 2 of 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 3. Class: 25. 4. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type O P, Grade NF. B. Available Products: 1. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 600. 2. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. 3. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200. 4. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac. 5. Tremco; Tremflex 834. 2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1.330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), O (open-cell material), B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self- adhesive tape where applicable. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants. 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 3 of 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 a. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. 2. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. a. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. B. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. G. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 4 of 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 H. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, producing seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.3 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior vertical control and expansion joints in unit masonry. 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component nonsag urethane sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: Color as selected by Architect. B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior perimeter joints between frames of doors and windows. 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component nonsag urethane sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: Color as selected by Architect. C. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component nonsag urethane sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: Color as selected by Architect. D. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior control and expansion joints in horizontal traffic surfaces of concrete walks. 1. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent pourable urethane sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: Color as selected by Architect.. E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior perimeter joints of exterior openings. 1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: Color as selected by Architect.. F. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component mildew-resistant neutral-curing silicone sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: Match color of plumbing fixtures. G. Joint-Sealant Application: Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior walls and partitions. 1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: Color as selected by Architect. H. Joint-Sealant Application: Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. 1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: Color as selected by Architect. END OF SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 5 of 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 08100 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1. SUMMARY A. The work under this section shall include the furnishing of all items shown on the drawings and as specified, but not limited to, the following. 1. Steel Doors 2. Steel Door Frames 3. Steel Sidelight, Borrowed lite & transom frames 4. Louvers Installed in Steel Doors 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Masonry mortar B. Finish carpentry C. Wood Doors and Frames D. Finish Hardware E. Glass and Glazing F. Painting of steel doors and frames 1.3 REFERENCES A. Steel Doors and Frames in this section must meet all standards as established by the following listing. 1. Door and Hardware Preparation ANSI 115.1. 2. Life Safety Codes NFPA-101 (Latest edition). 3. Fire Doors and Windows NFPA-80 (Latest edition). 4. Steel Door Institute ANSI/SDI-100 (Latest edition) 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. Coordinate approved shop drawings with all other trades and manufacturers whose products are used in conjunction with the Steel Doors and Frames under section 08100. B. Finish hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical hardware to the steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the finish hardware items. C. The steel door and frame supplier will furnish to the architect (6) complete copies of the proposed steel door and frames schedule and/or shop drawings. Using the same reference number for details and openings as those on the contract drawings. After receipt of the approved door schedule the steel door and frame supplier will make any corrections submit to the architect (6) sets of corrected schedules, for file and field use. D. All door openings including wood, aluminum, overhead etc. must be listed on the steel door schedule. Include details on the following list of items: 1. Frame elevations 2. Door design elevations 3. Frame sections 4. Details of construction 5. Anchorage 6. Opening conditions 7. Joints and connections 8. Hardware locations E. If any opening is not by the steel door manufacturer only the door opening number should be shown along with the type of material (alum, wood etc.). F. Upon request of the architect or for any substitution to this specification, (4) copies of the door manufacturers catalog cut sheets are to be submitted to the architect before any material is placed on the job site. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100 - 1 of 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide Steel Doors and Frames complying with the Steel Door Institute recommended specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames ANSI/SDI 100. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All steel doors and frames must be properly marked with door opening mark number to correspond with the schedule. B. Deliver all the steel doors in cartons and palletized to provide protection during transit and job storage. C. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damage is to be repaired, provided they are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the architect. D. Store doors and frames at the building site under cover. Place units on wood sills or on the floor in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid the use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which could create a humidity chamber. If the wrapper on the door becomes wet, remove the carton immediately. Provide a 1/4 inch space between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers subject to compliance with requirements; provide product by the following: 1. Steeleraft Manufacturing Company 2.2 HARDWARE LOCATIONS AND GENERAL REINFORCEMENTS A. Locate hardware on doors and frames in accordance with the manufactures standard location. B. Steel frames for use with wood doors the hardware preparation on the doors is governed by its location on the frames. If the doors are factory mortised, the door supplier is responsible for coordinating hardware locations. C. Hardware reinforcements are to be in accordance with the minimum standard gages as listed in SDI-100. D. Doors shall be mortised, reinforced and function holes provided at the factory in accordance with the hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier. Through bolt holes, attachment holes, drilling and tapping for surface hardware, shall be done by others. 2.3 STEEL DOORS A. Material - Exterior doors and as indicted on the schedule 1. Face Sheets to be made of commercial quality hot dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A924 A60. Grade III - 14ga. 2. Vertical edges are to have continuous vertical mechanical interlocking joints at lock and hinge edges with visible edge seams. The internal portion of the seam shall be sealed with epoxy. 3. Hinge reinforcement shall be not less than 7gage (3/16") plate 1-1/4" X 9". Approved equal is a 12 gage continuous channel with formed holes drilled and tapped. The manufacture to provide test information that this type reinforcement is equal to a 3/16" or 7 gage plate reinforcement. 4. Reinforce tops and bottoms of all doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 14 gage galvanized A60, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel shall have a steel closure channel flush with the face sheets and screwed into the door. Plastic fillers are not acceptable. 5. Doors shall be reinforced, stiffened, sound deadened and insulated with impregnated kraft honeycomb core completely filling the inside of the doors and laminated to STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100 - 2 of 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 inside faces of both panels using contact adhesive applied to both panels and honeycomb core. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers a. Steelcraft Manufacturing - L Series with flush top closure. b. Curries Company - 707T, flush top closure, 12 gage hinge channel. C. Ceco Door Products - Regent. 2.4 STEEL FRAMES A. Materials - exterior and as indicted on the schedule. 1. Are to be hot dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM designations A924 A60, 16ga. 2. All frames are to have back welded face seams only of the frame corner or intersection. Grind and dress smooth the weld area. Apply a factory baked on zinc rich primer over the grinding area, and finish with a matching prime paint. 3. Manufacturer: Steelcraft Manufacturing - F series B. Materials all other frames as indicted on the schedule. 1. Will comply with ASTM A366-68 or ASTM A569-66T, 16ga. 2. All frames are to have back welded face seams only of the frame corner or intersection. Grind and dress smooth the weld area. Apply a factory baked on zinc rich primer over the grinding area, and finish with a matching prime paint. 3. Manufacturer: Steelcraft Manufacturing - F series C. Fabrication 1. General design and construction a. Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lites, and other openings to the size and design as shown on the architectural drawings. b. All finished work to be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square, true and free of defects. C. Jamb depths, trim, profile and backbends to be as scheduled and shown on approved shop drawings. d. When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings shall be fabricated in sections designed for splicing in the field by others. e. Hardware reinforcements are to be in accordance with the minimum standard gages as listed in SDI-100. f. Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for template mortised hardware only, in accordance with approved hardware schedule and template provided by the hardware contractor. Where surface mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall have reinforcing plates only; all drilling, and tapping shall be done by others. g. Hinge reinforcements, to be 7ga steel. D. Anchors 1. Floor anchors shall be provided at each jamb. 2. Anchors for in masonry are to be of the wire type. 3. Anchors for stud partitions are to be steel of a suitable design, not less than 18ga thickness. 4. Dust boxes/mortar guards to be no less than 26 gage. 5. All frames that are welded, to be provided with a steel spreader temporarily attached to the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. Spreader bars are for bracing only not to be used to size the frame opening. 6. Loose glazing stops are to be of 18 gage galvanized at labeled openings and 20 gage galvanized on non-labeled openings, butted at the corner joints and secured to the frame with countersunk cadmium or zinc-plated screws. 7. Provide 3 silencers on single door and 2 silencers for double door openings. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100 - 3 of 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station 948 2.5 PRIME FINISH: A. Doors and frames are to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum finish paint adhesion. All surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view shall receive a coat of rust inhibiting baked on primer applied at the factory. The finish shall meet the requirements for acceptance stated in ANSI A224.1 "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces." The baked on prime finish is not intended to be the final layer of protection from the elements. Field painting using a good grade of paints are to be used in accordance with the recommendations of the door and frame manufacturer. For specialty types of finished coatings, the paint supplier should also be consulted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to make sure that all dimensions for existing opening or existing frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back set, etc.) given to the steel manufacturer are accurate. B. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to see that any scratches or disfigurements caused in shipping or handling are properly cleaned and touched up with a rust inhibiting primer. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Frames I . Prior to installation, all frames must be checked for rack, twist and out of square conditions. 2. Place frames prior to enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. 3. Fill frames in masonry walls with mortar. 4. When temperature conditions necessitate an additive to be used in the plaster or mortar to prevent freezing, the contractor installing the frames will coat the inside of the frames, in the field, with a corrosion inhibiting bituminous material. 5. SDI-105, "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames" and SDI-110 "Standard Steel Doors and Frames for Modular Masonry Construction" shall indicate the proper installation procedures. B. Doors 1. Install doors plumb and in true alignment in a prepared opening and fasten them to achieve the maximum operational effectiveness and appearance. 2. Proper door clearance must be maintained in accordance with SDI-110. 3. Where necessary, only metal hinge shims are acceptable to maintain clearances. 4. "Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware" published by DHI is recommended for further details. C. Hardware must be applied in accordance with hardware manufacturer's templates and instructions. 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Check and re-adjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper condition. B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply to touch-up or compatible air-drying primer. 3.4 SCHEDULES A. After installation, copies of the door schedules will be turned over to the Owner when the building is accepted. END OF SECTION 08100 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100 - 4 of 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. C. Samples: 1. Submit manufacturer's standard samples demonstrating door construction. 2. Finish: A set of three illustrating the range of color and grain of the specified door face materials. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. B. Quality Standard: Meet or exceed NWWDA I.S.I -A "Premium Grade" and/or AWI Version 7 "Custom Grade." C. Warranty: Provide manufacturer's warranty to the following term: 1. Interior solid core doors: "Full life of original installation," including rehanging and refinishing if doors do not comply with warranty. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Eggers Industries. 3. Weyerhauser Company 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde. B. Particleboard-Core Doors: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2, made with binder containing no urea- formaldehyde resin. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. C. Mineral-Core Doors: FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated. 2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. 3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Solid-Core Doors: 1. Grade: NWWDA "Premium Grade" or AWI "Custom Grade." 2. Species: Wood Veneer: AWl - A Grade: The veneer species, slice or cut, finish and matching shall be: a. White Maple, Plain Sliced, Book Match, Clear Finish / OR b. Red Oak, Plain Sliced, Book Match, Clear Finish 3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced). 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening. 7. Core: Particleboard. 8. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. 2.4 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES A. Metal Louvers: Metal and Finish: Extruded aluminum with Class 11, clear anodic finish, AA- M12C22A31. B. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch-thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; with baked-enamel- or powder-coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing." 3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings. 2.6 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors indicated to receive opaque finish. C. Factory Transparent Finish: FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 Factory finish doors in accordance with NWWDA G-17 Finish System Description or AWI Division 1500-5-4 -- Finish System Standards. Factory finish to be water-based stain and ultraviolet (UV) cured polyurethane sealer to comply with EPA Title 5 guidelines for Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) emissions limitations. Finish must meet or exceed performance standards of TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. Color shall be a clear finish as specified in Section 2.3.5. Factory finished doors to be installed just prior to substantial completion. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." S. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. D. Factory-Fitted Doors. Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. F. Warranty Tolerances: 1. Conform to NWWDA standards and testing methods for warp, cup, bow, and telegraphing. END OF.SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 08411 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I . Exterior storefront framing. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: I . Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. C. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Failure of operating units. B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. C. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. I . Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior. C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. D. Other Action Submittals: I . Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. F. Product test reports. G. Field quality-control reports. H. Maintenance data. 1. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 -1 of 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 C. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. E. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. F. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer. G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. L Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide EFCO Corporation Series D300 Medium Style Doors in 525 Storefront or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 2. YKK AP America Inc. -- Doors only 3. Vista Wall 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M). 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/13 308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.1 OM. 2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Nonthermal. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Center. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 2 of 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, fabricated from stainless steel. D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M. E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials, Dead-soft, 0.018-inch-thick stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M of type recommended by manufacturer. F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: 1/4" Standard Gray exterior, 0.090 inner layer and 1/4" clear on interior (9/16" laminated glass). B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation. 1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- overall thickness, with minimum 0.188-inch-thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. 2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch nominal width. a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches above floor or ground plane. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door. B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 3 of 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for spandrel glazing or metal panels. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm, AA-M12C22A31, Class 11, 0.010 mm or thicker. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack. F. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 4 of 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. END OF SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 5 of 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fixed aluminum-framed windows. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide aluminum windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified, and that are of minimum test size required by AAMA/WDMA 101/1.S.2/NAFS. B. Structural Performance: Provide aluminum windows capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test: 1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Basic Wind Speed: 123 m.p.h. at 3 gust. b. Importance Factor: 1.15. C. Exposure Category: C. 2. Deflection: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch, whichever is less, at design pressure based on testing performed according to AAMA/WDMA 101J.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Deflection Test or structural computations. C. Windborne-Debris Resistance: Provide glazed windows capable of resisting impact from windborne debris, based on the pass/fail criteria as determined from testing glazed windows identical to those specified, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Submit calculations, structural properties, connection information and product information to verify that system performance and anchorage complies with the loading criteria specified herein. All calculations shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida, whose discipline is structural engineering. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of aluminum window indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work, operational clearances, and installation details C. Samples: For each exposed finish. D. Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Field quality-control test reports. F. Product test reports. G. Maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. B. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - I of 3 APA 07.08 1.5 WARRANTY Fire Station #48 A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. C. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of metals, other materials, and metal finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass. 2. Warranty Period: a. Window: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Metal Finish: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide EFCO Corporation Series 6600 Fixed or a comparable product. 2.2 WINDOW A. Window Type: Fixed. 2.3 GLAZING A. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal and complies with requirements for windborne-debris resistance. 1. Glass color: Standard Gray (1/4" gray outside, 0.090 inner layer with 1/4" clear interior. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate aluminum windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. B. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator. C. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior. D. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged ventilators and similar lines of natural water penetration. E. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units. F. Subframes: Provide subframes with anchors for window units as shown, of profile and dimensions indicated but not less than 0.062-inch-thick extruded aluminum. Miter or cope corners, and weld and dress smooth with concealed mechanical joint fasteners. Finish to match window units. Provide subframes capable of withstanding design loads of window units. G. Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8 Section "Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 2 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Aluminum Anodic Finish: Class II, clear anodic coating complying with AAMA 611. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. D. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior. E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. F. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. G. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. H. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. 1. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. END OF SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 3 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The work in this section shall include furnishing of all items of finish hardware as hereinafter specified or obviously necessary to complete the building, except those items that are specifically excluded from this section of the specification. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames B. Aluminum Doors and Frames C. Wood Doors and Frames 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish labor and material to complete hardware work indicated, as specified herein, or as may be required by actual conditions at building. B. Include all necessary screws, bolts, expansion shields, other devices, if necessary, as required for proper hardware application. The hardware supplier shall assume all responsibility for correct quantities. C. All hardware shall meet the requirements of Federal, State and Local codes having jurisdiction over this project, notwithstanding any real or apparent conflict therewith in these specifications. D. Fire-Rated Openings: 1. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with A.I.A. (NBFU) Pamphlet No. 80, NFPA Standards NO. 101, UBC 702 (1997) and UL10C. This requirement takes precedence over other requirements for such hardware. Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by UL for the types and sizes of doors required, and complies with the requirements of the door and doorframe labels. 2. Where panic exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, provide supplementary marking on door UL label indicating Fire Door to be equipped with fire exit hardware and provide UL label on exit device indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". E. Fasteners: 1. Hardware as furnished shall conform to published templates generally prepared for machine screw installation. 2. Furnish each item complete with all screws required for installation. Typically, all exposed screws installation. 3. Insofar as practical, furnished concealed type fasteners for hardware units that have exposed screws shall be furnished with Phillips flat head screws, finished to match adjacent hardware. 4. Door closers and exit devices to be installed with closed head through bolts (sex bolts). F. Hurricane Openings 1. Provide hardware for hurricane openings in compliance with local jurisdiction. 2. This requirement takes precedence over other requirements for such hardware. Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by local authority for the types and sizes of doors required, and complies with the requirements of the door and door frame. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The supplier to be a directly franchised distributor of the products to be furnished and have in their employ an AHC (Architectural Hardware Consultant). This person is to be available for consultation to the architect, owner and the general contractor at reasonable times during the course of work and the warranty period. FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 1 of 7 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 B. The finish hardware supplier shall prepare and submit to the architect six (6) copies of a complete schedule identifying each door and each set number, following the numbering system and not creating any separate system himself. He shall submit the schedule for review, make corrections as directed and resubmit the corrected schedule for final approval. Approval of schedule will not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for furnishing all necessary hardware, including the responsibility for furnishing correct quantities. C. No manufacturing orders shall be placed until detailed schedule has been submitted to the architect and written approval received. D. After hardware schedule has been approved, furnish templates required by manufacturing contractors for making proper provisions in their work for accurate fitting, finishing hardware setting. Furnish templates in ample time to facilitate progress of work. E. Hardware supplier shall have an office and warehouse facilities to accommodate the materials used on this project. The supplier must be an authorized distributor of the products specified. F. The hardware manufactures are to supply both a pre-installation class as well as a post- installation walk-thru. This is to insure proper installation and provide for any adjustments or replacements of hardware as required. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Wrap, protect finishing hardware items for shipment. Deliver to manufacturing contractors hardware items required by them for their application; deliver balance of hardware to job; store in designated location. Each item shall be clearly marked with its intended location. 1.6 WARRANTY A. The material furnished shall be warranted for one year after installation or longer as the individual manufacturer's warranty permits. B. Overhead door closers shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against failure due to defective materials and workmanship for a period of ten (10) years commencing on the Date of Final Completion and Acceptance, and in the event of failure, the manufacture is to promptly repair or replace the defective with no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. To the greatest extent possible, obtain ea ch kind of hardware from only one manufacturer. B. All numbers and symbols used herein have been taken from the current catalogues of the following manufacturers. PRODUCT ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER SUBSTITUTE 1) Hinges Hager Stanley, Bommer 2) Locks & Latches Best Schlage 3) Cylinders, Keys, Keying Best None (No Substitution) 4) Exit Devices Von Duprin None (No Substitution) 5) Door Closers LCN None (No Substitution) 6) OH Stops/Holders Glynn Johnson Rixson 7) Push Button Access Best None (No Substitution) 8) Magnetic Locks Locknetics Sentronics 9) Wall Stops/Floor Stops, Flushbolts Ives Rockwood, Trimco 10) Kick Plates Ives Rockwood, Quality 11) Threshold/Weather-strip National Guard Pemko, Zero 12) Silencers Ives Rockwood, Trimco 13) Key Cabinet Lund Key Control FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 2 of 7 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 C. If material manufactured by other than that specified or listed herewith as an equal, is to be bid upon, permission must be requested from the Architect seven (7) days prior to bidding. If substitution is allowed, it will be so noted by addendum. 2.2 FINISH OF HARDWARE: A. Exterior Hinges to be Stainless Steel (32D), Interior Hinges to be Satin Chrome (26D). Door Closers to be Aluminum. Locks to be Satin Chrome (26D), Exit Devices to be Satin Chrome (26D). Overhead Holders to be Satin Chrome (26D), Flat Goods to be Satin Chrome (26D) or Stainless Steel (32D) and the Thresholds to be Mill Finish Aluminum. 2.3 HINGES AND PIVOTS: A. Exterior butts shall be Stainless Steel. Butts on all out swinging doors shall be furnished with non-removable pins (NRP). B. Interior butts shall be as listed. C. Doors 5' or less in height shall have two (2) butts. Furnish one (1) additional butt for each 2'6" in height or fraction thereof. Dutch door shall have two (2) butts per leaf. 2.4 KEYING: A. All locks and cylinders to be keyed to the owner's existing BEST system. B. Combinated to Owner's instructions. Lock manufacturer shall issue Bittings, directly to the city only. C. Provide Two (2) each change keys per lock and Six (6) each grand master, master keys, two (2) construction and two (2) permanent control keys. D. Hardware supplier to provide temporary cores during the construction phase. The City will change out the temporary cores for the permanent cores. All cores become the property of the City upon completion of the work. E. Finish hardware supplier Consultant to work out with Owner a Keying Schedule and order cores from Best Access six to eight weeks prior to project completion. 2.5 LOCKSETS: A. Locksets shall be Heavy Duty Cylindrical type, unless specified otherwise, in "35H" series, 15H Design as manufactured by BEST on New Construction "93K" series, 15D Design as manufactured by BEST only where scheduled. 1. Acceptable substitutions: a. SCHLAGE "L9000" series, 06C design 2.6 EXIT DEVICES: A. All devices shall be Von Duprin 98 Series in types and functions specified. All devices must be listed under "Panic Hardware" in accident equipment list of Underwriters Laboratories. All labeled doors with "Fire Exit Hardware" must have labels attached and be in strict accordance with Underwriters Laboratories. B. All exit devices shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 test requirements by a BHMA certified testing laboratory. A written certification showing successful completion of a minimum of 1,000,000 cycles must be provided. C. All surface strikes shall be roller type and come complete with a plate underneath to prevent movement. And shall be provided with a dead-latching feature to prevent latchbolt tampering. D. Vertical rob exit devices NOT recommended. Key removable mullions with rim exit devices preferred. 1. Acceptable substitutions: a. None (No Substitution) FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 3 of 7 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 2.7 DOOR CLOSERS: A. All closers shall be LCN 4011 or 4111 Series having non-ferrous covers, forged steel arms separate valves for adjusting backcheck, closing and latching cycles and adjustable spring to provide up to 50% increase in spring power. Closers shall be furnished with parallel arm mounted on all doors opening into corridors or other public spaces and shall be mounted to permit 180 degrees door swing wherever wall conditions permit. Furnish with non-hold open arms unless otherwise indicated. B. Door closer cylinders shall be of high strength cast iron construction to provide low wear operating capabilities of internal parts throughout the life of the installation. All door closers shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 test requirements by a BHMA certified testing laboratory. A written certification showing successful completion of a minimum of 10,000,000 cycles must be provided. C. Door closers shall utilize temperature stable fluid capable of withstanding temperature ranges of 120 degrees Fahrenheit to -30 degrees Fahrenheit, without requiring seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door. Closers for fire-rated doors shall be provided with temperature stabilizing fluid that complies with the standards UBC 7-2 (1997) and UL IOC. D. Door closers shall incorporate tamper resistant non-critical screw valves of V-slot design to reduce possible clogging from particles within the closer. Closers shall have separate and independent screw valve adjustments for latch speed, general speed, and hydraulic backcheck. Backcheck shall be properly located so as to effectively slow the swing of the door at a minimum of 10 degrees in advance of the dead stop location to protect the door frame and hardware from damage. Pressure relief valves (PRV) are not acceptable. I. Acceptable substitutions: a. None (No Substitution) 2.8 TRIM AND PLATES: A. Kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates, shall be .050 gauge with 32D finish. Kick plates to be 8" high, mop plates to be 4" high. All plates shall be two (2) inches less full width of door. B. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls, and miscellaneous door trim shall be shown in the hardware schedule. 2.9 DOOR STOPS: A. Doorstops shall be furnished for all doors to prevent damage to doors or hardware from striking adjacent walls or fixtures. Wall bumpers equal to Ives WS407 Series are preferred, but where not practical furnish floor stops equal to Ives FS436 or FS438 series. Where conditions prohibit the use of either wall or floor type stops, furnish surface mounted overhead stops equal to Glynn Johnson, 450 Series. 2.10 THRESHOLDS AND WEATHERSTRIP: A. Thresholds and weather-strip shall be as listed in the hardware schedule. 2.11 DOOR SILENCERS: A. Furnish rubber door silencers equal to Ives SR64 for all new interior hollow metal frames, (2) per pair and (3) per single door frame. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. All hardware shall be applied and installed in accordance with the Finish Hardware schedule. Care shall be exercised not to mar or damage adjacent work. B. Contractor to provide a secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 4 of 7 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 replaceable, so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. C. No hardware is to be installed until the hardware manufacturers have provided a pre- installation class. This is to insure proper installation of the specified products. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Contractor shall adjust all hardware in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Prior to turning project to owner, contractor shall clean and make any final adjustments to the finish hardware. 3.3 PROTECTION: A. Contractor shall protect the hardware, as it is stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. B. Contractor shall protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. 3.4 DOOR HARDWARE SETS HW SET #1 DOORS: 1,2,4,5 EACH TO HAVE: 1 CYLINDER AS REQUIRED NOTE: BALANCE HW SET #2 DOORS: 3 EACH TO HAVE: 6 HINGES 1 LOCK 2 FLUSH BOLTS 2 OH STOP 1 THRESHOLD 1 WEATHERSTRIP HW SET #3 DOORS: 7 EACH TO HAVE: BB 1191 4.5 x 4.5 NRP US32D ND80PD RHO US26D 555-12 US26D GJ904F US32D 2005AV 303AV 6 HINGES BB 1191 4.5 x 4.5 US32D 1 LOCK ND70PD RHO US26D 2 FLUSH BOLT 555-12 US26D 2 STOPMOLDER 494 US26D 2 SILENCERS 33 FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 5 of 7 Fire Station #48 APA 07.08 HW SET #4 DOORS: 23,24 EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 US26D 1 PRIVACY ND40S RHO US26D 1 STOP 409 US32D 3 SILENCERS 33 HW SET#5 DOORS: 12, 16, 17, 18, 22, 33 EACH TO HAVE- 3 HINGES BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 US26D 1 PRIVACY ND40S RHO US26D 1 KICK PLATE 8 x 34 US32D 1 STOP 408 US32D 3 SILENCERS 33 HW SET #6 DOORS: 21 EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 US26D 1 PULL PLATE 110 x 70X 4 x 16 US32D 1 PUSH PLATE 70F 8 x 16 US32D 1 CLOSER 4111 TB AL 1 KICK PLATE 8 x 34 US32D 1 STOP 409 US32D 3 SILENCERS 33 HW SET #7 DOORS: 10, 13, 14, 19, 20 EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 US26D 1 LOCK ND70PD RHO US26D 1 CLOSER 4011 TB AL (DR. 14) 1 STOP 409 US32D 3 SILENCERS 33 HW SET #8 DOORS: 15 EACH TO HAVE: 6 HINGES BB 1279 1 LOCK ND70PD RHO US26D 2 FLUSH BOLT 555-12 US26D 2 STOPS 409 US32D 2 SILENCERS 33 FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 6 of 7 APA 07.08 HW SET #9 DOORS: 9 EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES BB 1.191 4.5 x 4.5 NRP US32D 1 EXIT DEVICE 99LF x 996L SNB US26D 1 CYLINDER 20-057 US26D 1 CLOSER 4111 TB AL 1 THRESHOLD 2005AV 1 WEATHERSTRIP 303AV 1 SWEEP 315CN HW SET #10 DOORS: 6 EACH TO HAVE: 6 HINGES BB 1191 4.5 x 4.5 US32D 1 LOCK ND70PD RHO US26D 2 FLUSH BOLTS 555-12 US26D 2 STOPS 409 US32D 2 SILENCERS 33 HW SET#11 DOORS: 8 EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 US26D 1 LOCK ND70PD RHO US26D 1 CLOSER 4011 TB AL 1 STOP 409 US32D 1 THRESHOLD 271A 1 WEATHERSTRIP 303AV 1 SWEEP 315CN END OF SECTION 08710 Fire Station #48 FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 7 of 7 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 09111- NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications: 1. interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.). 2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.). 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. I . Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class l zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch-diameter wire. B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter. C. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. D. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings; 0.034 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. 2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.034 inch. B. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 -1 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing installation. 3.2 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. B. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 4. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. C. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. 3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. B. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs, a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. C. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 2. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 2 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 C. Direct Furring: 1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. D. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. END OF SECTION 09111 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 3 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I . Exterior Portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on metal lath solid-plaster bases. B. See Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for structural, load-bearing (transverse and axial) steel studs and joists that support lath and portland cement plaster. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Before stuccoing, install mockups of at least 1.00 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for each type of finish indicated. 2. For interior plasterwork, simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements. B. Exterior Plasterwork: Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2.2 METAL LATH A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z] 80), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 1. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Flat or Self-furring. a. Weight: 3.41b/sq. yd. (1.8 kg/sq, m). 2. Flat Rib Lath: Rib depth of not more than 1/8 inch (3.1 mm). a. Weight: 3.4 lb/sq. yd. (1.8 kg/sq. m). 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. B. Plastic Trim: Fabricated from high-impact PVC. L Cornerbeads: With perforated flanges. a. Small-nose style; use unless otherwise indicated. 2. Casing Beads: With perforated flanges in depth required to suit plaster bases indicated and flange length required to suit applications indicated. a. Bull-nose style; use unless otherwise indicated. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 1 of 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 3. Control Joints: One-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 4. Expansion Joints: Two-piece type, formed to produce slip joint and square-edged 1/2- inch- wide reveal; with perforated concealed flanges. 5. Soffit Vents: 4 inch wide continuous; insert in stucco. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch (13 mm) long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster. C. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932. D. Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as required by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths required to achieve penetration through joined materials of not fewer than three exposed threads. E. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063. F. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), unperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.1 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size. 2.5 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type [I] [111 1. Color for Finish Coats: Gray. B. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM. C 207, Type S. C. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897. 2.6 PLASTER MIXES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated. 1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. (0.6 kg of fiber/cu. m) of cementitious materials. Reduce aggregate quantities accordingly to maintain workability. B. Portland Cement Base-Coat Mixes: 1. Over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork as follows: a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix l part portland cement and 0 to 3/4 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to 3/4 parts lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). 2. Over Concrete Unit Masonry: Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork as follows: a. For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 2 of 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 C. Portland Cement Job-Mixed Finish-Coat Mixes: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1 /2 parts 1 ime. Use I -1 /2 to 3 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering. B. Prepare solid-plaster bases that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Where required, install blankets before installing lath unless blankets are readily installed after lath has been installed on one side. B. Acoustical Sealant: Where required, seal joints between edges ofplasterwork and abutting construction with acoustical sealant. 3.3 INSTALLING NONSTRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. General: Comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 for applications indicated. I . Comply with ASTM C 754 for installation of items not addressed in ASTM C 1063. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in plaster assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints independently. E. Soffits: Unless otherwise detailed on Drawings, install furred or suspended soffits to comply with requirements for ceiling installation; install framed soffits to comply with requirements for partition installation. 3.4 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR CEILINGS A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free of contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and tying, either directly to structure or directly to fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 4. Do not connect steel framing to or suspend it from ducts, pipes, or conduit. B. Sway-brace suspended steel framing [with hangers used for support] <Insert requirements. C. Install steel framing components for ceilings in sizes and spacings indicated but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards. 3.5 INSTALLING METAL LATH A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063. L Flat-Ceiling and Horizontal Framing: Install flat diamond-mesh or flat rib lath. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 3 of 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 3.6 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings. B. Reinforcement for External Corners: 1. Install lath-type external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations. 2. Install cornerbead at interior[ and exterior] locations. C. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings. I. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes: a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft. (13.4 sq. m). b. Horizontal and other Nonvertical Surfaces: 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m). 2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet (5.5 m) o.c. 3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios of not greater than 2-1/2:1. 4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster. 5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas (panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension change. 3.7 PLASTER APPLICATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926. B. Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry and concrete plaster bases. C. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide float sand finish to match Architect's sample. 3.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, patch, replace, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, crazing (check cracking), dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. END OF SECTION 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 4 of 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I- Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each trim accessory indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. I . Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Gypsum Co. b. G-P Gypsum. C. National Gypsum Company. d. USG Corporation. B. Regular Type: I. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 2. Long Edges. Tapered. C. Type X: 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. D. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. E. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces. 1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.2 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.1. L Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. b. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Plastic. 2. Shapes: GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 1 of 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. C. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint. g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. D. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." F. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 2 of 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. 3.2 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Regular Type: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 3.3 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. B. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. C. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.1, at locations indicated to receive tile. D. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install regular-type gypsum wallboard panels to produce a flat surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water-resistant panels. E. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners. 3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 4. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 5. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below: I . Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings. 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections. 4. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections. E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 3 of 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 4 of 4 APA 07.08 SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic tile. 2. Stone thresholds. 3. Tile backing panels. 1.2 SUBMITTALS Fire Station #48 A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: 1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Assembled samples, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of floor tile installation. 2. Build mockup of wall tile installation. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 TILE PRODUCTS A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. B. Tile Type MT-1: Factory-mounted unglazed ceramic mosaic tile. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings Daltile: Keystones Colorbody Porcelain or comparable product by one of the following: a. American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. b. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. C. Interceramic. 2. Composition: Porcelain. 3. Module Size: 2 by 2 inches. 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 5. Face: Plain with cushion edges. 6. Surface: Smooth, without abrasive admixture. 7. Finish: Bright, opaque glaze. CERAMIC TILE 09310 -1 of 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 8. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's Color Groups 1 and 2. 9. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's Pricing Groups 1 and 2. C. Tile Type WT-1: Glazed wall tile. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. b. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. C. Florida Tile Industries, Inc. 2. Module Size: 6 by 6 inches. 3. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 4. Face: Plain with cushion edges. 5. Finish: Semi-gloss. 6. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's Color Groups 1 and 2. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's Pricing Groups 1 and 2. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. Base: Coved, module size 6 by 6 inches, b. Wainscot Cap: Bullnose cap 6 by 6 inches. C. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Bullnose shape, same size as adjoining flat tile. d. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. 2.2 THRESHOLDS A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less above adjacent floor surface. B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503, with a minimum abrasion.resistance of 12 per ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish. I . Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining. 2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325. I. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. b. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 2.4 SETTING MATERIALS A. Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A 108.02. B. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. b. Bostik, Inc. CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 2 of 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 C. C-Cure. d. Laticrete International, Inc. e. MAPEI Corporation. f. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 2. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar. C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI Al 18.4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Bonsai American; an Oldcastle company. b. Bostik, Inc. C. C-Cure. d. Laticrete International, Inc. e. MAPEI Corporation, f.. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 2. Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix to which only water must be added. 3. Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive. 4. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar. 2.5 GROUT MATERIALS A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3. 1. Manufacturer: Laticrete International, Inc.: Spectralock Pro Grout 2.6 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. I . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. DAP Inc.; 100 percent Silicone Kitchen and Bath Sealant. b. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786. C. GE Silicones, a division of GE Specialty Materials; Sanitary 1700. d. Laticrete International, Inc.; Latasil Tile & Stone Sealant. e. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600 White. C. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 550. b. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II-SG. C. Sika Corporation; Sikaflex-2c SL. d. Tremco Incorporated.; Vulkem 245. CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 3 of 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. B. Soap dishes: In gang showers, provide ceramic tile 6 inch by 6 inch soap dishes as indicated on drawings. Color to match field tile. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before installing. D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Exterior tile floors. b. Tile floors in wet areas. C. Tile swimming pool decks. d. Tile floors in laundries. e. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger. f. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 4 of 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. E. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/8 inch (1.6 mm). 2. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). F. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. G. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." H. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated. 1. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent floor finishes, set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thin set). 1. Install cementitious backer units and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use latex-portland cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions. J. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. K. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. 3.4 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1. Tile Installation F114: Cement mortar bed (thickset) with cleavage membrane; epoxy grout; TCA Fl 14. a. Tile Type: 2 by 2 inches mosaic. b. Grout: Water-cleanable Spectralock Pro grout. B. Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring: 1. Tile Installation W244: Thin-set mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber cement underlayment over cleavage membrane; TCA W244. a. Tile Type: 6 by 6 inches, glazed. b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex portland cement mortar. C. Grout: Water-cleanable grout. C. Shower Receptor and Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring: 1. Tile Installation B415: Thin-set mortar on cementitious backer units/fiber cement underlayment; TCA B415. a. Tile Type: 1) Walls: 6 inches by 6 inches glazed. 2) Floors: 2 inches by 2 inches mosaic, b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. C. Grout: Water-cleanable Spectralock Pro grout. END OF SECTION 09310 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 5 of 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 09511- ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 - Section 09250 - Gypsum Board 2. Division 15 Sections -Mechanical 3. Division 16 Sections - Electrical C. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class. B. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient. C. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. D. Recycled Content: Average percentage based on weight of component materials. Material recovered or diverted from the solid waste stream, either during the manufacturing process (pre- consumer) or after consumer use (post-consumer). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Coordinate Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following: 1. Ceiling suspension members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6 inch by 12-inch samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12 inch long Samples of each type, finish, and color. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each acoustical panel ceiling and suspension system. 1. 2. UL Acoustical Compliance: For acoustical performance, each carton of material must carry Underwriter's Laboratory certification for AC (if applicable), CAC and NRC. 3. 4. UL Suspension System Load Compliance: Manufacturer must certify that the metal suspension system is UL Classified to be load compliant per ASTM C635. For load compliance, each carton of main tees must carry Underwriter's Laboratory certification for load compliance. E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling and components. F. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -1 of 6 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. b. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface- burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: C. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 2 of 6 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 I . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one product as specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by the manufacturer specified. 3. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectance, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795. B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 2.3 WATER-FELTED, MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Products: 1. USG Interiors, Inc., product name: Radar C1imaPlus, Item Number: 2215. B. Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for Type 111, Form 2, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted; and pattern as follows: 1. Pattern: CD. C. Color: White. D. LR: Not less than 0.84. E. NRC: Not less than 0.55. F. CAC: Not less than 35. G. Recycled Content: Not less than 40%. H. Edge Detail: Square (SQ). 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. J. Size: 24 by 24 inches. K. No deviations 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. 1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are indicated. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class I zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400. 3. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire. E. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch thick, galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch diameter bolts. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 3 of 6 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Products: 1. USG Interiors, Inc., Donn DXL suspension system. B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Fire-Rated Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot- dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. Four-foot tees shall carry a minimum of 12 lbs., per lineal foot and also be rated intermediate duty. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white. 6. No deviations 2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Manufacturers: 1. USG Interiors, Inc. B. Roll-Formed Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member. 2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. 3. For .narrow-face suspension systems, provide suspension system and manufacturer's standard edge moldings that match width and configuration of exposed runners. 2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Products: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. C. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 4 of 6 APA 07.08 Fire Station 948 for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 8. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 5 of 6 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 2. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire- resistance-rated assembly. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09511 ACOUSTICAL, PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 6 of 6 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl composition floor tile. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content. C. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. D. Maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class 1, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive floor tile. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation. E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Standard EXCELON Imperial Texture. 2. Congoleum Corporation; Alternatives. 3. Tarkett, Inc.; Azrock vinyl composition tile - Standard/Cortina colors. B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile. C. Wearing Surface: Smooth. D. Thickness. 0.125 inch. E. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm). F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 1 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor covering manufacturer. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install -floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.2 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION - NEW TRAINING BUILDING A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles square with room axis. C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction. D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 2 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION - EXISTING BUILDING A. Existing vinyl composition tile contains asbestos. Refer to asbestos report. B. Existing vinyl composition tile is not to be removed. New vinyl flooring shall be installed over existing tile floor as recommended by the vinyl composition tile manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile. B. Floor Polish. Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Apply two coats. C. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09651 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 3 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 09680 - CARPET PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes direct glue-down carpet. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples: For each color and texture required. 1. Carpet: 12-inch-square Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch-long Samples. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation." 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. 1. Warranty Period: 1.0 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 LEVEL LOOP A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: l . Mohawk: 1842 Properties II a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. b. Source: At Home Floors, Mark Stiegman, 727-584-3711 B. Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon. C. Fiber Type: Predyed filament D. Pile Characteristic: Level-loop pile. E. Density: 7358 CARPET 09680 - 1 of 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 F. Pile Thickness: 0.137. G. Stitches: 11 stitches per inch. H. Gage: VIOL. 1. Face Weight: 28 oz./sq. yd. J. Total Weight: 61.25 oz./sq. yd. for finished carpet. K. Primary Backing: Woven polypropylene. L. Secondary Backing: Woven polypropylene. M. Width: 12 feet. N. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material. 0. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet manufacturer. 1. VOC Limits: Provide adhesives with VOC content not more than 50g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24). C. Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for the following: 1. Direct-Glue-Down Installation. Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-Down Installation." B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. C. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. D. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. END OF SECTION 09680 CARPET 09680 - 2 of 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 09900 - PAINTING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: 1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Owner will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Architectural woodwork and casework. b. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Light fixtures. d. Distribution cabinets. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Furred areas. b. Ceiling plenums. C. Utility tunnels. d. Pipe spaces. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. C. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. PAINTING 09900 - 1 of 8 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 1. "Flat" refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter. 2. "Eggshell" refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 3. "Satin" refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 4. "Semigloss" refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 5. "Full gloss" refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated. 1. After color selection, the Owner will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample of each type of coating and substrate required on the Project. 1. The Owner will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be painted. a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) of wall surface. b. Small Areas and Items: The Owner will designate an item or area as required. 2. After permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated, apply coatings in this room or to each surface according to the Schedule or as specified. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface. 3. Final approval of colors will be from job-applied samples. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. PAINTING 09900 - 2 of 8 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C). B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (7.2 and 35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.785 L) or 1. case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied. 2. Properly label all containers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers Names: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Porter Paint Company (Paint Schedule is based on Porter Paint. If another manufacturer is submitted, submit both Porter Data Sheets along with Data Sheets for paint proposed to be used. All products must be equivalent or exceed quality of Porter Products scheduled for Architect's approval.) 2. ICI Dulux Paints. 3. Cantol Floor Treatment for sealed concrete floors. 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. PAINTING 09900 - 3 of 8 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. Power spray exterior of existing building to be repainted. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations. b. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to requirements of SSPC-SP 10. C. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. d. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire- brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. PAINTING 09900 - 4 of 8 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non petroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 2. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simpl ify identification of each coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and the fihn thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. PAINTING 09900 - 5 of 8 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. 2. Ductwork. 3. Insulation. 4. Accessory items. G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: I . Conduit and fittings. 2. Switchgear. 3. Panelboards. H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. 1. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. K. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: I . The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. 2. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the Owner: a. Quantitative material analysis. b. Abrasion resistance. C. Apparent reflectivity. d. Flexibility. PAINTING 09900 - 6 of 8 APA 07.08 3.5 Fire Station #48 M. Alkali and mildew resistance. The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. The Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from the site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the rejected paint. If necessary, the Contractor may be required to remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the 2 coatings are incompatible. e. Washability. f. Absorption. g. Accelerated weathering. h. Dry opacity. i. Accelerated yellowness. j. Recoating. k. Skinning. 1. Color retention. CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Sand Float Stucco: 1. First Coat: "PorterLock" #6010 Pigmented Sealer 2. Intermediate Coat: "3939 Portersept" Exterior Satin Acrylic 3. Top Coat: "3939 Portersept" Exterior Satin Acrylic B. Doors and Frames - Galvanized Steel 1. First Coat: "Porter Guard" #215/212 series, DTM Primer 2. Intermediate Coat: "6029 Acri-Pro 100" Semi-gloss Exterior Acrylic 3. Top Coat: "6029 Acri-Pro 100" Semi-gloss Exterior Acrylic INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Drywall Walls (Flat Finish): I. First Coat: "Blankit" #1129 series, Acrylic Primer 2. Intermediate Coat: "999 Silken Touch" Eggshell Interior Latex 3. Top Coat: "999 Silken Touch" Eggshell Interior Latex 3.7 3.8 B. Drywall Walls - Restrooms (Satin Finish): 1. First Coat: "Blankit" #1129 series, Acrylic Primer 2. Intermediate Coat: "1119 Silken Touch" Semi-gloss Interior Acrylic PAINTING 09900 - 7 of 8 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 3. Top Coat: "1119 Silken Touch" Semi-gloss Interior Acrylic C. Drywall Ceilings (Flat Finish): 1. First Coat: "Blankit" #1129 series, Acrylic Primer 2. Intermediate Coat: "1119 Silken Touch" Semi-gloss Interior Acrylic 3. Top Coat:. "1119 Silken Touch" Semi-gloss Interior Acrylic D. Metal Door Frames 1. First Coat: "Porterguard" #215 Series, DTM Primer 2. Intermediate Coat: "1139 Silken Touch" Semi-gloss Interior Acrylic 3. Top Coat: "1139 Silken Touch" Semi-gloss Interior Acrylic E. Concrete Sealer 1. First Coat Cantol 227 Water-based Seal and Finish for Concrete END OF SECTION 09900 PAINTING 09900 - 8 of 8 APA 01.09 Fire Station #48 SECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic-laminate-faced toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: Commercial steel sheet for exposed applications; mill phosphatized and selected for smoothness. 1. Electrolytically Zinc Coated: ASTM A 879/A 879M, O1Z (03G). 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized: ASTM A 653/A 653M, either hot-dip galvanized or galvannealed. B. Zarnac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings. C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 with 45-1b (20.4-kg) density, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. D. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, general-purpose HGS grade, 0.048-inch (1.2-mm) nominal thickness. 2.2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED UNITS A. Manufacturers. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 2. All American Metal Corp. 3. American Sanitary Partition Corporation. 4. Ampco, Inc. 5. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 6. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions. 7. Flush Metal Partition Corp. 8. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. 9. Global Steel Products Corp. 10. Knickerbocker Partition. Corporation. 11. Marlite. 12. Metpar Corp. 13. Rockville Partitions Incorporated. 14. Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing company. 15. Shanahan's Limited. 16. Tex-Lam Manufacturing, Inc. 17. Weis-Robart Partitions, Inc. B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced. C. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 1.0155 - 1 of 3 APA 01.09 Fire Station #48 D. Door, Panel, Screen, and Pilaster Construction: One-piece, plastic-laminate facing sheets pressure laminated to core material without splices or joints in facings or cores; with laminate applied to edges before faces to seal edges and prevent laminate from being pried loose. Seal exposed core material at cutouts to protect core from moisture. 1. Core Material: Particleboard. 2. Doors and Panels: Finished to not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) thick. 3. Pilasters: Provide construction to comply with the following: a. Finished to not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) thick and with internal, nominal 0.134-inch- (3.42-mm-) thick, steel-sheet reinforcement. E. Pilaster, Shoes, and Sleeves (Caps): Formed from stainless-steel sheet, not less than 3 inches (76 mm) high, finished to match hardware. F. Brackets (Fittings): 1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, stainless steel. 2. Full-Height (Continuous) Type for urinal screens: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel. G. Plastic-Laminate Finish: One color and pattern in each room. 1. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. 4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. 5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors. 6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish. C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. B. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide, in- swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 2 of 3 APA 01.09 PART 3 - EXECUTION Fire Station #48 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. B. Clearances: Maximum 1/2 inch (13 mm) between pilasters and panels; I inch (25 mm) between panels and walls. C. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than three brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or the joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. END OF SECTION 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 3 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 10431 - SIGNAGE PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: I. Panel Signs 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Product Data: 1. Submit five (5) copies of manufacturer's technical information, installation instructions and maintenance recommendations. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit five (5) copies of shop drawings clearly indicating: a. Size, type, layout, colors and wording of signs, letters, plaques and directories. b. Fabrication, construction and installation details of anchors, grounds, reinforcements and accessories. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of all anchors to be installed, as a unit of work in other sections, for all signs, letters, plaques and directories anchored to permanent construction. c. Plans and elevations which indicate the locations of all signs, letters, plaques and directories as specified for this project. d. Large scale sections of typical members and other components. e. Message list for each sign required. f. Proof copy of metal plaques. C. Samples: 1. General: A. The Architect shall make all selections from the samples of standard colors, patterns and surface textures submitted by the manufacturer. 2. Signs and Letters: a. Submit one (1) "full - size" sample, representative of each type of sign and letter specified. D. Sign Schedule: 1. Submit schedule of signs to be used, indicating Room Name and Number, for review. Room Numbers may be different than indicated on the schedule depending upon final numbering issued by the Owner. Verify prior to sign fabrication. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: 1. Comply with all Codes and Standards applicable to this Section, specifically, the "Americans with Disabilities Act" of 1991 (ADA) including any subsequent revisions and the 1994 State Requirements for Educational Facilities (SREF) including any subsequent revisions. B. Single Source Responsibility: 1. For each separate type of sign required, obtain signs from a single manufacturer capable of producing first quality work. C. Installation: I . Manufacturer/Supplier shall be responsible to provide installation in accordance with the requirements of these specifications including providing all fasteners and/or adhesives required. In the event of difference between these specifications and the manufacturer's recommendations, these specifications shall govern. SIGNAGE 10431 - I of 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 2. Remove and replace imperfect or damaged material prior to substantial completion. 3. Throughout the one (1) year warranty period, any broken, faded, delaminated or otherwise defective product shall be replaced with a new and like product without material and labor cost to the Owner. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERMANENT ROOM DESIGNATIONS A. General: 1. Permanent Room Designations shall include Room Names and/or Numbers and shall conform to the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1991 (ADA) including any subsequent revisions. 2. Permanent Room Designations shall be considered "Panel Signs". 3. Letters and numbers shall be considered "Tactile Text". B. Character Proportion: 1. Letters and numbers on signs shall have a width to height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1 and a stroke-width to height ratio between 1:5 and 1:10. C. Character Height: 1. Characters and numbers on signs shall be sized according to the viewing distance from which they are to be read. The minimum height is measured using an upper case X. Use upper case characters only. D. Raised and Brailled Characters & Pictorial Symbol Signs: 1. Letters and numbers (tactile text) on signs shall be raised 1/32", upper case, sans serif or simple serif type and shall be accompanied with Grade 11 Braille, raised 1./32", on the bottom of the sign. Raised tactile text shall be at least 5/8" high, but no higher than 2". Pictograms, in a minimum 6" x 6" area, may be reverse engraved/subsurface and shall be accompanied by the equivalent verbal description placed directly below the pictogram. E. Finish and Contrast: 1. The characters and background of signs shall be eggshell, matte or other non-glare finish. 2. Characters and symbols shall contrast with their background - either light characters on a dark background or dark characters on a light background. 3. Colors: See 1.2 SUBMITTALS, C. La., page 10431-1. F. Sign Materials and Product Manufacturers: 1. The signs shall be fabricated from modified acrylic polymers, (MAP) suitable for indoor use. Approved Modified Acrylic Polymer PRODUCT MANUFACTURERS: Rowmark "Ultra Mattes" Rowland, Inc. 15 Massirio Drive Kensington, Connecticut 06037 (800) 243-3339 "2Plex" New Hermes, Inc. 2200 Northmont Pky. Duluth, Georgia 30136 (800) 843-7637 SIGNAGE 10431 - 2 of 4 APA 07.08 "Crystals" Innovative Plastics, Inc. P. O. Box 7065 Algonquin, Illinois 60102 (815) 477-0778 Fire Station #48 G. Sign Fabrication: 1. Signs shall be a minimum of 1/8" thick, not including raised characters, non-glare (matte) finished surface with straight edges free of saw marks or any other imperfections. 2. Signs shall be fabricated by applying a thin layer of ink to the back of the clear base sheet and a clear protective coating over the ink. Ink colors shall be as specified in 1.2 SUBMITTALS, C. La., page 10431-1 3. Raised "Tactile Text" shall be achieved by chemically welding 1/16" thick computer cut, colorfast MAP text characters into the 1/32" computer recessed area of the face of the base sheet. The text shall be chemically welded to the recessed surface of the base sheet using methylene chloride and shall, after fabrication, remain raised 1/32" above the face of the base sheet. 4. Grade II Braille shall be achieved by pressing optically correct acrylic raster balls into .003 in. computer drilled holes in the base sheet surface. The acrylic raster balls shall be U.V. protected and shall be guaranteed against fading. Bordered, depressed Braille is NOT acceptable. 5. Sign edges shall be square and the corners shall have a 1/2" radius. 6. Text style shall be HELVETICA upper case letters. Text height shall be 3/4" and Number height shall be 3/4". 7. Approved Modified Acrylic Polymer sign manufacturers: a. All sign manufacturers shall comply with the specified product and fabrication requirements. 8. Sign Names, Type and Size: a. Type A Room Name and/or Number only 4" x 4" b. Type B Room Name and Number 4" x 6" (One line of text) C. Type B-1 Room Name and Number 4" x 8" ("To Accommodate Text") d. Type C Multiple lines of Text and Room Number 6" x 6" e. Type C-1 Multiple lines of Text and Room Number 6" x 8" ("To Accommodate Text") f. Type D Pictogram Sign and Room Name and Number 9" x 6" PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Panel Wall Signs shall be located where shown on the drawings and as called out in these specifications. B. Panel Wall Signs shall be installed level and plumb with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects of appearance. C. Mounting Heights: 1. Signs mounted flat against the wall: a. Panel Wall Signs shall be mounted 60" above the finish floor to the centerline of the sign b. Conform to ADAAG 4.4 Protruding Objects for all flat wall mounted signage. SIGNAGE 10431 - 3 of 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 3.2 PERMANENT ROOM DESIGNATIONS: A. Signs shall be located as shown on the drawings and as directed by the Architect. 1. Signs shall be mounted on the wall adjacent to the latch side of the door, located where a person can approach within 3" of the door and avoid the door swing and protruding objects. 2. Signs shall be installed as follows: a. Signs shall be attached to the wall with two (2) #8 flat head cadmium plated, (or equivalent) steel threaded, tamper/vandal proof fasteners into expansion shields penetrating not less than 3/4" into the substrate. All holes shall be silicone filled. b. Both the vertical and the horizontal sides of the signs shall be installed into a bed of silicone sealant which shall be screeded even with the outside square edge of the signs. C. Should shim plates be necessary to obtain a true and level secure attachment, they shall be aluminum with pre-drilled and counter sunk holes, silicone filled. d. Signs shall be mounted to glass with standard liquid silicone adhesive. Use double sided vinyl tape where recommended by the manufacturer to hold the sign in place until the silicone adhesive has fully cured. Use a backer plate, of the same material and color of the sign, on the opposite side of the glass to hide the silicone adhesive. END OF SECTION 10431 SIGNAGE 10431 - 4 of 4 APA 07.08 SECTION 10505 - METAL LOCKERS PART 1 - GENERAL Fire Station #48 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The lockers shall be powder-coated steel as manufactured by ASI Storage Solutions Inc., Memphis, Tennessee. B. Furnish all labor and materials for completion of work in this section as shown in the approved drawings and specified herein. PART 2-PRODUCT 2.1 LOCKERS A. Lockers shall be 18" x 18" x 66" high with 4" high 14 gauge zee base. 2.2 MATERIAL A. All major steel parts shall be of mild cold rolled commercial quality steel. 2.3 FINISH A. All material shall be power washed and phosphate treated for maximum finish color adhesion. All components shall be finished with a 2 mm hybrid epoxy/polyester powder, electrostatically applied to ensure uniform thickness and baked to cure. 2.4 CONSTRUCTION A. All lockers shall be built on a unit principle with common intermediate uprights separating units. 2.5 DOORFRAMES A. All lockers shall be 16 gauge formed in a channel shape. Vertical members shall have additional flange to provide a continuous door strike. Cross frame members shall also be 16 gauge channel shaped, including intermediate cross frames on double and triple tier lockers. 2.6 DOORS A. Shall be 14 gauge, channel shaped on both the lock and hinge side, with angle formations across the top and bottom. One, Two, and Three tier locker doors shall have a 16 gauge full height reinforcement channel. 2.7 BODY A. Bottoms shall be 16 gauge. Tops, sides, backs, and shelves shall be 24 gauge. Bolt spacing shall not exceed 9" o.c. 2.8 HINGES A. Shall be full length 16 gauge continuous piano type riveted to both door and frame. 2.9 HANDLES A. Shall be one-piece 20 gauge deep drawn stainless steel cup designed to accommodate locks. 2.10 LATCHING A. Lockers shall have an 11 gauge frame hook secured to the frame. The frame shall have a padlock hasp protruding through the recessed handle. A rubber silencer shall be firmly secured to the frame at each latch hook. METAL LOCKERS 10505 - I of 2 APA 07.08 2.11 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT A. Lockers shall have a shelf, three wall hooks and a coat rod. Fire Station #48 2.12 NUMBER PLATES A. Each locker shall have a polished aluminum number plate riveted to door face with black numerals 1/2" high. 2.13 COLOR A. Doors and exposed body parts shall be selected from ASI's standard designer color range. Non- exposed body parts shall be finished in #03 Almond. 2.14 ASSEMBLY A. All locker components shall be assembled by use of rivets. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Lockers shall be installed in accordance with ASI's installation instructions and shall be level and plumb with flush surfaces and rigid attachment to anchoring surfaces. END OF SECTION 10505 METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 2 of 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 10520 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Fire-protection cabinets. 3. Mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. B. See Division 9 painting Sections for field painting fire-protection cabinets. C. See Division 13 Section "Fire-Suppression Piping" for hose systems, racks, and valves. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. 2. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Include door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, panel style, and details of installation. 3. Show location of knockouts for hose valves. B. Maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements of ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows: 1. Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. D. Copper-Alloy Brass Sheet: ASTM B 36B 36M, alloy UNS No. C26000 (cartridge brass, 70 percent copper). FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 1 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 E. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type 1, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear). F. Acrylic Bubble: One piece. 2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Amerex Corporation. 2. Ansul Incorporated. 3. Badger Fire Protection. 4. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. 5. Fire End & Croker Corporation. 6. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation. 7. JL Industries, Inc. 8. Kidde Fyrnetics. 9. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 10. Modern Metal Products; Div. of Technico. 11. Moon American. 12. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc. 13. Watrous; Div. of American Specialties, Inc. B. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated. 1. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. C. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 2-A:]0-B:C, 5-lb (2.3-kg) nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container. D. Wet-Chemical Type UL-rated 2-A:1-B:C:K, 2.5 gal. (9.5-L) nominal capacity, in stainless-steel container; with pressure-indicating gauge. 2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Fire End & Croker Corporation. 2. General Accessory Mfg. Co. 3. JL Industries, Inc. 4. Kidde Fyrnetics. 5. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 6. Modern Metal Products; Div. of Technico. 7. Moon American. 8. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc. 9. Watrous; Div. of American Specialties, Inc. B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. C. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated. D. Cabinet Material: Aluminum. E. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). 1. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2 21/2 inch backbend depth. F. Door Material: Aluminum sheet. G. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame. H. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear). FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 2 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Finishes: 1. Aluminum: Baked enamel, a. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. 1. Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-inch- (1.1-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) thick, fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick. 2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets will be installed. B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units. C. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. D. Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire-protection cabinets. 2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels. 3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb. F. Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated. G. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. H. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair. END OF SECTION 10520 FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 3 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Public-use shower room accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Schedule: 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. 2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Bas is-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO). B. Toil et Tissue (Roll) Dispenser Type "E": 1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc; 0264-1 A. 2. Double-roll dispenser. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with standard spindle. 5. Capacity: Designed for Two rolls up to 6" diameter tissue rolls. 6. Material and Finish: Satin-finish aluminum bracket with plastic spindle. C. :Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenser Type "F": 1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc.; 0210. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Minimum Capacity: 400 C-fold or 525 multifold towels. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Lockset: Tumbler type. 6. Refill Indicators: Pierced slots at sides or front. D. Waste Receptacle Type "K": 1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc.; 0828 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Minimum Capacity. Seven Gallons 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Liner: Reusable vinyl liner. E. Liquid-Soap Dispenser Type "B": 1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc.; 2001 2. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form. 3. Mounting: Vertically oriented, surface mounted. 4. Capacity: 30 oz. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 1 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 5. Materials: ABS plastic. 6. Lockset: Tumbler type. 7. Refill Indicator: Window type. F. Grab Bar Types "C," "D," and "H": 1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, inc.;-3800 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 18 gauge. a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area. 4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches. 5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings. G. Mirror Unit Type "A": 1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc.: 0600 2. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch thick. a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth. 3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below. a. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove. 4. Size: As indicated on Drawings. H. Robe Hook Type "I": 1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc.: 0785-Z 2. Description: Double-prong unit. 3. Material and Finish: Polished brass-plated zinc alloy (zamac). 4. Use 0785-ZD in dry locations and 0785-ZW in wet locations. 2.2 PUBLIC-USE SHOWER ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO). B. Shower Curtain Rod Type "J": 1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc. 1204 2. Description: 1-1/4-inch OD; fabricated from nominal 0.05-inch-thick stainless steel. 3. Mounting Flanges: Stainless-steel flanges designed for exposed fasteners. 4. Finish: No. 4 (satin). 18 gauge type 304 stainless steel. 5. Length: As indicated on drawings. C. Shower Curtain Type "J": 1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc.; 1200-V 2. Size: Minimum 6 inches wider than opening by 72 inches high. 3. Material: Vinyl, minimum 0.006-inch-thick, opaque, matte. 4. Color: White. 5. Grommets: Corrosion resistant at minimum 6 inches o.c. through top hem. 6. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless-steel, spring wire curtain hooks with snap fasteners, sized to accommodate specified curtain rod. Provide one hook per curtain grommet. American Specialties, Inc.; 1200 SHU D. Folding Shower Seat Type "G": 1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties, Inc.; 8206 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 2 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 2. Configuration: L-shaped seat, designed for wheelchair access. 3. Seat: Phenolic or polymeric composite of slat-type or one-piece construction in color as selected by Architect. 4. Mounting Mechanism: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Dimensions: 22 7/8" x 33" overall; Right or Left as indicated on drawings. 2.3 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. 2. TCI Products. 3. Truebro, inc. B. Underlavatory Guard at Lavatory in Existing Building: 1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies, that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access without removing coverings. 2. Material. and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded-plastic, white. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. END OF SECTION 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 3 of 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 12492 - VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vertical louver blinds, PVC vanes. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for vertical louver blinds. C. Samples: For each exposed finish. D. Product certificates. E. Maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide vertical louver blinds with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701. B. Product Standard: Provide vertical louver blinds complying with WCSC A 100.1. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver vertical louver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-test-response characteristics, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS, PVC VANES A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Hunter Douglas; Permaline #6 Headrail System. 2. Levolor, a Newell Rubbermaid Company; Excaliber 3 1/2" Headrail System. 3. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc.; Grabar 6-71 Supervue Track System. B. Rail System: Headrail. 1. Rails: Extruded aluminum. a. Anodized aluminum, clear. C. Vanes: Lead-free, UV-stabilized, integrally colored, opaque, permanently flexible, extruded PVC that will not crack or yellow; with flat profile and not less than 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) overlap when vanes are rotated fully closed. 1. Nominal Vane Width: 3-1/2 inches. D. Vane Directional Control: Manual. E. Traversing Control: Manual. F. Draw and Stack Position: As indicated on Drawings. G. Cord-Tensioner Mounting: Wall. H. Valance: One. 1. Finish Color Characteristics: Match color, texture, pattern, and gloss of vanes. 1. Louver Bottom: Connecting or spacing chains. J. Mounting: Ceiling mounting. VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS 12492 - 1 of 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 K. Stack Release: Permitting stacked vanes to be moved away from stacking position for total access to glazed opening. L. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 VERTICAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION A. Product Description: Vertical louver blind consisting of equally spaced, synchronized vanes and rail system with self-aligning carrier mechanisms, carriers, traverse and vane directional mechanisms and controls, and installation hardware. B. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials. 1. Louver Directional and Traversing Control Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts. C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows: 1. Blind Units Installed between (inside) Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch (6 mm) per side or 1/2 inch (13 mm) total less than jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. Length equal to 1/4 inch (6 mm), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm), less than head-to-sill dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. D. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of blind, for supporting headrail, valance, and operating hardware, and for hardware position and blind mounting method indicated. E. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to blind hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use. F. Color-Coated Finish: For metal components exposed to view, unless anodized or plated finish is indicated. Apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. G. Component Color: Provide cords and exposed-to-view metal and plastic matching or coordinating with vane color, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install vertical louver blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so exterior vane edges in any position are not closer than 2 inches (51 mm) to interior face of glass. Install intermediate support as required to prevent deflection in headrail. Allow clearances between adjacent blinds and for operating glazed opening's operation hardware, if any. B. Flush Mounted: Install vertical louver blinds with vane edges flush with finish face of opening when vanes are tilted open. C. Head Mounted: Install headrail on face of opening head. D. Adjust vertical louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely and free of binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. E. Clean vertical louver blind surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 12492 VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS 12492 - 2 of 2 APA 10.08 Fire Station # 48 SECTION 13910 - BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler standpipe and fire hose combination sprinkler and standpipe systems. B. Related Sections: 1. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Paints and Coatings: Execution requirements for piping painting specified by this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: I . ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 2. ASME B16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings - Socket-Welding and Threaded. 3. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 4. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 5. ASME B16.25 - Buttwelding Ends. 6. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. 7. ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings. 8. ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 9. ASME B16.9 - Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings. 10. ASME B36.1 OM - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot- Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 2. ASTM A135 - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe. 3. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 4. ASTM A795 - Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use. 5. ASTM F438 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 6. ASTM F439 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 7. ASTM F442/17442M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR). 8. ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. 2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. Basic Fire Suppression Materials and Methods 13910 - 1 of 7 APA 10.08 Fire Station # 48 D. American Water Works Association: 1. AWWA C110 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and Grey-Iron Fittings, 3 in. through 48 in. (75 mm through 1200 mm), for Water and Other Liquids. 2. AWWA C111 - American National Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 3. AWWA C151 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water. E. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 2. NFPA 24 - Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances. 3. Applicable codes and standards adapted August 8, 2005 by State Fire Marshall's Rule 69A3.012F.A.C. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections. C. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Execution Requirements: Project Record documents. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts lists. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13 State Municipality of Highways Public Work's standard. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project. Basic Fire Suppression Materials and Methods 1.3910 - 2 of 7 APA 10.08 Fire Station # 48 B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place. C. Furnish cast iron and steel valves with temporary protective coating. D. Furnish temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for basic fire suppression materials and methods. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVES A. Furnish materials in accordance with State Municipality of Highways Public Work's standards. B. Gate Valves: 1. Up to and including 2 inches: Bronze body and trim, rising stem, hand wheel, solid wedge or disc, threaded ends. 2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem pre-grooved for mounting tamper switch, hand wheel, OS&Y, solid rubber covered bronze or cast iron wedge, flanged grooved ends. 3. Over 4 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem with bolted bonnet, solid bronze wedge, flanged ends, iron body indicator post assembly. C. Globe or Angle Valves: 1. Up to and including 2 inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and hand wheel, inside screw, renewable rubber disc, threaded ends, with back seating capacity packable under pressure. 2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel, OS&Y, plug- type disc, flanged ends, renewable seat and disc. D. Ball Valves: Basic Fire Suppression Materials and Methods 13910 - 3 of 7 APA 10.08 Fire Station # 48 1. Up to and including 2 inches: Bronze Stainless steel two piece body, brass, chrome plated bronze, or stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle and balancing stops, threaded ends with union. 2. Over 2 inches: Manufacturers: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle or gear drive hand wheel for sizes 10 inches and over, flanged. E. Butterfly Valves: 1. Bronze Body: Stainless steel disc, resilient replaceable seat, threaded or grooved ends, extended neck, hand wheel and gear drive and integral indicating device, and built-in tamper proof switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC. 2. Cast or Ductile Iron Body: Cast or ductile iron, chrome or nickel plated ductile iron or aluminum bronze disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer, lug, or grooved ends. With extended neck, hand wheel and gear drive and integral indicating device, and internal external tamper switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC. F. Check Valves: 1. Up to and including 2 inches: Bronze body and swing disc, rubber seat, threaded ends. 2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, and swing check with rubber disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends with automatic ball check. 3. 4 inches and over: Iron body, bronze disc with stainless steel spring, resilient seal, threaded, wafer, or flanged ends. G. Drain Valves: 1. Compression Stop: Bronze with hose thread nipple and cap. 2. Ball Valve: Brass with cap and chain, 3/4 inchinch hose thread. 2.2 BURIED PIPING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B, ASTM A135, ASTM A795, or ASME B36.10, Schedule 40 black galvanized, with ASME C105 polyethylene jacket, -or double layer, half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape. 1. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, butt welded; ASME B16.25, butt weld ends; ASTM A234/A234M, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel; ASME B16.5, steel flanges and fittings; ASME B16.11, forged steel socket welded and threaded; with double layer, half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape. 2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B 16. 1, flanges and flanged fittings. 3. Joints: AWS D1.1, welded. 4. Casing: Closed glass cell insulation. Polyurethane insulation with high density polyethylene jacket and heat shrink sleeves. B. Cast Iron Pipe: AWWA C151. 1. Fittings: AWWA C110, standard thickness. 2. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket. 3. Mechanical Couplings: Shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers. Basic Fire Suppression Materials and Methods 13910 - 4 of 7 APA 10.08 2.3 ABOVE GROUND PIPING Fire Station # 48 A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B; ASTM A135; ASTM A135 UL listed, threadable, light wall; ASTM A795; or ASME B36.10; Schedule 5 10 40 black galvanized. 1. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, butt welded; ASME 1316.25, butt weld ends; ASTM A234/A234M, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel; ASME B16.5, steel flanges and fittings; ASME B16.11, forged steel socket welded and threaded. 2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings; ASME B16.4, threaded fittings. 3. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded fittings ASTM 47. 4. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe. 5. Mechanical Formed Fittings: Carbon-steel housing with integral pipe stop and O- ring pocked and O-ring uniformly compressed into permanent mechanical engagement onto pipe. B. CPVC Pipe: ASTM F442/F442M, SDR 13.5. 1. Fittings: ASTM F438 schedule 40, or ASTM F439 schedule 80, CPVC. 2. Joints: ASTM F493, solvent weld. C. Polybutylene Pipe: ASTM D3309, SDR 11. 1. Fittings: ASTM D3309, Polybutylene. 2. Joints: Fusion welds. D. Cast Iron Pipe: AWWA C15L 1. Fittings: AWWA C110, standard thickness. 2. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket. 3. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C". shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe. 2.4 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Conform to NFPA 13. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inch and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. D. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook. F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. Basic Fire Suppression Materials and Methods 13910 - 5 of 7 APA 10.08 Fire Station # 48 G. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp Angle ring. H. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 1. Copper Pipe Support:Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems and NFPA 24 and City of Clearwater utility standards for service mains. B. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. E. Install pipe sleeve at piping penetrations through footings partitions, walls, and floors. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to maintain fire resistance equivalent to fire separation. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. G. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install in accordance with NFPA 13. 2. Install hangers to with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 3. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 4. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 5. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 6. Where installing several pipes in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 7. Install copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping sheet lead packing between hanger or support and piping. Basic Fire Suppression Materials and Methods 13910 - 6 of 7 APA 10.08 Fire Station # 48 8. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 09900. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. H. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Install eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. I. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. J. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated. K. Where more than one piping system material is specified, install compatible system components and joints. Install flanges, union, and couplings at locations requiring servicing. L. Die cut threaded joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only. M. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings prior to after installation. N. Install gate ball or butterfly valves for shut-off or isolating service. 0. Install drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus. P. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and install through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above flush with top of recessed into and grouted flush with slab. 3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Inserts: 1. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms. 2. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. 3. Install hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. 4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. 3.4 CLEANING A. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Execution Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Clean entire system after other construction is complete. END OF SECTION Basic Fire Suppression Materials and Methods 13910 - 7 of 7 APA 10.08 Fire Station # 48 SECTION 13930 - WET-PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes wet-pipe sprinkler system, system design, installation, and certification. B. Related Sections: L Refer to appropriate section of division 16 for Wiring Connections and Fire Alarm System: Execution requirements for electric connections to equipment specified by this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System to provide coverage for entire building. Building areas noted. Building areas noted in Schedule. B. Provide hydraulically designed system to NFPA 13 light hazard ordinary hazard requirements. C. Determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply from water flow test data. Revise design when test data become available prior to submittals. D. Interface system with building control system. Building fire and smoke alarm system. E. Provide fire department connections as indicated on Drawings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of finished ceiling areas indicating sprinkler locations coordinated with ceiling installation. Indicate detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers, components and accessories. Indicate system controls. C. Product Data: Submit data on sprinklers, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers catalog information. Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections. D. Samples: Submit two of each style of sprinkler specified. E. Design Data: Submit design calculations; signed and sealed by professional engineer Wet-Pipe Fire Suppression Sprinklers 13930 - 1 of 5 APA 10.08 Fire Station 4 48 F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Submittal Procedures for Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit components of system, servicing requirements, record drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location and numbers of service depot. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13 State Municipality of Florida. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer. C. Design system under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at Project location. In State of Florida. 1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Submittal Procedures for Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Submittal Procedures for Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Store products in shipping containers until installation. C. Furnish piping with temporary inlet and outlet caps until installation. Wet-Pipe Fire Suppression Sprinklers 13930 - 2 of 5 APA 10.08 1.10 WARRANTY Fire Station # 48 A. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Submittal Procedures for Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Submittal Procedures for Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. B. Furnish extra sprinklers under provisions ofNFPA 13. C. Furnish suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type. D. Furnish metal storage cabinet in location designated. Llocated adjacent to alarm valve. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SPRINKLERS A. Furnish materials in accordance with NFPA 13 standards. B. Suspended Ceiling Type: 1. Type: Standard Semi-recessed Recessed Concealed pendant type with matching push on clamp on screw on escutcheon plate. 2. Finish: Brass. Chrome plated. Enamel, color as selected. 3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Brass. Chrome plated. Enamel, color as selected. 4. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. C. Exposed Area Type: 1.. Type: Standard upright type with guard. 2. Finish: Brass. Chrome plated. Enamel, color as selected. 3. Fusible Link: Fusible-solder link type Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. D. Side wall Type: 1. Type: Standard Semi-recessed Recessed horizontal side wall type with matching push on clamp on screw on escutcheon plate and guard. 2. Finish: Brass. Chrome plated. Enamel, color as selected. 3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Brass. Chrome plated. Enamel, color as selected. 4. Fusible Link: Fusible-solder link type Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. E. Guards: Finished to match sprinkler finish. Wet-Pipe Fire Suppression Sprinklers 13930 - 3 of 5 APA 10.08 2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES Fire Station # 48 A. Wet Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced clapper to automatically actuate water motor alarm and electric alarm, with pressure retard chamber and variable pressure trim; with test and drain valve. B. Electric Alarm: Electrically operated chrome plated red enameled gong with pressure alarm switch. C. Water Flow Switch: Vane type switch for mounting horizontal or vertical, with two contacts; rated 10 amp at 125 volt AC and 2.5 amp at 24 volt DC. D. Fire Department Connections: 1. Type: Flush mounted wall type with brass chrome plated finish. 2. Outlets: Two-way with fire department thread size. Threaded dust-cap and chain of matching material and finish. 3. Drain: 3/4 inch automatic drip, outside connected to drain. 4. Label: "Sprinkler - Standpipe - Fire Department Connection" 2.3 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Electrical Characteristics: In accordance with refer to appropriate section of division 16 for the following (if pressure maintenance pump is required): 1. Hp. rated load amperes. 2. Volts, single three phase, 60 Hz. 3. Amperes maximum fuse size circuit breaker size over current protection. 4. Minimum circuit ampacity. 5. Percent minimum power factor at rated load. B. Controls: Supervisory switches. C. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount in control panel on equipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NFPA 13 B. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or adjacent Siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle. C. Locate outside alarm-gong on building wall as indicated on Drawings. D. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. E. Install piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. Wet-Pipe Fire Suppression Sprinklers 13930 - 4 of 5 APA 10.08 Fire Station # 48 F. Center sprinklers in two directions in ceiling tile and install piping offsets. one direction only in ceiling tile with location in other direction variable, dependent upon spacing and coordination with ceiling elements. G. Install guards on sprinklers as indicated on Drawings. H. Hydrostatically test entire system. 1. Require test be witnessed by Fire Marshall. Authority having jurisdiction. Owner's insurance underwriter. Architect/Engineer. 3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Verify signal devices are installed and connected to fire alarm system. 3.3 CLEANING A. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Submittal Procedures for Execution Requirements: Final cleaning. 3.4 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to appropriate architectural section for Submittal Procedures for Execution Requirements: Protecting installed construction. B. Apply masking tape or paper cover to protect concealed sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler escutcheons not receiving field paint finish. Remove after painting. Replace painted sprinklers with new. END OF SECTION Wet-Pipe Fire Suppression Sprinklers 13930 - 5 of 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 15000 - COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Scope of Division: Work shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary for a complete and properly functioning mechanical installation in accordance with requirements of the Standard Mechanical Code and to other pertinent codes made a part of such code by reference and local state codes, and contract drawings and specifications. Work shall be understood to include all work specified in Division 15, Mechanical, section numbers 15000 through 15999, inclusive, of the Specifications. 1.2 Drawings: Architectural and structural drawings take precedence over mechanical drawings with reference to the building construction. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement and extent of work. Architectural drawings indicate more exactly the desired relationship between diffusers, registers, lighting fixtures, equipment, electric panels and devices, plumbing fixtures, and other items which remain exposed in the completed buildings. Exact locations and arrangements of materials and equipment shall be determined, with the approval of the Engineer, as work progresses to conform in the best possible manner with the surroundings and with the adjoining work of other trades. Where locations of equipment, devices or fixtures are controlled by architectural features, establish such locations by referring to dimensions on Architectural (A-series) drawings and not by scaling drawings. 1.3 Coordination of Work: Coordinate all work, prior to installation, with work of other trades and with architectural and structural features to preclude interference's between the work of different trades and to insure necessary clearances at crossovers and equipment. Work requiring necessarily fixed locations (e.g., piping with required slopes, lighting fixtures, and diffusers in ceilings, etc.) takes precedence over work not requiring such fixed locations and shall establish permissible routing of services associated with the latter. Should work be performed without adequate coordination so that interference's occur between work of different trades, the Contractor shall eliminate such interference's by requiring necessary rework by the trades involved. Such rework shall meet express approval of the Engineer and shall be performed at no addition to the contract amount. 1.4 Shop Drawings: Refer to "General Conditions". Submit to Engineer for approval, before commencing work, shop drawings for all mechanical materials and equipment to be provided. In addition, submit other drawings or diagrams, dimensioned and in correct scale, requested by Engineer to clarify the work intended or to show its relationship to adjacent work or work of other trades. Contractor is responsible for any delays in job progress accruing directly or indirectly from late submission of shop drawings. Shop drawings shall clearly show the following: A. Technical and descriptive data in detail equal to or greater than the date given in the item specification. Indicate all characteristics, special modifications and features. Where performance and characteristic data is shown on the drawings or specified, submitted data shall be provided in a degree which is both quantitatively and qualitatively equal to that specified and shown so that comparison can be made. Present data in detail equal to or greater than that given in item specifications and include all weights, deflections, speeds, velocities, pressure drops, operating temperatures, operating curves, temperature ranges, sound ratings, dimensions, sizes, manufacturers' names, model numbers, types of material used, operating pressures, full load amperages, starting amperages, fouling factors, capacities, set-points, chemical compositions, certifications and endorsements, operating voltages, thicknesses, gauges and all other related information as applicable to particular item. Common requirements for Mechanical Work 15000- 1 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 B. Exceptions to or deviations from the contract documents. Should Engineer approve any items having such deviations which are not clearly brought to Engineer's attention, in writing, on item submittal, then Contractor is responsible for correction of such deviations regardless of when such deviations are discovered. 1.5 Record drawings: A. Maintain one extra set of black-line, white print drawings for use as Record drawings. Records shall be kept daily, using colored pencil. As the work is completed, relevant information shall be transferred to a reproducible set, and copies made shall be given to the Engineer. B. As-built information shall be shown to scale, using standard symbols listed in the legend. As a minimum, show the following: 1. Location of stub-outs, dimensioned from permanent building lines. 2. Location and depth of under-slab and in-slab piping. 3. All routing of piping system. 4. Correct all equipment schedules. 5. Corrected numbers as they appear on the schedules. 6. Corrected motor horsepower electrical data. 1.6 Fees and Permit: A. All work done under this Contract shall comply with all State and Local Codes having jurisdiction and with the requirements of the Utility Companies whose service may be used. All modifications required by these codes shall be made by this Contractor without additional charge. Where code requirements are less than those shown on the Plans or in the Specifications; the Plans and Specifications shall be followed. Where applicable, N.F.P.A. requirements shall be met. B. The Contractor shall obtain all permits, inspections, and approvals as required by all authorities having jurisdiction. All fees and costs of any nature what-so-ever incidental to these permits, inspections, and approvals must be assumed and paid by this Contractor. C. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 General: A. All materials and equipment shall be new and without blemish or defect. B. Equipment and materials shall be products which will meet with the acceptance of the agency inspecting the work. Where acceptance is contingent upon having the products examined, tested, and certified by Underwriters or other recognized testing laboratory, the product shall be so examined, tested, and certified. C. Substitutions: The following paragraphs shall govern should any conflict exist between these "substitution" paragraphs and any other paragraphs of Division 15. 1. Substituted equipment or optional equipment where permitted and approved, must conform to space requirements. Any substituted equipment that cannot Common requirements for Mechanical Work 15000 - 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 meet space requirements, whether approved or not, shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. Any modifications of related systems as a result of substitutions shall be made at the Contractor's expense. 2. Note that the approval of shop drawings, or other information submitted in accordance with the requirements herein before specified, does not assure that the Engineer, or any other Owner's representative, attests to the dimensional accuracy or dimensional suitability of the material or equipment involved or the ability of the material or equipment involved or the mechanical performance of the equipment. Approval of shop drawings does not invalidate the plans and specifications if in conflict, unless a letter requesting such change is submitted by the Contractor and approved in writing by the Engineer. 3. Substitutions of mechanical equipment for that shown on the schedules or designated by model number in the specifications will not be considered if the item is not a regular catalogued item shown in the current catalog of the manufacturer. 4. If bidder proposes to substitute materials and/or manufacturer's equipment in lieu of those specified, he shall submit written request to the Engineer for approval no later than ten (10) days prior to the receipt of bids. 5. Requests submitted directly to the Owner or to the Engineer's consultants and/or verbal requests will not be evaluated. 6. Should the proposed substitution be accepted, it will be incorporated into the Contract Documents by form of addendum. 7. All substitutions proposed later than ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt of bids shall not be considered. Any substitution not accepted and any substitution request proposed later than ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt of bids shall not be used as either the basis for bidding or submittal after award of the contract. D. Operating conditions and capacities must be as follows: I . No overloading. 2. No operation at conditions outside of maximum and minimum limits recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the engineer. 3. Compatible with all systems. E. Unless otherwise specified, all equipment and materials furnished must be as follows: 1. Recommended by the manufacturer for the application. 2. Installed in accord with the manufacturer's recommendations for the application except where specifications and drawings clearly indicate otherwise. 2.2 Sleeves: A. General: Lay out work and set sleeves in new or existing construction so there shall be minimum of cutting, drilling and patching. All sleeves not used during construction period shall be sealed using grout. Unused penetrations or sleeves through fire rated barriers shall be sealed to prevent passage of smoke or heat using an Underwriters' Laboratories approved method rated at least equal to the barrier being penetrated. Method submitted must show proof of UL label. B. Pipe sleeves: Walls and partitions: a. Sleeves 8 inch Diameter and Smaller (above grade): Sleeves shall be 18 gauge steel pipe or plastic sleeves built into wall, partition or beam, sized Common requirements for Mechanical Work 15000 - 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 to pass pipe and covering, leaving a clear space of 1/4 inch minimum between covering and sleeve. Penetrations of fire rated barriers shall have 18 gauge steel sleeves. b. Floors (above grade): Sleeves shall be Schedule 40 galvanized pipe or plastic, set before floor is poured, sized to pass pipe and covering, leaving a clear space of 1/4 inch between covering and sleeve, and shall extend 1/2 inch above finished floor. C. Duct Sleeves: Sleeves or openings sized to pass mechanical ducts and covering shall be of framed construction in roof, wall, or partitions. d. Sealing of sleeves: 1. Sleeves Above Grade: Openings around pipes, duct, etc., passing through sleeves shall be made draft free and vermin-proof by packing solidly with mineral wool or fiberglass. 2 Sealing Material: Where applicable and recommended by manufacturer, other ceiling materials may be acceptable as options to above specified methods. Submit for Engineer approval prior to procurement. 2.3 Floor, Wall, and Ceiling Plates or Escutcheons, in Exposed Areas: Provide escutcheons or fabricated plates or collars at each location where pipe or exposed duct passes through a finished surface. Escutcheons for flush sleeves shall be chromium plated brass and sleeves extending above floor shall be chrome plated brass. Collars or plates for ducts and large diameter insulated pipe shall be fabricated of 18 gauge galvanized copper bearing sheet steel, secured to structure and neatly fitted around duct or pipe. 2.4 Motors: Unless specifically specified otherwise in the section covering the driven equipment (or the equipment drives), motors shall comply with the following: A. Three Phase: NEMA design B, three-phase, squirrel cage induction type designed for 1800 rpm synchronous speed for operation in 40 degree C ambient at 1.15 service factor at constant speed on the scheduled voltage. Motors shall be insulated with Class B insulation material and shall be cast iron, drip proof, horizontal foot mounted type with ball bearings. Two speed motors shall be provided as scheduled and shall be two winding type. B. Single Phase: Squirrel cage induction type designed for 1800 rpm synchronous speed for operation in 40 degree C ambient at 1.15 service factor at constant speed on the scheduled voltage. Motors shall be insulated with Class B insulation materials and shall be two winding capacitor start type with steel enclosure, drip proof, horizontal foot mount and ball bearings. C. Scheduled Horsepowers: The horsepowers scheduled or specified are those nominal sizes estimated to be required by the equipment when operating at specified duties and efficiencies. In the case of pumps, these horsepowers are non-overloading and may also include provisions for future planned impeller changes. If the actual horsepower for the equipment furnished differs from that specified or shown on the drawings, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to insure that proper size feeders, breakers, starters, etc. are provided at no change in contract price. 2.5 Substitutions Involving Electrical Changes: If the Contractor proposes items which have different electrical and/or control characteristics (such as larger amperage requirements, etc.) than those specified and provided for and/or which otherwise change the electrical and/or control system(s), then (even if the Engineer approves such items) the Contractor must correlate all sizes, voltages, amperages and wiring for applicable items so that applicable electrical and/or control Common requirements for Mechanical Work 15000 - 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 changes can be made. Contractor is responsible for all related additional costs. Other coordination is as specified elsewhere. 2.6 Belt Drives: Equip each motor driven machine not directly connected with V-belt drive. Belts shall be of correct cross section to fit properly in sheave grooves and shall be carefully matched for each drive. Sheaves shall be cast iron or steel, bored to fit properly on shafts and secured with keys of proper size. The rating of each drive shall be as recommended by manufacturer for service but shall be at least L5 times nameplate rating of motor. A. Fan Belt Drives: Fixed pitch sheaves shall be provided. B. Speed Adjustments: Adjust fan speed by change(s) in sheave size as necessary to obtain proper design air flow with fan in its installed location. Fans may be first fitted with variable pitch drive until proper fixed pitch drive size, or alternate sizes of fixed pitch drives may be used until proper fan speed is obtained. Provide all drives necessary to obtain proper fan speed needed to deliver necessary air quantity. 2.7 Vibration of Air Handling Equipment and Fan Units: For air handling equipment and fans driven by motors 5-hp or greater, field vibration levels will not be acceptable if the maximum vibration velocity or displacement measurement exceeds the following values (when measurements are taken at the bearing supports using a vibration analyzer with the filter set at the operating fan speed). Fan Speed Maximum RPM Vibration Level 800 or less 5 mils (0.127 mm) max displacement 801 and greater 0.20 in/sec (5 mm/s) max velocity 2.8 Bearings: All bearings shall be rated for 200,000 hour operating life unless indicated. 2.9 Belt and Coupling Guards: Each belt drive shall be equipped with an OSHA approved guard. Guards shall be constructed of #12 U.S. Standard gauges 3/4 inch diamond mesh wire screen, or equivalent, welded to one inch steel angle frames, and shall enclose all belts and sheaves. Tops and bottoms of guards shall -be of substantial sheet metal or not less than #18 U.S. Standard gauge. Braces or supports must not "bridge" sound and vibration isolators. Guards shall be designed with adequate provision for movement of motor required to permit oiling, use of speed counters, and other maintenance and testing operations with guard in place. All direct drive equipment shall have coupling guards in accordance with Florida Department of Business Regulation safety regulations and OSHA. 2.10 Painting and Marking: A. Painting: Painting of equipment, pipe, and ducts (insulated or uninsulated is specified under the "Painting" Division of these specifications. Touch-up of shop coat shall be performed under Division furnishing equipment. B. Marking: Refer to Section entitled "Identification of Mechanical Systems". 2.11 Access Doors: Provide as necessary for access to concealed valves, cleanouts, unions, dampers, coils, junction boxes, etc., where no other means of access is shown or specified. Doors shall be manufactured by the Milcor Division of Inland-Ryerson, or an acceptable equal, type as follows: Common requirements for Mechanical Work 15000 - 5 APA 07.08 Door Location Drywall Masonry or Tile Acoustical Tile Plaster Fire-rated Walls Door Type Style "DW" Style "M-Stainless" Style "AT" Style "K" Style "Fire-rated" Fire Station #48 Each door shall be equipped with two flush, screwdriver operated, cam latches and, other than Style "M", shall be finished to match adjacent surface. Door sizes shall be applicable to the access required for normal service. See sections entitled "Ductwork" for access doors related to duct systems. 2.12 Excavation & Backfill: A. Each subcontractor shall do trench and pit excavating and backfilling inside and outside the building, as required by his work, including shoring and bracing, pumping and protection for safety of persons and property. B. Backfill shall be compacted in layers not exceeding six (6) inches in depth. Completed Backfill shall conform to surrounding ground and finish grade and with compaction requirements of Division Two of these Specifications: 1. Concrete encasement: Piping passing under footings, foundations and other locations as shown on Drawings shall be encases by eight (8) inches (minimum) concrete on all sides. Concrete shall conform to Division Three requirements. 2. Extend concrete encasement eight (8) inches around piping and twelve (12) each side of footings or foundations. C. Remove non-usable excavated material from the site. Deposit any usable surplus material on site where directed by the Project Architect/Engineer. Do not remove usable material from site. D. Provide and maintain bracing, shoring or sheathing as required to safely support sides of excavations. The Contractor doing the excavation and the Contractor using the excavation are responsible for safety in excavations. E. This Contractor shall provide and operate pumping equipment to keep excavations free of water. F. This Contractor is responsible for repairing and restoring paving streets, curbs, walks and other work in the area where excavations are made. G. Provide additional excavation and backfill where required to resolve conflicts in buried lines. H. Coordinate timing of excavations in advance with other trades. Excavation shall be open cut from the surface. Hold trench width to a minimum. K. Do not excavate utility trenches parallel to building footings closer than four (4) feet from the footings except by approval of the Project Architect/Engineer. When parallel Common requirements for Mechanical Work 1.5000 - 6 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 trenches require cuts deeper than the building footings, the horizontal distance from the footing shall be equal to, or greater than one and one-half (1-1/2) times the vertical distance below the footing, but in no case shall the horizontal distance be less than four (4) feet except by the approval of the Project Architect/Engineer. L. Mechanical excavation shall be held to four (4) inches above final grade o f the bottom of trench. The remainder shall be shaped by manual excavation, so that piping is fully supported on undisturbed soil. Shoring of piping in trench will not be allowed. Piping must be suspended from above. M. Bell joint holes shall be carefully excavated so that none of the load is supported by the bells or joints. N. Whenever, in the opinion of the Project Arch itect/Engineer, the soil is unsuitable for supporting piping and appurtenances, provisions for proper foundations shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. Soil test reports are bound in the Specifications Book. 0. The drawings for this project shown the anticipated underground utilities. Locations of utilities which will interfere with proposed construction shall be assumed to be a known factor to each subcontractor unless such locations on drawings are in error. P. Wherever trenching or excavating, assume utilities may exist in area without such being shown on the drawings. Exercise extreme caution. Should existing facilities be damaged, repair such to Project Architect/Engineer's satisfaction at no additional cost to the Owner. Q. Special care shall be take with excavation in limited distance from existing trees. Manual excavation shall be required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Electrical and Control Work Coordination: A. Definitions: Definitions for the purpose of mechanical/electrical control and power coordination are as follows. (Note: The use of the words, "Provide", "Furnish" and "Install" are intended only for use in describing the coordination indicated by this paragraph 3.01, and do no necessarily have the same definitions when used outside of the context of this paragraph 3.01). Any items which do not fall within the scope of this paragraph 3.01 shall be coordinated as individually specified. 1. "Furnish" means to procure an item and to deliver it to the project for installation. 2. "Install" means to determine (in coordination with others as necessary) the appropriate intended location of an item to set and connect it in place. 3. "Provide" means to both furnish and install. 4. Power Circuit: Circuit which carries main electric power to apparatus to which the power circuit is connected. 5. Control Circuit: Circuit which carries electrical signals directing the performance of a controller but which does not carry the main electric power. (See NEC, Section 430-71). Such circuits shall also include those which serve a dual control and power function (e.g., a line voltage thermostat circuit which both activates and powers a small fan motor). 6. Controller: A device, or group of devices, which serves to govern, in some predetermined manner, electric power delivered to apparatus to which the controller is connected and includes any switch or device normally used to start Common requirements for Mechanical Work 15000 - 7 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 and stop a motor. (See NEC, Article 100, Definitions, "Controller", and Section 430-81(a).) 7. Control Device: A device which reacts to an operating condition (pressure, temperature, flow, humidity, etc.) and which initiates transmission of an electrical control signal which causes operation of a controller or which causes operation of pressure switches, etc. B. Auxiliary Control Device: A device (such as a low voltage control transformer, electric relay, etc.) which is located in a control circuit and which carries or responds to (but does not initiate) an electrical control signal initiated by a control device. C. Work of Division 15: includes (but is not necessarily limited to): Provide: a. All controllers which are generally manufactured or shipped as integral with Division 15 equipment (for example, such as starters packaged with packaged equipment, etc.). b. All electric motors and other electrical power consuming equipment (such as electric air heating coils, electric hot water heaters, etc.) which are specified in Division 15. C. All controls specified in Division 15 "HVAC Controls". d. All control circuits (including conduit and boxes) from any Division 16 panels to power utilizing equipment provided by Division 15 and including the necessary circuit breakers. e. All control connections to equipment provided by Division 15. f. All control circuits, including conduit and boxes. g. All control connections to controllers, switches, motors and other mechanical systems electrical power consuming equipment (such as electric air heating coils, electric hot water heaters, etc.). h. Auxiliary control devices. i. All control devices (thermostats, pressure switches, flow switches, humidistats, etc.) and make control circuit connections thereto. j. Any and all electronic and electric control devices and electric or pneumatic connections thereto. k. Provide all starters for all mechanical equipment. 1. Provide all disconnects for all mechanical equipment. 2. Furnish: All controllers. Controllers shall comply with the requirements of applicable sections of Division 16.. D. Work of Division 16 includes (but is not necessarily limited to): Provide: a. All power circuits, including conduit and boxes. b. All power connections to controllers, switches, motors and other mechanical systems, electrical power consuming equipment (such as electric air heating coils, electric hot water heaters, etc.). C. All remote motor disconnects (remote from the related controller) at all locations required by NEC and connections thereto except those disconnects which are specified in Division 15 to be provided as part of the equipment itself. Common requirements for Mechanical Work 15000 - 8 APA 07.08 Install: All controllers furnished by Division 15. E. Other Requirements: Fire Station #48 1. Interface Coordination: Contractor which supplies the power consuming equipment shall coordinate with actual contract document control and sequencing requirements regarding interface of the equipment with the control system specified in Division 15 and shall provide equipment wiring diagrams for final coordination for actual installation. 2. All fire protection alarm devices shall be provided and installed by fire protection contractor or as per section 13910 and 13930, wired by electrical or fire alarm contractor. 3.2 Tests: A. General: All systems shall be inspected, tested, given a trial run, and demonstrated to Engineer's and Owner's satisfaction that they are complete and ready for operation. B. Plumbing Soil, Waste and Vent Piping: Test in accord with Florida building code - Plumbing, (2004 & 2005 revisions) and as otherwise specified. C. All Other Piping: Unless required otherwise by code or other divisions of specifications, piping shall be tested at one hundred fifty percent (150%) of normal operating pressure for a continuous 24-hour period without leaking. D. Systems - Air Conditioning: Refer to section describing test and balance of system. E. Observation of Tests: Contractor shall notify Engineer in writing at least two weeks prior to scheduled test(s) and demonstration(s) to allow Engineer time to schedule his observation of Contractor's test(s) and demonstration(s). 3.3 Instruction: Refer to "Instruction and Maintenance Manuals" Section. 3.4 Acceptance: A. Prior to requesting final inspection: Complete all work required by drawings and specifications. Acceptance will be made by Engineer on the basis of tests and inspection of project. Contractor shall furnish necessary mechanics to operate system, furnish test instruments and equipment as required, make necessary adjustments and assist with final inspection. 3.5 Protection of Work Until Final Acceptance: Contractor shall protect all materials and equipment from damage, the entrance of dirt and construction debris from the time of installation until final acceptance. Any materials and equipment that has been damaged shall be repaired to "as new" condition or replaced at the direction of the Engineer. Where factory finishes occur and damage is minor, finishes may be touched-up. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the damage is excessive, factory finish shall be replaced to "new" condition. (End of Section 15000) Common requirements for Mechanical Work 15000 - 9 APA 07.08 Fire Station 948 SECTION 15005 - INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART 1 GENERAL: 1.1 Provide complete written and verbal operating and maintenance instruction to the Owner for all mechanical systems. PART 2 DOCUMENTATION: 2.1 Provide Two (2) Instructions and Maintenance manuals, each complete as follows: A. Hardback three ring loose-leaf binders. B. Title sheet with job name, Contractor's subcontractor's control subcontractor and related contractor's or material suppliers names, addresses and phone numbers. C. Index of contents. D. A signed copy of acknowledgment of instructions to the Owner or his authorized representative. Two additional copies of the signed acknowledgment shall be sent directly to the Engineer as soon as possible after receipt. E. Typewritten operating instructions for the Owner's personnel describing the following for each piece of equipment and systems: 1. How to start and stop each piece of equipment. 2. How to set equipment and systems for normal operation. 3. Normal restarting procedures before contacting the service contractor. 4. Complete description of functions and operations of each piece of equipment including description of how equipment operates in conjunction with automatic control systems. 5. Instructions for cleaning, oiling, greasing, fueling and similar tasks. F. Approved shop drawings and submittal data and parts and maintenance booklet for each item of material and equipment furnished under this Division, (but not limited to) the following: 1. Spare parts list and source of supply for each equipment item. 2. List of valves with location, service, size, model and operating position. 3. Diagrams clearly indicating automatic control hook-up. G. Any as-built wiring diagrams as called for in other sections of this Division as needed to show how equipment controls interface with related systems. H. Contractor's Site Test and Balance report. 1. Copies of certificates of inspection. J. Guarantees. PART 3 EXECUTION: 3.1 Verbal Instruction: Provide verbal, hands-on, operating and maintenance instruction to Owner's authorized personnel for each equipment item and system. Instructions shall be given by competent personnel. (End of Section 15005) Instructions and Maintenance Manuals 15005 - 1 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 15007 - IDENTIFICATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Provide complete identification of the mechanical systems including piping, valves and equipment as noted herein, shall conform to ANSI and OSHA Standards and owners accepted standards for pipe identification. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: W. H. Brady Co., 2223 West Camden Road, Milwaukee, Wisconsin, 53201; Seton Name Plate Corporation, 592 Boulevard, New Haven, Connecticut, 06505. 2.2 Markers, Tags and Labels: A. Markers: Must have color coded background, proper color of legend in relation to background color, approved legend letter size, approved length and flow arrow indicator. Any piping (excluding plumbing piping) which is 3/4" through 5" O.D.: Seton "Setmark" Type marker. B. Valve Tags: Each tag shall designate appropriate service and valve number-1 1/2" Brass, tags and a valve chart be posted for location of valves. C. Labels: Provide either of the following es for all HVAC a ui ment: 1. Plastic Type: Outdoor grade acrylic plastic to withstand weather, abrasion, grease, acid, chemical and other corrosive conditions; 1/16" minimum thickness. Sized 3/4 X 2-1/2, 1 X 2-1/2, 1 X 3, or 1-1/2 X 4 as necessary to identify item. Seton "Setonite" or equal. 2. Aluminum Type: Engraved, flexible, 0.020" thick aluminum. Sized 3/4 X 2-1/2, 1 X 3, 1-1/2 X 4 or 3/6 as necessary to identify item. Seton No. 06505 or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 General: A. Locate marking and banding where practical such that groups of pipe are identified at similar location for ease of visual tracking. For example, mark and band parallel runs of pipe which are side-by-side at the same general place. B. Small Pipes: less than 3/4 diameter may be identified with tags as specified for valves. C. Adhere or affix all identification items permanently except where removal may be necessary for maintenance or service. 3.2 Markers: Provide on piping exposed in equipment rooms. 3.3 Valve Tags: Valve tags shall be installed on the following items: A. Small piping (other than domestic water) where markers are impractical B. Small but critical equipment items on which it is impractical to install labels Identification of Mechanical Systems 15007-1 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 3.4 Labels: Provide labels of proper size on mechanical system equipment such as, but not limited to, air handling equipment, fans, control panels, electric duct heaters, terminal units and similar items. 3.5 Valve Tag Lists: Provide a glass framed valve tag list, wall mounted, in each Air Handler Room, Pump Room, or Chiller Plant for each piece of equipment within that area. (End of Section 15007) Identification of Mechanical Systems 15007-2 APA 07.08 SECTION 15010 - PLUMBING PIPING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Section Includes: A. Pipe and pipe fittings. B. Valves. C. Sanitary drainage piping system. D. Domestic water piping system. 1.2 Related Work: as outline in the following sections of the specifications: 1.3 References Fire Station #48 A. ASI/ASME B 16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 NS300. B. ANSI/ASME B15.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV. C. ANSI/ASME B 16.23 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage fittings - DWV. D. ANSI/ASME Sec. 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. E. ANSI/ASME B32 - Solder Metal. F. ANSI/ASTM C443 - Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets G. ANSI/ASTM C700 - Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated. H. ANSI/ASTM CD2466 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. I. ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. J. ANSI/AWWA C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for Water and other liquids. K. ANSI/AWWA C110 - Ductile - Iron and Gray - Iron Fittings 3 in. through 48 in., for Water and other liquids. L ANSI/AWWA C11I - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron pressure Pipe and Fittings. M ANSI/AWWA C515 - Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or sand lined molds, for water or other liquids. N. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Plumbing Piping 15010-1 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 0. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. P. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. Q. ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized), Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses. R. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures. S. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. T. ASTM B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV). U. ASTM C14 - Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain and Culvert Pipe. V. ASTM C425 - Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings. W. ASTM C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. X. ASTM D2235 - Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile - Butadiene - Styrene (ASS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. Y. ASTM D2241 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR). 1. ASTM D2680 - Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Composite-Sewer Piping. 2. ASTM D2683 - Socket-Type Polyethylene Fillings for Outside Diameter - Controlled Polyethylene Pipe. 3. ASTM D2729 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 4. ASTM D2751 - Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 5. ASTM D2751 - Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. 6. ASTM D3033 - Type PSP Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 7. ASTM D3034 - Type PSP Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 8. ASTM F477 - Elastometric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe. 9. AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal. 10. AWWA C601 - Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Waste Water. 11. CISPI 301 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems. 1.4 Quality Assurance: A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. Ball valves shall be used for domestic cold and hot water systems. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code (and applicable state labor regulations). Plumbing Piping 1.5010 - 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 C. Welders Certification: In accordance with (ANSI/ASME Sec. 9) (ANSI/AWS D1.1.) 1.5 Submittals: A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15000. B. Include manufacturers product data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories. 1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 15000 and (01600), (01610). B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 15000 and (01600) (01620). C. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Sanitary,Sewer, Piping buried beyond 5 feet (15MM)of building: By site contractor. See civil engineering specifications. 2.2 Sanitary Sewer piping, buried within 5 feet (1500 MM) of building: PVC schedule 40 pipe and fittings. 2.3 Sanitary sewer piping, above grade: A. Cast Iron Pipe: hubless, service weight. Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. In rated walls and return air plenums only. B. Copper Pipe: ASTM B306, DWV. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.3, cast bronze, or ANSI/ASME B16.29, wrought copper. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade 50B for short fixture connections. C. ABS Pipe: ASTM D2680 or D2751. Fittings: ABS. Joints: ASTM D2235, solvent weld. D. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2729. Fittings: PVC. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld. 2.4 Water piping, buried beyond 5 FEET (1500 MM) of building: See civil engineering specifications. 2.5 Water piping, buried within 5 feet (1500 MM) of building: Copper type "K" pipe and fittings. 2.6 Storm water piping above grade: A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. In rated walls and return air plenums only. Plumbing Piping 15010 - 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 B. ABS Pipe: ASTM 52680 or D2751. Fittings: ABS. Joints: ASTM D2235, solvent weld. C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2729. Fittings: PVC. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld. 2.7 Flanges, Unions, and Couplings: A. Pipe size 2 inches (50 mm.) and under: 150 psig (1 034 Kpa) malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints. B. Pipe size over 2 inches (50 min): 150 psig (1 034 kPa) forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges for copper piping; neoprene gaskets for gas service; 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick performed neoprene bonded to asbestos. C. Grooved and shouldered pipe end couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion; "C" shape composition sealing gasket; steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized couplings for galvanized pipe. D. Dielectric Connections: union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2.8 Acceptable manufacturers - Ball valves: A. Screwed, Crane, 2" and smaller B. Solder, Crane, 2" and smaller C. Watts or approved equals D. Underground ball valves E. Substitutions: under provisions appropriate sections of this specification. 2.9 Acceptable manufacturers - Ball Valves A. Screwed, Airco, Model 207-63XX-300, 2" and smaller. B. Solder, Airco, Model 207-63XX-600, 2" and smaller. C. Substitutions: Under provisions appropriate sections of this specification. 2.10 Ball Valves A. Up to 2 inches (50 mm): (bronze) (stainless steel) body, stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle (and balancing stops) (solder) (threaded) ends (with unions). B. Over 2 inches bronze body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle (or great drive handwheel) for sizes 4" inches, flanged. All ball valves shall be approved for medical gas usage. Plumbing Piping 15010 - 4 APA 07.08 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Preparation Fire Station #48 A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. (bevel plain end ferrous pipe). B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.2 Installation A. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. F. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. (Coordinate size and location of access doors with appropriate section of these specifications). H. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points. 1. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than approved by local authority having jurisdiction. J. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc primer to welding. K. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not prefinished, ready for finished painting. Refer to Section 09912. L. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to (1/4) (1/8) inch per foot minimum. Maintain gradients. M. Excavate in accordance with site work specifications. N. Backfill in accordance with site work specification. 0. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. P. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Q. Provide one plug cock wrench for every ten plug cocks size (2) (6") inches and smaller, minimum of one. Provide each plug cock sized (2-1/2-inches) and larger with a wrench with set screw. Plumbing Piping 15010 - 5 APA 07.08 3.3 Application Fire Station 448 A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations. B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment of apparatus connections C. Install brass make adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe. D. Install (ball) valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. E. Install (ball) valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. F. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of pumps. 3.4 Disinfections of Domestic Water Piping System A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. B. Ensure PH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual. D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water of 1.0 mg/L. H. Take samples no sooner that 24 hours after flushing, from (10) (5) (2) percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C601. 3.5 Service Connections: See site work specifications. (End of Section .15010) Plumbing Piping 15010 - 6 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 15020 - PIPING AND FITTINGS: SOIL, WASTE, VENT AND DRAIN PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Scope: Provide storm, soil, waste, vent and drain piping systems complete as indicated on drawings. Drawing scales prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, sleeves, and similar items; however, these deviations shall be provided as work of this section at no additional cost to Owner (no change in Contract price). 1.2 Shop Drawings: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Pipe: PVC schedule 40 fittings as specified in F.B.C - Plumbing (2004) 2.2 Fittings: PVC schedule 40 fittings as specified in F13c - Plumbing (2004) 2.3 Joint Coupling: As per section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 General: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work", paragraph entitled "Drawings". 3.2 Joints and Connections: A. General: Joints and connections shall be made permanently air, gas, and water tight. B. Connections: Florida building code - plumbing (2004). 3.3 Flashings: A. Floor Drains, Roof Drains, Showers, Etc.: Provide proper flashings for plumbing specialties installed in floors and roofs. Flashings shall be as per detail shown on architectural drawings. B. Roof Penetrations: Provide flashing for all pipes passing through the roof. Minimum height of vents shall be one foot (F) above finished roof. Refer to architectural drawings for detail. 3.4 Cleanouts: Provide as indicated and as required by F.B.C- plumbing (2004). Provide access covers as specified for concealed locations. (End of Section 15020) Piping and Fittings: Soil, Waste, Vent and Drain 15020 - 1 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 SECTION 15031- PIPING: CONDENSATE DRAINS - PVC PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Work Included: Condensate drains from cooling coil drain pans to drains. 1.2 Related Work: Section 15000: Common Requirements for Mechanical Work. 1.3 Submittals: Submit documents in accordance with Architectural Specifications and Section 15000. PART 2 MATERIAL 2.1 Pipe: PVC Schedule 40; ASTM-D2665-87. 2.2 Fittings: Solvent - weld socket type PVC, standard weight; ASTM 2466-78. 2.3 Solvent_ As recommended by the pipe manufacturer. PART 3 INSTALLATION 3.1 Slope uniformly toward drain. 3.2 Provide trap seal having a depth in inches equal to the total static pressure of the corresponding fan system. Provided threaded plug elbows and tees to permit cleaning. The piping shall be the full size of the equipment drain connection or three quarter inches (3/4") whichever is larger. Provide cleanout and a union to disconnect drain from unit. 3.3 Connections to copper drain nipples may be .mechanical. Make connections to steel nipples with threaded adapters. 3.4 Routing: As noted on drawings. (End of Section 15031) Piping: Condensate Drains: PVC 15031-1 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 15110 - PIPE, VALVES AND FITTINGS: POTABLE WATER PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Scope: Provide potable water systems complete as indicated on the drawings. Drawing scales prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, sleeves, and similar items; however, these deviations shall be provided as work of this Section, at no additional cost to the Owner. (No change in Contract price). 1.2 Shop Drawings: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". PART 2 PRODUCTS: Refer also to Section 15210. Domestic Water System. 2.1 Pipe: Type L hard drawn copper conforming to ASTM 13-88 in the building. 2.2 Fittings: Wrought copper, solder joint, pressure type conforming to ANSI B16.22. 2.3 domestic water piping. 2.4 Dielectric Isolators: (if applicable) A. Unions: For pipe sizes two inches (2") and smaller; EPCO or Rockford-Eclipse insulated unions with joint connection to suit pipe and equipment. B. Flanges: For pipe sizes two and one-half inches (2-1/2") and over; Plico Products Flange insulation sets with: Phenolic retainer, nitrite rubber seal element, polyethylene sleeves and double washer sets. Spring lock type with set screw. 2.5 Relief Valves: ASME rated, size and setting as indicated on drawings. 2.6 Valves: A. All valves shall have the name or trademark of the manufacturer and the guaranteed working pressure cast or stamp on the body. Adapters shall be provided for all valves on copper lines. B. All stop valves used on this work, unless otherwise specified or required, shall be of the ball pattern, suitable for 125 pound working pressure. C. All gate valves shall be packed and left perfectly tight at the completion of work. D. Ball valves 2" and smaller shall be all bronze of compact pattern with solder joint connections rated at 400 pounds WOG. Stem extensions shall be furnished for use in insulated lines where insulation exceeds 1/2". Ball valves in sizes 2" and small shall be NIBCO S-580-71), Milwaukee BA100/150, Apollo 70-100/200. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Joints and Connections: Pipe, Valves and Fittings: Potable Water 15110- 1 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 A. General: Joints and connections shall be made permanently air, gas, and water tight. B. Equipment Connections: Final connections to services and connections to equipment shall be made with unions for pipe sizes two inches (2") and under and with companion flanges for pipe two and one-half inches (2-1/2") and larger. Where incompatible piping material comes in contact, except for the use of valves, isolate the two materials using dielectric isolators as specified herein before. C. Piping drops to points of use shall each be valved for individual shut offs. 3.2 Valves: All valves, stops, pressure regulator and similar items shall be installed in an easily accessible location. Provide access panels (Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work") for all concealed valves. 3.3 Test: Upon completion of the water supply system it shall be tested a proved tight under water pressure not less then 25 PSI above the working pressure under which it is to be operated. Tests shall be observed by a representative of the Architect before it is removed. 3.4 Sterilization: All potable water piping shall be disinfected with a mixture containing not less than 0.6 pounds of high-test (70% available chlorine) calcium hypochlorite, or 2 pounds of chlorinated lime to each 1000 gallons of water to provide not less than 50 PPM of available chlorine. The mixture shall be injected into the system and retained for not less than 12 hours. The system shall then be drained, flushed with potable water and placed in service. (End of Section 15110) Pipe, Valves and Fittings: Potable Water 15110-2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 15190 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: PIPING SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Scope: Provide all angles, brackets, clamps, anchors, inserts, rods, braces, frames, hangers, nuts and bolts, and other miscellaneous steel and hardware items as may be required for the proper support of equipment and all piping systems. 1.2 Relation to Other Work: Contractor shall coordinate: shop drawings; placement; structural framing and overall building construction; and the work of all trades to insure an orderly and timely progress of the work. Refer to other Sections for special requirements relating to specific equipment and systems. 1.3 Manufacturer: Hangers and supports shall be as manufactured by Grinnell, Division ITT, F&S Manufacturing Corp.; Fee and Mason Manufacturing Co., or an approved equal. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Use the following (or approved equals thereof) if and as applicable to this project: A. Hangers: Hangers in contact with copper piping: Shall be copper plated or Teflon coated. Grinnell Fig. 97 or 97C. Hangers (other than in contact with copper pipin : Shall have manufacturer's standard finish. Pipe 3" and larger: Grinnell Fig. 260. Pipe 2-1/2" and smaller: Grinnell Fig. 104. B. Pipe Riser Clamps: Grinnell Fig. 261. C. Insulation Shields: Grinnell Fig. 292 with links. D. Beam Clamps: Grinnell Fig. 292 with links. E. Rod: Sized with safety factor of five (5). Grinnell Fig. 140 or 146. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 General: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work." All inserts, fasteners, hangers and supports shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 Pipe: Hangers shall be spaced to prevent sag and to permit proper drainage. All piping shall be run parallel with the lines of building, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. The hanger spacing and placement shall be such that after the covering (insulation and finish) is applied there will be not less than 1/2" clear space between finished covering and other surfaces, including the finished covering of parallel adjacent pipes. Hangers for insulated pipes shall be sized to encompass the insulating, finish and metal insulation shield (a metal insulation shield shall be provided for each hanger and support). Vertical piping shall be supported with pipe riser clamps at every floor penetration, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings. (End of Section 15190) Hangers and Supports: Piping System 15190-1 APA 07.08 SECTION 15200 - PLUMBING PART1 GENERAL Fire Station #48 1.1 Refer to Section 15000 entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". 1.2 Description of Work: A. The extent of plumbing is indicated on the drawings and specifications. B. In general, the work consists of, but is not limited to the following: 1. Hot and cold water supply piping, and all necessary valves, fittings, etc. 2. A system of soil, storm, waste and vent piping. 3. Plumbing fixtures and trim. 4. Furnishing lead flashings for penetrations through the roof or as specified on drawings. 5. Connections of equipment furnished by others. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Refer to individual technical sections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 The plumbing materials, fixtures and installation shall comply with all requirements of the latest edition of the Standard Plumbing Code and all applicable state and local codes. (End of Section 15200) Plumbing 15200- 1 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 15201 - PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM, AND SPECIALTIES PARTI GENERAL 1.1 Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". 1.2 Energy Conservation Requirements: A. Showers: Shower heads used shall be equipped with flow control devices to limit total flow to a maximum of two and a half (2.5) gallons per minute. B. Lavatories: Lavatories which are provided in public areas shall have the following feature: Outlet devices which limit the flow of water to a maximum of 0.5 GPM. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim: A. Provide all brackets, plates, anchors and fastening devices necessary for rigidly mounting fixtures in place. Unless noted otherwise, each wall hung plumbing fixture shall be supported on appropriate type of chair carriers. B. Use chrome-plated brass piping where exposed to view between fixture and finished wall face and jacketed where fixture is designated for handicapped use. Provide tight fitting escutcheons of chrome plated brass wherever piping passes through walls. Supply piping to all fixtures shall be anchored to prevent movement. C. See Drawings for fixture schedule. 2.2 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim: A. General: 1. Acid resisting enamel for enameled cast iron and steel fixtures. 2. Cast brass P-trap with cleanout for each lavatory and sink unless otherwise indicated. 3. Renewable seats and disks for supply valves. 4. Stops for fixture hot and cold water supplies. 2.3 Plumbing Specialties: A. Cleanouts: 1. Exterior type: Heavy-duty cast iron body with round, scoriated, non-tilt top. (EXISTING TO REMAIN) 2. Interior floor type: Cast iron with square, heavy duty, scoriated nickel bronze top. 3. Interior wall type: Cast iron cleanout tee with countersunk plug and square, smooth nickel bronze access cover and frame. 4. Plugs: Heavy cast iron ferrule with screw plug. 5. Zurn, Josam, J. R. Smith, Wade, or Mifab approved equal. Refer to schedule on drawings. Plumbing Fixture, Trim, and Specialties 15201-1 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 B. Traps: 1. Deep seal type on all floor drains, with trap primer connections. 2. Exposed and/or in cabinets: Chrome plated cast brass with cleanouts. C. Water Hammer Arresters: 1. Shall conform to ASSE 1010 specifications. . 3. Zurn, Josam, J. R. Smith, Wade, or Mifab are approved equals. Install water hammer arrestors as per manufacturer's recommendations. D. Floor Drains: 1. Adjustable height, cast iron body, double drainage flanges, flashing clamp, nickel bronze strainer, no integral trap, inside caulk bottom outlet with adapter for ring. 2. 6" strainer. 3. Polished brass strainer in equipment rooms. 4. Automatic trap primer connection except on shower drains. 5. Zurn, Josam, J. R. Smith, Wade or Mifab are approved equals. Refer to schedule on the drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 General: A. Protect chrome-plated items from damage by wrenches and other hazards. B. Install fixtures having flush valves so that supplies to valves for all identical fixtures in each room are at same height for that fixture type. Seat valve in place so that valve discharge centerline is directly above fixture spud centerline; do not connect by bending nipple between valve spud. C. Install cold water on right (facing applicable fixtures). D. Verify, coordinate, adjust, align and secure rough-in piping to provide neat appearances and serviceable operation. Correlate with fixture manufacturer's data and recommendations and with required dimensions. 3.2 Cleanouts: A. Install at or near foot of each soil or waste stack and at each change in direction of building drain greater than 45 degrees. B. Shall be accessible; install flush with finished wall, floor or finished grade. 3.3 Traps_ A. Trap each fixture (except those with integral traps) with water sealed trap located as close as possible to fixture and never greater than 24" from fixture. B. Provide all floor drains and hub drain traps and indirect waste traps with automatic primer system for each trap. Plumbing Fixture, Trim, and Specialties 15201 - 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 3.4 Water Hammer Arresters: Size and locate in accord manufacturer's recommendations. 3.5 Final Installation: Final installation of all drains (floor, hub, shower and other similar types) must yield absolutely permanently water tight floor and/or roof system. (End of Section 15201) Plumbing Fixture, Trim, and Specialties 15201 - 3 APA 07.08 SECTION 15220 - SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL Fire Station #48 1.1 Scope: Provide soil, waste and vent piping systems complete as indicated on specifications and drawings. Drawing scales prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, sleeves and similar items; however, these deviations shall be provided as work of this section at no additional cost to Owner (no change in Contract price). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Pipe and Fittings: A. Interior above first floor slab shall be service weight cast iron, no-hub soil pipe conforming to CISPI Std. 301-85 with stainless steel clamps and shield with neoprene sealing sleeve conforming to CISPI Std. 301.85.. If located in return air plenum or in fire rated walls only. B. Interior above first floor slab shall be schedule 40 polyvinylchloride pipe with PVC solvent welded fittings. C. Interior below floor slab and up to a point five feet (5'-0") beyond the building walls shall be type PVC DWV pipe and fittings (ASTM 2665-88). 2.2 Floor Drains: Floor drains shall be as manufactured by Zurn, Josam, J.R. Smith, Wade or Mifab. Provide flashing clamp devices where required by floor construction. Refer to schedule on drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 General: Contractor shall promptly install all sewer and drain piping after excavating, chasing, or cutting for same has been done, so as to keep the openings for such piping open as short a time as possible. No piping shall, however, be permanently closed up, furred in or covered before the examination of same by the authorities having jurisdiction. 3.2 Scope: All piping shall be run in the most direct manner. Horizontal pipe shall have a grade of one-quarter inch (1/4") per foot wherever possible and not less, in any case, than one-eighth inch (1/8") per foot. All offsets shall be 45 degrees or less. 3.3 Insulation: Refer to Section 15400 entitled "Thermal Insulation". 3.4 Cleanouts: Refer to Section 15201 entitled "Plumbing Fixtures Trim and Specialties". 3.5 Vents: Vent branches shall be kept above the fixtures in such a manner as to preclude the use of the vents as waste pipes should the latter become obstructed. All branches shall be so graded as to prevent accumulation of water or scale therein. All vent pipes shall be properly graded without drops or sags and so connected as to drip back to waste pipes by gravity. Wherever practicable, two or more vents shall be connected together and extended as one vent through the roof. 3.6 Escutcheons: Where waste and vents are exposed at fixtures, pipes shall be chrome-plated brass (iron pipe size) and have chrome-plated escutcheons where they pass through floors, walls, or ceilings. Sanitary Drainage System 15220- 1 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 3.7 Flashing: At all points where the vents pass through the roof, the openings shall be flashed with sheet lead flashing weighing not less than four (4) pounds per square foot. The flashing shall be made absolutely water-tight at the roof line and shall be extended up, over and down at least two inches (2") into the pipe. Each flange shield shall extend not less than fourteen inches (14") in all directions from the respective vent, underneath the roofing material. 3.8 Tests: After all soil, waste and vent stacks have been installed, the outlets shall be plugged and the piping system filled with water to the highest point of the system, but with no less than 10 ft head of water, and allowed to remain filled for twenty-four (24) hours and proved tight under such conditions. This test may be conducted in segments as required by the sequence of construction. All tests shall be observed by a representative of the Project Architect/Engineer before tests are removed. (End of Section 15220) Sanitary Drainage System 15220 - 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station 948 SECTION 15221 - WATER HEATER: ELECTRIC. PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Refer to Section 15000 entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". 1.2 Equipment Capabilities shall be as indicated on drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 General: UL approved vertical electric tankless heaters. A. Energy Conservation: 1. All automatic, electric, tankless water heater(s) shall have a stand-by loss not exceeding 4 watts per square foot of tank surface area per hour. All water heaters shall be labeled to indicate compliance with ASHRAE 90.1 b-1992. B. Construction: Heaters, waterways, and coils shall be stainless steel construction. C. Trim: Shall have brass drain, magnesium rod anode and stamped ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve. D. Acceptable: A.O. Smith, Rheem or Ruud. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Install in accord with manufacturer's recommendations or as otherwise specified or shown on drawings. (End of Section 15221) Water Heater: Electric 15221-1 APA 07.08 SECTION 15400 - INSULATION, THERMAL PART1 GENERAL Fire Station #48 1.1 Scope: Provide plant, labor, and materials to insulate equipment, piping and miscellaneous items in the piping and duct systems as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. 1.2 Relation to Other Work: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". No insulation adhesives, materials or finishes shall be applied until the item to be insulated has been completely installed and tested and proved tight. 1.3 Shop Drawings: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". 1.4 NFPA 90A: All materials and adhesives used in or on ductwork shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A as to flame spread and smoke developed ratings. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Insulation Materials, General: Insulation materials shall include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: A. Type I-1: Preformed cellular glass pipe insulation. Pittsburgh Corning "Foamglas". B. Type I-3: Preformed nitrile rubber based elastomeric pipe insulation. Johns-Manville "Aeratube". C. Type I-4: Preformed glass fiber pipe insulation. Johns-Manville Flame Safe with VBC vapor barrier jacket. D. Type 1-5: Fiberglass blanket insulation. Johns-Manville Microlite fiberglass one and one-half (1-1/2) inch thick, one (1) pound per cubic foot density with reinforced foil scrim kraft vapor barrier. E. Type I-6: Nitrile rubber based elastomeric sheet insulation. John-Mansville "Aerotube". F. Type I-7: Cellular glass block insulation, Pittsburgh Corning "Foamglas". 2.2 Ductwork Insulation Materials: A. Insulation, Fiberglass Blanket Wrap (Type DI-1): Manville Microlite fiberglass duct insulation with reinforced foil scrim kraft vapor barrier with a minimum thermal resistance of 6.0. B. Insulation, Fiberglass Rigid Board (Type DI-2): Manville "Micro-Aire" M/F fiberglass duct board, stiffness of 800 EI, heavy duty foil facing on exposed surface consisting of foil, fiberglass scrim reinforcement and two layers of kraft paper in a foil-kraft-scrim-kraft pattern, with a thermal resistance of 6.0. C. Tape (Type T-1): Tape shall be 0.75" (19 mm) wide fiber reinforced tape such as Scotch #880 or equal. D. Wire (Type W-1): Dead soft, 16 gauge, stainless steel wires. Insulation, Thermal 15400 - 1 APA 07.08 Fire Station 948 E. Straps (Type ST-1): Stainless steel T-304 (18-8) soft annealed with deburred edge with stainless steel wing seals. Childers Products Co., "Febstraps". 2.3 Adhesives, Mastics, Sealants, Sore Coats: Adhesives, mastics, sealants, and bore coatings shall include, but are not necessarily limited to the following: A. Cellular Glass Insulation (Types I-1,1-7): ]. Bore Coating (Type BC-1): Factory applied vinyl base anti-compound specifically designed for use with cellular glass insulation. Pittsburgh Corning "Anti-Abrasive Compound 2A" or Hydrocal B-11. 2. Joint Sealant; Exterior Applications (Type JS-1): Non-hardening vapor barrier sealant specifically designed for use with cellular glass. Foster's "30-45 Foamseal Sealant". 3. Joint Sealant; Interior Applications (Type JS-2): Pittseal 727 sealant. B. Glass Fiber Insulation (Types I-5, DI-1 and DI-2): 1. Adhesive (Type AGF-1): Foster 85-20. 2. Mastic (Type MGF-1): Foster 35-00. C. Nitrile Rubber Based Elastomeric Insulation: Adhesive (Type AEI-1): Johns-Manville No. 57 adhesive. 2.4 Finishes: Insulation finishes shall include, but are not necessarily limited to the following: A. Cellular Glass Insulation (Types I-1,1-7): 1. Flexible Insulation Jacket (Type J-1): Prefabricated laminate containing a 10 x 10 asphalt impregnated glass fabric and a one mil thick aluminum foil sandwiched between three layers of a bituminous mastic. The exposed (outer) surface shall be coated with a plastic film and the inner surface with a release paper. Pittsburgh Corning "Pittwrap HD". 2. Finish Mastic (Type MF-1): Waterproof, weather, acid and alkali resistant mastic compound of high molecular weight bituminous polymers. Pittsburgh Corning "Pittcote 404". 3. Glass Fabric (Type FG-1): 10 x 10 Mesh asphalt impregnated glass fabric. Pittsburgh Corning "Glass Fab". 4. Fabric (Type F-1): 10 x 10 Mesh fiberglass fabric for reinforcing coatings. Pittsburgh Corning "PC Fabric 79". 5. Pipe Jacketing (Type JP-1): Jacketing for outdoor applications may be 0.016" (0.4 mm) factory painted (non-silver) aluminum jacketing with 0.5" x 0.015" (13 x 0.38 mm) bands with matching seals. Jacketing materials are available from RPR Products, Premetco International, or other manufacturers. Insulation, Thermal 15400 - 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 Pipe Jacketing (Type JP-2): PVC jacket as manufactured by Proto or equal, that is UV resistant and 20 mils thick or greater is acceptable. Apply per manufacture's recommendations. Pipe Fitting Covers (Type PFC-1): Aluminum fitting covers, 0.020 inches minimum thickness, type 3003 alloy, H-14 temper prefabricated fitting covers with baked epoxy moisture barrier for pipe sizes through 24". Filed fabricate fitting covers for pipe sizes larger than 24" using 0.020 inches thick aluminum roll jacketing with laminated polyethylene/kraft moisture barrier. Childers Products "Ell-Jacs", "Gore Ell-Jacs", "Tee-Jack", "End-Caps", "Beveled Collars", "Valve Fitting Covers", and "Flange Jacs". B. Nitrile Rubber Based Elastomeric Insulation (Types 1-3,1-6): 1. Finish Type FE-1: Johns-Manville "Aerotube Finish White". Do not store this finish within the building. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Chilled, Heating Hot Water, Dual Temperature and Condenser Water Piping: A. General: Water pipe insulation shall be two inches (2") thick in interior locations and three inches (3") thick in exterior locations. All piping shall be cleaned of foreign substances and free of surface moisture prior to the application of insulation. All insulation materials shall be stored in an area protected from the weather and kept dry before and during application. Testing of the piping system shall be completed prior to application of insulation. B. Interior, Concealed (e.g., in plenums, chases): Insulate with factory bore coated (BC-1), prefabricated, cellular glass pipe insulation (I-1). Butter joints with joint sealant (JS-2) and secure each section with not less than two bands of tape (T-1) Finish with a layer of fabric (F-1) applied between two glove coats of mastic (MF-2). Mastic and fabric shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Do same for fittings. C. Interior, Exposed to View (e.g. mechanical rooms): Insulate with factory bore coated (BC-1), prefabricated, cellular glass pipe insulation (I-1). Butter joints with joint sealant (JS-2) and secure each section with not less than two bands of tape (T-1). Finish with jacketing (JP-2). Secure jacketing with straps. Finish elbows and fittings with mastic (MF-2), reinforced with fabric (F-1). Finish materials shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Do same for fittings. D. Exterior Exposed: Insulate with factory bore coated (BC-1), prefabricated, cellular glass pipe insulation (1-1). Butter all joints with joint sealant (JS-2) and secure each section with not less than two bands of tape (T-1) then apply fabric (FG-1) between two glove coats or mastic (MF-1). Then apply aluminum jacketing (JP-1). Do same for fittings. E. Use Type 1-7 insulation where necessary. 3.2 Condensate Drain (Cold) Piping: Insulate with preformed nitrile rubber based elastomeric pipe insulation (I-3), secured with adhesive (AEI-1). Insulation thickness shall be three quarter inch (3/4"). Insulation, Thermal 15400 - 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station 948 3.3 Water Pumps and HVAC Apparatus: Insulate volutes and related cold surfaces with nitrile rubber based elastomeric sheet insulation (I-6) out to and including pump flanges. Provide cutouts or removable sections as required to provide access to grease fittings and similar items. Secure the insulation with adhesive (AEI-1) applied to a clean surface. Insulation thickness shall be one and one-half (1-1/2) inches. 3.4 Refrigerant Piping (suction line): Insulate with preformed nitrile rubber based elastomeric pipe insulation (I-3), secured with adhesive (AEI-1), insulation thickness shall be one inch (1 "). 3.5 Ductwork: A. General: Internal Insulation: See Section entitled "Ductwork". The Section entitled "Ductwork" describes all of the ductwork used on this project, and defines whether the ductwork should be insulated internally as work of the "Ductwork" Section or externally as work of the "Insulation, Thermal" Section. B. Medium and Low Pressure Interior Concealed: All supply return, and outside air ductwork that is not internally insulated shall be insulated externally with fiberglass blanket wrap Type Dl-1. Overlap internal insulation a minimum of one foot beyond any such internal insulation, and vapor seal raw end as specified herein for joints. Adhere duct insulation (DI-1) using adhesive (AGF-1) applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Where duct width exceeds twenty-four inches (24"), the insulation shall be additionally secured to the bottom of the duct using mechanical fasteners spaced one foot (1') on center. Insulation shall be applied with edges tightly butted, and all joints and breaks in the vapor barrier sealed using glass fabric and mastic applied in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Medium and Low Pressure, Interior Exposed: Insulate externally with fiberglass ductboard Type DI-2. Adhere to sheet metal ductwork in accord with manufacturer's instructions. This applies to rectangular duct only; when duct is round or flat-oval, insulate with Type DI-1 as in Paragraph 3.06-13 above. D. Medium and Low Pressure Exterior Exposed: All supply and return air ductwork which is exterior to the building shall be insulated externally (in addition to any internal insulation) with cellular glass insulation (Type 1-7). Apply the cellular glass insulation (minimum thickness: 2 inches) to exterior surfaces in accord with insulation manufacturer's recommendations. Taper thickness of insulation applied to top horizontal surfaces from 2 inch thickness at edges to 3 inch thickness at the center to provide a crowned surface so that water will not stand on the surface. Provide a mastic-glasscloth-mastic-glasscloth-mastic finish (using mastic Type M,F-I and glasscloth Type FG-1) on the insulation surface. Paint exterior ductwork finish with an approved exterior paint to match building wall color. 3.6 Flexible Duct Connections: Insulate with nitrile based elastomeric insulation (Type I-6); thickness shall be 1 inch. Adhere with adhesive Type AEI-1. Finish with Type FE-1. 3.7 Domestic Hot Water Piping: Insulate all pipe with one (1) inch thick, for piping upto 2", 1 1/2" for piping fiberglass insulation. Insulate fittings, valves and similar items; insulate completely. 2 1/2" and up for run-outs (0.5") inch for piping up to 2" and max to 12' (feet) in length. Insulation, Thermal 15400 - 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 3.08 Sanitary Drain and Stacks: Insulate back of floor drains receiving discharge from condensate drain (cold) piping with 1-1/2 inch thick flexible insulation (1-5) with vapor barrier. Adhere insulation to floor drain. Insulate piping from floor drain, "P" trap horizontal run and vertical stack whether exposed or concealed inside the building. Provide a vapor barrier using Foster's 30-36 for all joints and laps. 3.9 Insulation Fit: Where insulation is applied to pipe or equipment, it shall be installed with all joints fitted to eliminate voids. Voids shall not be filled with joint sealant, but shall be eliminated by refitting or replacing insulation. 3.10 Control Devices: Provide thermal insulation for all control devices (bulb well extensions, nipples, and pipe connections and control valve bodies) as required to prevent condensation and dripping where these devices may be below the dew point temperature of their environment. (End of Section 15400) Insulation, Thermal 15400 - 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 15611 - FANS, CEILING CABINET CENTRIFUGAL, LIGHT DUTY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 Scope: Provide light duty inline centrifugal fans with characteristics indicated on drawings. 1.2 Shop Drawings: Refer to requirements of Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". 1.3 Certified Performance: Be AMCA certified as to both sound and performance ratings. 1.4 Manufacturer: Acceptable: Acme Engineering and Manufacturing Company; Greenheck Fan and Ventilator Corp.; Loren Cook Company; Penn Ventilator Company, or approved equal. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Fan Housing: Fan housing including longitudinal, traverse, and diagonal stiffeners, motor mounts, bearing and drive supports shall be constructed of steel. Entire fan housing shall be internally lined with 1/2 inch thick or greater, three pound per cubic foot density fiberglass acoustical duct liner with a stabilized surface. Liner shall be held in place with adhesive and mechanical fasteners. All insulation and adhesives shall meet requirements of NFPA 90A as to flame spread and smoke developed ratings. Housing, including all bracing, stiffeners and motor mounted assembly shall be factory finished with a baked on alkaloid enamel finish over a corrosion resistant primer. Removable panel in bottom of housing for complete access to motor and fan. Inlet and outlet duct connections. 2.2 Fan Wheel: Shall be centrifugal type and shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Single or twin impeller as necessary to provide indicated performance. 2.3 Fan Motor: Permanently lubricated shaded pole motor mounted on resilient isolators to minimize vibration and noise. 2.4 Backdraft Damper: Mounted in throat of fan discharge. 2.5 Drive Assembly: Drive shall be direct drive type as indicated on drawings, and shall conform with the requirements of Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". 2.6 Disconnect Switch: Fans shall include factory amounted disconnect switches prewired to the drive motor. 2.7 Speed Control: Solid state speed controller for speed reduction to 40%. Mounted on housing or as otherwise indicated, to be used for setting CFM not as an on/off switch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Fan Placement and Mounting: Fan locations shall be essentially as shown on drawings; however, actual fan placement shall be verified using field measurements and data relating to equipment approved for actual installation on this project. Mount fan in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 Wiring: See Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". Fans, Ceiling Cabinet Centrifugal, Light Duty 15611 -1 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 3.3 Sound and Vibration Control: Refer to Section entitled, "Ductwork" for air side sound control and to Section entitled, "Vibration Isolation" for vibration control. 3.4 Duct Connections: Inlet and discharge ducts shall be connected to the fan duct collars using flexible connectors. These connectors shall be installed properly so that they are not in tension and are aligned with their respective ducts. 3.5 Test and Balance: All fan performance shall be certified by test and balance procedures as specified in section describing test and balance procedures. (End of Section 15611) Fans, Ceiling Cabinet Centrifugal, Light Duty 15611-2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 15736 - PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS - SMALL CAPACITY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Packaged rooftop air conditioning unit. 2. Roof curb. B. Related Sections: 1. Section -: Roof curb flashing. 2. Section -: Roof curbs. 3. Section 13800 - Building Automation and Control: Control systems remote from unit. 4. Section 15072 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Vibration isolators. 5. Section 15180 - Hydronic Piping: Water and drain piping connections. 6. Section 15195 - Facility Natural-Gas Piping: Natural gas piping connections. 7. Section 15196 - Facility Liquid-Petroleum Gas Piping: LP gas piping connections. 8. Section 15820 - Duct Accessories: Flexible connections. 9. Section 15910 - Direct Digital Controls: Controls remote from unit. 10. Section 15940 - Sequence of Operation: Sequences of operation applying to units in this section. 11. Section 16150 - Wiring Connections: Electrical connection to units. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 210/240 - Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment. 2. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. 3. ARI 340/360 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment. 4. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) - Ratio of net cooling capacity in Btuh to total rate of electric input in watts under designated operating conditions. B. Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER) - Total cooling output of an air conditioner during its normal annual usage period for cooling (in Btu) divided by total electric energy input during the same period (in Wh). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit data indicating: 1. Cooling and heating capacities. 2. Dimensions. Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Units - Small Capacity 15736- 1 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 3. Weights. 4. Rough-in connections and connection requirements. 5. Duct connections. 6. Electrical requirements with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 7. Controls. 8. Accessories. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include start-up instructions. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit start-up report for each unit. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of controls installed remotely from units. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, and maintenance and repair data. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cooling Capacity: Rate in accordance with ARI 210/240. B. Sound Rating: Measure in accordance with ARI 270. C. Insulation and adhesives: Meet requirements of NFPA 90A. D. Performance Requirements: Conform to minimum EER prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 when tested in accordance with ARI 210/240. E. Outside Air Damper Leakage. Test in accordance with AMCA 500. F. Perform Work in accordance with Florida Building Code - Mechanical. G. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five years documented experience approved by manufacturer. 1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Units - Small Capacity 15736 - 2 APA 07.08 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Fire Station #48 A. Accept units on site. Inspect for damage. B. Protect units from damage by storing off roof until roof mounting curbs are in place. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Furnish five year manufacturers warranty for compressors. 1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of equipment for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. Include maintenance items as shown in manufacturer's operating and maintenance data, including filter replacements, fan belt replacement, and controls checkout and adjustments. B. Furnish 24-hour emergency service on breakdowns and malfunctions for this maintenance period. 1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish one set of filters fan belts for each unit. PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. Manufacturers: I . Aaon Incorporated Model. 2. Substitutions: Not Permitted. ****** OR ****** B. Product Description: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled and wired, consisting of curb adaptor, cabinet, supply fan, refrigerant cooling coil, compressor, refrigeration circuit, condenser, , electric heating coil, air filters, mixed air casing, controls, and accessories. C. Configuration: As indicated on Drawings. D. Roof Mounting Curb: Provide curb adaptor for mounting unit to existing roof curbs. ****** OR ****** E. Cabinet: 1. Designed for outdoor installation with weatherproof construction. 2. Panels: Constructed of steel with baked enamel finish meeting salt spray test in accordance with ASTM B 117. Furnish access doors or removable access panels. Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Units - Small Capacity 15736- 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 Insulation: Factory applied to exposed vertical and horizontal panels. 1/2 one 2 inch thick neoprene coated aluminum fail faced glass fiber with edges protected from erosion. F. Supply Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type, resiliently mounted with V-belt drive,. Motor permanently lubricated with built-in thermal overload protection. G. Evaporator Coil: Constructed of copper tubes expanded onto aluminum fins. Galvanized drain pan with piping connection. Factory leak tested under water. H. Compressor: Hermetically sealed, resiliently mounted with positive lubrication, and internal motor overload protection. Furnish internal vibration isolators, short cycle protection. Refrigeration circuit: Furnish Furnish the following for each circuit fixed orifice control expansion device, thermal expansion valve, filter-drier, suction, discharge, and liquid line service valves with gauge ports, high and low pressure safety controls, and. Dehydrate and factory charge each circuit with oil and refrigerant. Condenser: 1. Coil: Copper tube aluminum fin coil assembly with subcooling rows and coil guard. Factory leak tested under water. 2. Condenser Fan: Direct drive propeller fans statically and dynamically balanced. Wired to operate with compressor. Motor permanently lubricated with built-in thermal overload protection. K. Electric Heating Coil: 1. Finned tube heating elements or Helical nickel-chrome resistance wire coil heating elements with refractory ceramic support bushings easily accessible with automatic reset thermal cut-out, built-in magnetic contactors, galvanized steel frame, control circuit transformer and fuse, manual reset thermal cut-out, airflow proving device, pilot duty toggle switch, load fuses. Single source power connection. Number of stages as indicated on Drawings. 2. Controls: Start supply fan before electric elements are energized and continue operating until air temperature reaches minimum setting, with switch for continuous fan operation. L. Air Filters: 2 inch thick glass fiber disposable media in metal frames. 30 percent efficiency based on ASHRAE 52.1. M. Mixed Air Casing: 1. Outside Air Damper Leakage: Maximum 3.0 cfin per square foot at 1.0 inches wg pressure differential. ****** OR ****** 2. Outside Air Damper: Automatic, two position. Interlocked to open when supply fan starts. Furnish rain hood with screen. N. Packaged Rooftop Units (RTU) Microprocessor controller - Each RTU shall be controlled by a stand-alone microprocessor based controller with resident control logic. The controller will Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Units - Small Capacity 15736 - 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 interface with the existing Trane BAS located in the Fire Training Academy and the inputs and outputs in the points list to accomplish the following temperature control and energy conservation strategies. 2. Occupied Mode - All unit functions will be enabled for normal heating and cooling operation. Unit defaults to default temperature and humidity set points in the unit microprocessor when communication with BAS is lost. Occupied Space Temperature Control - When in occupied mode as described above, the dedicated unit control shall operate stages of heating and cooling to maintain space temperature set point. Setpoints may be set by one of the following methods: a. Remotely through BAS by the system operator; b. Locally through the thermostat by the occupant; C. Locally through the thermostat by the occupant within limits defined through the BAS by the system operator; d. Operator may designate wild card set points to apply to any or all of the RTU's through the BAS. 4. Optimal Start Mode - When the unit is turned on by the SAS for optimal start, heating or cooling is provided as required. The outside air dampers, if provided, remains closed, in heating mode or mechanical cooling mode, until occupied time. Economizer cycle, if supplied, will be available if required. Coastdown Mode - When the unit is turned "OFF" by the BAS for optimal stop, the supply fan remains "ON/AUTO", the outside air damper remains in minimum position for ventilation, and utilizes the unoccupied set points. 6. Demand Limit Mode - Through the BAS a user defined Demand Limit Mode shall be available. User defines maximum off time and temperature to ensure occupant comfort. Night Setback Temperature Control - When the BAS selects unoccupied mode, the unit shall be controlled to maintain user defined unoccupied heating and cooling set points. Adjustable start and stop temperature differentials will prevent short cycling. The outdoor air damper remains closed during heating night setback operation, if provided. 8. Nighttime Free-Cool Purge Mode - An "economizer only" cooling cycle shall be provided during unoccupied hours when outdoor air conditions are suitable and the zone requires cooling. 9. Low Ambient Compressor Lockout - Compressor operation shall be disabled below a user defined outdoor air temperature. 10. Timed Override - When a timed override is initiated by the user, the unit will return to its user defined normal occupied mode for the user determined period of time. 11. Fire Shutdown - The unit will shut down in response to a customer supplied Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Units - Small Capacity 15736- 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 contact closure to the BAS indicating the presence of a fire or other emergency condition. 12. Heat Pump Auxiliary Heat Lockout - Heat pump auxiliary heat operation shall be prevented above a user defined outdoor air temperature. 13. Emergency Heat Mode (Heat Pump units) - Shall be selectable at BAS. In emergency heat mode, compressors shall be locked out and auxiliary heat shall control for space comfort. 14. Unit status report - For each RTU unit, the SAS shall provide an operating status summary of all sensed values (zone temperature, discharge temperature, etc.) set-points and modes. 15. Supply Air Tempering - When the unit is in the heat mode, but not actively heating, if the supply air temperature drops 10 degrees or more below the heating set-point, heat is turned on until supply air temperature rises to a point 10 degrees above the heating set-point. 16. Alternating Lead/Lag - (Dual Compressors Models Only): During periods of part load operation, each compressor cycles alternatively as circuit number one in order to equalize wear and run time. 17. Economizer Preferred Cooling - Compressor operation is integrated with economizer cycle to allow mechanical cooling when economizer is not adequate to satisfy zone requirements. Compressors are enabled if space temperature is recovering to cooling set-point at a rate of less than 0.2 degrees per minute. Compressor low ambient lockout overrides this function. 18. Diagnostic/Protection - The BAS system shall be able to alarm from all sensed points from the rooftop units and diagnostic alarms sensed by the unit controller. Alarm limits shall be designated for all sensed points. N. Accessories: 1. Convenience Outlet: Factory installed, 115 volt, 15 amp, GFCI type, internally mounted. Roof Curb Adaptor Package: Furnish duct support hardware to adapt unit to existing roof curb. 0. Capacity: Refer to plans 2.2 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Electrical Characteristics: Refer to Plans PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof curbs are installed and dimensions are as shown on shop drawings instructed by manufacturer. Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Units - Small Capacity 15736- 6 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 3.2 PREPARATION A. Furnish roof curb adaptors for installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Roof Curb: 1. Assemble roof curb. 2. Install roof curb level. 3. Coordinate curb installation and flashing with Roofing Vendor and warranty. 4. Install units on roof curb providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and utility services. 5. Install gasket material between unit base and roof curb. B. Connect units to supply and return ductwork with flexible connections. C. Install condensate piping with trap and route from drain pan to nearest roof drain. D. Install components furnished loose for field mounting. E. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting. F. Install control wiring between unit and field installed accessories, see controls specifications. 3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Furnish initial start-up and shutdown during first year of operation, including routine servicing and checkout. 3.5 CLEANING A. Vacuum clean coils and inside of unit cabinet. B. Install temporary filters during construction period. Replace with permanent filters at Substantial Completion. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate unit operation and maintenance. B. Furnish services of manufacturer's technical representative for one 8 hour day to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of units. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7 days notice to Architect/Engineer of training date. 3.7 SCHEDULES: Refer to Plans END OF SECTION Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Units - Small Capacity 15736 - 7 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 15800 - AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Scope: Provide all air distribution devices as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein for a complete and operable system. No perforated diffusers allowed. 1.2 Relation to Other Work: Coordinate with work of the ceiling, drywall, and plastering trades as required to insure an orderly progression of work and a first class finished system with respect to placement, alignment, finish, general fit, and absence of conflict with lighting systems and fire protection systems. 1.3 Design Conditions: A. Acoustical: Noise produced at each diffuser, register, grille, or other air distribution device shall not exceed a noise criteria level of NC 25 based on sound pressure levels in db re 0.0002 microbars unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate air distribution devices, sound attenuation measures, and equipment actually provided to insure that this design constraint is not exceeded by the system installed. B. Pressure drop across any air distribution device shall not exceed 0.10 in w.g. static pressure unless otherwise indicated. C. Guarantee: Air distribution equipment shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer to operate without excessive noise and with velocities in the five foot occupancy zone, when handling air with temperature differentials as high as 25 degrees, not to exceed 30 fpm at 2 degree difference, 50 fpm at 1-1/2 degree difference, or 75 fprn at a 1 degree difference when operating with an average 75 degree room temperature and measured no closer than 6 inches from a wall surface. 1.4 Shop Drawings: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". 1.5 Manufacturer: Titus, Price, or approved equal. Manufacturers style and series numbers indicated are examples of products to be provided. 1.6 Manufacturers must be members of the Air Distribution Council unless otherwise indicated. 1.7 All aluminum is to be extruded unless otherwise indicated. 1.8 Appearance: Each air distribution device which has a portion thereof (frame, core, etc.) exposed to view in the finished area shall have a factory applied finish which matches and is compatible with the color of the surrounding surface on which the device is installed. Colors must be approved by Architect prior to device fabrication. 1.9 All louvers, dampers, and/or shutters shall be rated by their manufacturer in accordance with AMCA Standard in effect. 1.10 Integral Components: All dampers, blank-off baffles and other companion devices which form an integral part of air distribution devices shall be factory made items produced by the manufacturer of air distribution device. Air Distribution Equipment 15800 - 1 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Ceiling Mounted Conditioned Air Supply Diffusers, Return Air, Exhaust Air and Outside Air Registers. A. Designated on drawings by the manner of indicated system function for the device. B. Sponge Rubber Gaskets. C. Aluminum or steel, as specified. D. Companion adjustable volume dampers. 2.2 Ceiling Mounted Transfer Grilles: A. Designated on drawings by the manner of the indicated system function for the device. B. Aluminum or steel as specified. C. Sponge rubber gaskets. 2.3 Linear Supply Diffusers (for ceiling application): A. Designated on drawings by the manner of the indicated system function for the device or as otherwise indicated. B. Adjustable to horizontal or vertical projection pattern through 180 degree angle. C. Integral volume control damper. D. Anodized extruded aluminum. 2.4 Linear Return Devices: A. Shall match with corresponding supply air devices. B. Adjustable volume dampers (interval). C. Anodized extruded aluminum. D. Slot width: same as Linear Supply Diffusers unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 Distribution Plenums: A, Designed to be compatible with applicable linear supply diffusers. B. Insulated to prevent condensation. C. Air tight connection to diffuser. D. Provided with each linear diffuser assembly in size and quantity which will provide uniform supply air flow over entire active portion of the linear diffuser. Air Distribution Equipment 15800 - 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 E. Air supply duct connections spaced at nominal 4 foot increments unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 Mounting Screws: Where grilles, diffusers, or registers are specified which require mounting screws visible from the face of the device, these screws shall be furnished with the air distribution equipment or register in which they are to be used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 General: A. install neatly where indicated in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and in accord with SMACNA recommendations and as otherwise indicated. B. Properly test, balance and adjust to produce quiet, draftless operating to best degree possible. C. Do not install blank-offs under continuous linear diffuser distribution plenums. Distribution plenums shall cover only active portion of the diffuser. 3.2 Rectangular Diffusers: Where diffusers are in lay-in type, they shall be supported by the inverted T-bar suspension system, but all ducts connected thereto shall be supported independently of the ceiling as specified under Section entitled "Ductwork". Surface mounted diffusers shall be supported by the duct runouts or drops where sheet metal ducts are indicated and by separate hangers where flex runouts are indicated. All rectangular ceiling diffusers shall be installed with their lines parallel and perpendicular to the building line and properly aligned with ceiling. 3.3 Sidewall Grilles and Registers: Mount securely to the duct system flanges using finish screws and in accordance with accepted good practice. 3.4 Ceiling Mounted Exhaust and Return Registers/Grilles: Mount as specified hereinbefore for surface mounted ceiling diffusers except use finished screws provided and secure to duct and finished ceiling (or finished ceiling for non-ducted returns) in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Where required to provide adequate support for non-ducted registers or grilles, prove appropriate mounting frame for incorporation into the ceiling system. (End of Section 15800) Air Distribution Equipment 15800 - 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 SECTION 15850 - DUCTWORK - SHEET METAL - LOW PRESSURE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Scope: Provide complete duct systems as indicated. Systems shall include, but not be limited to, the following: outside air, exhaust air, and air conditioning supply and return air duct systems as shown on drawings. Drawing scales prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, and like items; however, these items shall be installed as required for the actual project conditions at no change in contract price. A. Items Included: This section generally includes, but is not limited to, the following major items: 1. Low pressure sheet metal ductwork. 2. Low pressure flexible ducts. 3. Duct system accessories. a. Flexible duct connections. b. Splitters. C. Low pressure metal turning vanes. d. Extractors. e. Manual volume dampers. f. Low pressure access doors. 1.2 Relation to Other Work: Coordinate shop drawings ordering, delivery, and placement of all items affecting the duct systems including, but not limited to, the following items: air handling units, exhaust fans, supply fans, sound attenuators, duct mounted coils, access panels, air distribution devices, fire dampers, outside air louvers, hoods, filters, roof curbs, structural framing, roof construction, roofing, and the work of all trades to insure an orderly and timely progression of the work. Refer to the requirements of the Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". 1.3 Shop Drawings: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". Include complete data on: all prefabricated duct and fittings; access doors; flexible connectors; manual volume dampers including operating hardware; extractors; turning vanes; automatic shutters; duct liner including mechanical fasteners and adhesives; and all other items. 1.4 Air Handling Unit and Ductwork Configuration Shop Drawings: A. Air handling unit manufacturer and model or series which has been used as the design basis for this project is indicated. If Contractor elects to submit for approval any unit which is made by any other manufacturer which is listed as acceptable, the Contractor shall submit a shop drawing for each air handling unit for which he proposes to use a unit which is different than the design basis. Such shop drawings shall meet the following requirements: 1. Be drawn at the same scale as the unit is shown on the Drawings. Contractor may elect to use a larger scale if he desires (i.e., if drawing of unit is at 1/4" = 11.01, 1/211 = 11-0" may be used). 2. Clearly show all proposed ductwork configuration changes (sizes, routing, and similar differences) which are different in any respect from the Drawings. Extent of shop drawings shall show all ductwork to and from each unit beginning with and terminating at those points where ductwork is intended to remain unchanged as shown on Drawings. Ductwork-Sheet Metal - Low Pressure 15850- 1 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 3. Where proposed changes affect any other work such as structure, housekeeping pads, piping, equipment, electrical work or any other work, shop drawings shall clearly show those proposed changes. 4. Proposed changes shall be at no additional change in contract price. 5. Where Drawings show units in plan only, shop drawings shall show proposed units in plan and also in elevation. 6. Shop drawings shall also show exact locations of related work (such as bar joists, columns, beams, sound attenuators, and like items) which affect the proposed ductwork routing and unit location and configuration. 7. Each section of each air handling unit shall be clearly identified (i.e., coil section, fan section, filter section, mixing box section, etc.). B. Failure to submit these shop drawings together at the same time with the air handling unit shop drawings will result in total disapproval of the proposed air handling units. Time delays or other reasons will not be considered. C. These shop drawings shall be prepared as work of this section in coordination with the work of section describing the air conditioning unit(s). 1.5 Other Requirements: A. Provide all ductwork and components thereof in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. All ductwork dimensions indicated are nominal free clearance internal dimension which do not include insulation thickness. 1.6 Definitions: A. "SMACNA" means "Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc." B. Low Pressure Ductwork: Any and all ductwork conveying air or other gases at velocities less than 2000 fpm and static pressure less than 2.0 inches w.g. This ductwork may also be referred to in these specifications as "Low Velocity Ductwork". SMACNA "I VAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible," First Edition, 1985, shall govern construction of this ductwork unless otherwise specified; construct duct in accord therewith. C. Pressure and Velocity Classifications. Pressure and velocity classifications, (hereinafter called "PNC") for ducts are defined as follows: Positive or SMACNA Static Pressure Negative SMACNA Velocity PNC Pressure Class Rating Pressure Sea] Class (fpm) 2 Low 2" + or - B 2500 do 1 Low 1" + or - C 2500 do '/z Low ''/z" + or - D 2000 do Note: All seams, joints, fasteners penetrations and connections to be sealed with hard cast. Ductwork-Sheet Metal - Low Pressure 15850 - 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Low Pressure Sheet Metal Ductwork: Systems operating at two inches of water static pressure or less, shall, unless specifically specified otherwise, conform to the following requirements: A. Material: Prime quality forty-eight inch wide resquare tight coat galvanized steel conforming to the requirements of ASTM A-526. B. Reinforcing, Cross Breaking, Seams, Joints: Be in accordance with latest SMACNA construction standard for low pressure sheet metal duct. 2.2 Glass Fiber Low Pressure Ductwork: None allowed on this project. 2.3 Low Pressure Round Ductwork: A. Conduit: Shall be "zinc grip" steel of spiral lock-seam construction. Duct shall be made using galvanized steel as per ASTM A-527 G-90. Gauge shall be as follows: Round Duct: Fitting Size Duct Gauge Gauge Up through 8" diameter 26 24 9" through 14" diameter 26 24 15" through 26" diameter 24 22 27" through 36" diameter 22 20 37" through 50" diameter 20 20 51" through 60" diameter 18 18 61" through 84" diameter 16 1.6 2.4 Acoustically Lined Sound Attenuating RoundDuct and Fittings: General construction is specified in paragraphs above. Flame spread and smoke developed ratings shall comply with NFPA 90A. Double walled with zinc coated solid sheet steel outer wall and zinc coated perforated sheet steel inner wall. One inch thick annular space between inner and outer walls uniformly packed with fiberglass insulation with effect thermal conductivity of 0.27 BTUH per sq. ft. (F degrees per inch). Exception: 2" thick annular space with insulation of same type and thickness where specifically indicated. Equal to United Sheet Metal Co. Acousti-K27. A. Fittings: United Sheet Metal, Impulse Air or R.V. Money per SMACNA. I. Material: 20 inch diameter and smaller shall be constructed from 22 gauge zinc grip steel; 22 inch diameter and larger shall be constructed from 20 gauge, zinc grip steel or as per SMACNA. Steel shall conform to ASTM A527. 2. Elbows: Five inch diameter and larger shall be five section construction; three and four inch diameter shall be die formed construction 3. Divided Flow Fittings: All divided flow configurations are to be furnished as separate fittings. Tap covers welded into spiral duct sections are not acceptable. All tees, crosses and laterals up to and including 12" diameter tap size, will have a minimum of 3/8" radius rounded entrance into the tap, produced by machining, press forming, or hand grinding to a smooth entrance. The entrance will be free of projections, weld build-ups, burrs or irregularities. All fittings will have continuous welds along all seams. Ductwork-Sheet Metal - Low Pressure 15850 - 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 4. Tees and Crosses: All tees and crosses shall be the spun conical type with branch entrances through 12" size, to be rounded laminar flow as noted in Paragraph 3 above. 5. Connections: Each connection of conduit to fittings shall be made with a synthetic rubber sealing compound conforming to NFPA 90A as to flame spread and smoke developed ratings and mechanically fastened with drive or twist screws, and all joints tested in accordance with test procedure described hereinafter. Raychem TDB duct sealing bands may be used in lieu of the sealing compound. Connection between conduit and terminals shall be made with a maximum of 48" of flexible duct. Runout connections shall be assembled in same manner as conduit and fittings. 2.5 2.6 Low Pressure Flexible Ducts: 45 degree take offs to final runs acceptable, 8' (feet) maximum length. Duct System Accessories: A. General: Provide all necessary duct system accessories to assure proper balance, quiet and draftless distribution and conveyance, and minimization of turbulence, noise and pressure drop for all supply, return, and exhaust and ventilation air quantities indicated. Be recommended by the manufacturer for the application. B. Flexible Duct Connections: 1. Provided where air handlers, fans and blowers connect their ductwork. 2. At least 4 inches long. 3. Connected on each side to metal (either metal ductwork, air handling apparatus, or heavy gauge steel sleeves). 4. For use in low pressure duct systems. 5. Ventfabrics, Inc., "Ventglas Metaledge". C. Splitters: Provide for adjustments of air volume to their respective branches, where indicated. Constructed of at least the same gauge galvanized steel as the cut wherein they are used, and in no instance be less than twenty-two (22) US gauge. Use in low pressure duct systems only. Adequately sized to close off air to applicable branches. Rigidly attached to pivot rod and operating linkage. Installed on raised insulation base when used in internally insulated ductwork. Splitter blades formed in two thickness of metal so that entering edge presents rounded nose to air flow length no less than one and one half times the width of the smaller branch served or twelve inches whichever is larger. Hardware used for the construction, assembly, and operation of splitter dampers shall be as follows: 1. Operators for exposed splitters and those located above "lay-in" or accessible ceilings shall be Ventlock 4690 splitter damper assembly. 2. Operators for concealed splitters shall be Ventlock #691 with #680 miter and #677 concealed regulator. D. Low Pressure Metal Turning Vanes: Provide in all elbows, bends and tees of all low velocity supply air ducts whether or not shown in detail; provide in all elbows, bends and tees of all other low velocity ducts where portions of such ducts convey air at greater than 700 fpm average velocity. Adequate rigidity and strength to be complete flutterproof; Ductwork-Sheet Metal - Low Pressure 15850 - 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 properly designed; permanently fixed type. Aluminum, or steel with corrosion resistant coating, or galvanized steel. Air foil type in all mitered elbows, mitered bends and mitered tees. Air foil type must be manufactured by Titus, Tuttle & Bailey, Anemostat, Waterloo, Metalaire, Barber-Colman, "Airturns", Tuttle & Bailey "Ducturns", or Dura-Dyne "VR" with 24 gauge rails and hollow vanes. E. Extractors: 1. Provide at rectangular branch duct take-offs. 2. Use in low pressure duct systems only. 3. Properly designed to deflect, proportion and direct the indicated air quantities to the branch duct and/or to the registers, grilles or other outlets without causing objectionable noise or pressure drop. 4. Multivaned and adjustable. 5. Aluminum, or steel with corrosion resistant coating, or galvanized steel. 6. Provided with devices for adjusting and securing the position of these deflectors; these devices shall allow adjustment of the deflectors from outside the completed ductwork without necessity for puncturing or otherwise penetrating ductwork and/or its vapor barrier. 7. Made by Titus, Metalaire, Young Regulator. 8. Be similar to Titus Model AG-45 or AG-225 Volume Extractor or Young Regulator "890" or "890A". F. Manual Volume Dampers: (Other than those specified as being integral with each register, diffuser and other air outlet or inlet): 1. Provide where indicated in the complete air distribution system(s) (including ductwork, return air plenums, etc.) to allow complete balancing of the air supply, return, ventilation and exhaust system(s). 2. Opposed blade type. 3. 8" Maximum blade width. 4. Made of galvanized steel, or steel with a sprayed or dipped aluminum rust resistant finish; flutterproof. 5. Provided so that all damper adjustments can be made from outside the completed ductwork without necessity for puncturing or otherwise penetrating ductwork and/or its vapor barrier. 6. Fully adjustable and with locking device. 7. Manufactured by Titus, Metalaire, or other approved manufacturer. 8. Provided at a point in the ductwork which is a sufficient distance upstream from an outlet (or downstream from an inlet) to attenuate objectionable noise due to damper throttling and to preclude adverse affects on the distribution characteristics (throw, drop, patter, etc.) of the air distribution device. 9. Based upon location of the duct in which the damper is to be installed, provide the following types: a. Dampers in ducts which are exposed or located above "lay-in" or "accessible ceilings": Young Regulator Company Model 896. b. Dampers in ducts concealed above plaster ceilings or behind dry wall construction: Young Regulator company Model 896. G. Low Pressure Duct Access Doors: Provided for: Each manual and motorized damper; fire damper; smoke damper; electric duct heater; and where access is otherwise necessary for ductwork Ductwork-Sheet Metal - Low Pressure 15850 - 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 inspection over hood ceiling areas. Access shall be every 10-20 feet for service or inspection. 2. Factory prefabricated double wall insulated type of 24 US gauge galvanized steel (of same or thicker gauge than ductwork panel in which installed, whichever is greater). 3. Minimum size shall be as large as is compatible with duct size, but in no case less than the following (provide larger sizes if necessary to permit proper access operating): Maximum Duct Dimensions Access Door Size 11 " or less 10" x 12" 1.2" through 16" 12" x 16" 17" and over 16" x 24" 4. Doors shall be provided with hand operated adjustable tension catches and shall be completely gasketed around their perimeters. Doors shall be Ventlock "Access Doors". Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations using Ventlock #360 sealant. H. Test Openings: Furnish and install gasketed applied test openings for test equipment (pitot tubes, etc.) on the entering and leaving sides of air handling units and other air handling equipment and heating coils. Test openings shall be Ventlock #699-2. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 General: A. Construct all ductwork and accessories in accordance with the latest indicated editions of applicable Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association construction standards. B. Streamline all ductwork to the full extent practical and equip with proper and adequate devices to assure proper balance and quiet draftless distribution of indicated air quantities. C. Protect all ductwork and system accessories from damage during construction until Architect's final acceptance of project. D. Prior to ductwork fabrication, verify if all ductwork as dimensioned and generally shown will satisfactorily fit allocated spaces. Take precautions to avoid space interferences with beams, columns, joists, pipes, lights, conduit, other ducts, equipment, etc. Notify Architect if any spatial conflicts exist, and then obtain Architect's approval of necessary routing. Make any such necessary revisions which are minor at no additional cost. E. Carefully correlate all duct connections to air handling units and fans to provide proper connections, elbows and bends which minimize noise and pressure drop. F. Provide all curved elbows with radius ratios of not less than 1.5, unless otherwise shown or approved by Architect. Provide all mitered elbows with turning vanes. G. Properly suspend all ductwork so that no objectionable conditions result (such as vibration, sagging, etc.). Ductwork-Sheet Metal - Low Pressure 15850 - 6 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 H. Coordinate any and all dimensions at interfaces of dissimilar type of ductwork and at interfaces of ductwork with equipment so that proper overlaps, interfaces, etc., of insulation and continuity of vapor barriers are maintained. If necessary, where ducts interface and have different types of insulation, provide transitions so that internal free-clear dimensions of duct remain unchanged. Install horizontal low pressure ductwork at a level which maximizes length of any vertical rectangular duct connections to rectangular diffuser necks; however, such vertical duct connections are not required to be over 24 inches in length. K. Install horizontal rigid ductwork as high as practical above suspended ceilings so that movable light fixtures may be relocated without interference to meet any future partition relocation requirements. 3.2 Special Conditions: The following duct system installation requirements shall be done to maximize flexibility of relocation of lighting systems, duct systems and fire sprinkler systems in the event of partition relocation and in order to facilitate ease of servicing components of the systems contained within the ceiling plenum. These requirements are: A. Install all horizontal rigid ductwork against the underside of the steel structure. Coordinate ductwork reinforcing such that standing seams, angles and similar space-consuming reinforcement does not occur on the top surface of ducts where such ducts pass below steel beams. B. Make minor field adjustments as necessary to the locations of terminal units as shown on the drawings such that: 1. Each terminal unit is essentially in the center of a ceiling module and is not obstructed from access from below by the main runners or cross tees of the ceiling system. 2. Each terminal unit is not installed over a light fixture or such that a light fixture does not obstruct service access to the unit. 3. Each terminal unit is supported at an elevation such that the bottom of the terminal unit is at least 10-inches above the bottom of the ceiling. To accomplish this, each terminal unit may be recessed upward into the main structural bay cavity and provided at its outlet with a downwardly-sloped supply air duct which contains two angular offsets (each of which is not greater than 15 angular degrees) to allow the supply duct to drop to the same horizontal plane as the remainder of the low pressure ductwork. 4. No terminal unit is located so that access to it is obstructed by fire sprinkler system piping. 5. No rigid duct is located to obstruct access to an electrical lighting system junction box. 3.3 Field Measurement: Refer to the requirements of the Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". 3.4 Hangers and Supports: A. General: Comply with latest applicable SMACNA construction standards. Where sprayed fireproofing occurs, install hangers before application of such treatment and withhold installation of ducts until after application. Ductwork-Sheet Metal - Low Pressure 15850 - 7 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 B. Supports: Vertical risers and other duct runs where the method of support specified above is not applicable shall be supported by substantial angle brackets designed to meet field conditions and installed to allow for duct expansion. C. Fasteners: Secure hangers to steel beams or metal deck with beam clamps to drop through connections from metal or concrete deck. Refer to the requirements of the Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". 3.5 Insulated Duct: Where ducts will be insulated, make provision for neat insulation finish around damper operating quadrants, splitter adjustment clamps, access doors, and similar operating devices. A metal collar equivalent in depth to insulation thickness and of suitable size to which insulation may be finished shall be mounted on duct. 3.6 Partition and Floor Openings: All openings in floor slabs or partitions through which ducts pass shall be filled tightly with mineral or glass wool batting. 3.7 Change In Shape or Dimension: Where duct size or shape is changed to effect a change in area, the following shall apply: A. Where the area at the end of the transformation results in an increase in area over that at the beginning, the slope of the transformation shall not exceed one inch in seven inches. B. Where the area at the end of the transformation results in a decrease in area from that at the beginning, the slope of the transformation may be one inch in four inches, but one inch in seven inches if preferable, space permitting. C. The angle of transformation at connections to heating coils or other equipment shall not exceed thirty degrees from a line parallel to the air flow in the entering side of the equipment, nor fifteen degrees on the leaving side. The angle of approach may be increased to suit limited space conditions when the transformation is provided with vanes approved by the Architect. D. At contractor's option, connection from low pressure rectangular ductwork to air distribution devices via flexible ductwork may be made from bottom of rectangular ductwork in lieu of side connection providing contractor makes appropriate size transitions (if necessary) to maintain same free clear internal area at connection and also allows dimensional clearance for spin-in fitting with integral damper. E. At contractor's option, he may eliminate a low pressure duct transition and hold the upstream duct size to the next downstream transition and make the necessary size transition at that point. 3.8 Changes in Direction: Changes in direction shall be basically as indicated on the drawings and the following shall apply: A. Supply ducts turns of ninety degrees in low pressure duct shall be made with mitered elbows fitted with closely spaced turning vanes designed for maintaining a constant velocity through the elbow. B. Return and exhaust duct turns of ninety degrees in low pressure duct shall be made mitered elbows, as specified hereinbefore, for supply ducts, unless radius elbows are indicated, in which case they shall be vaned and constructed with a throat radius three-quarters the duct width and a full radius heel. Ductwork-Sheet Metal - Low Pressure 15850 - 8 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 C. Tees in low pressure duct shall conform to the design requirements specified bereinbefore for elbows. D. Branch take-offs in low pressure duct shall be made with extractors, splitter dampers, or 450 take-off with volume dampers, as indicated on drawings. 3.9 Other Requirements: A. If ductwork materials are installed which do not meet these specifications, Contractor shall remove such ductwork materials and replace them with the specified materials. Any delay in job progress will be the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Properly install all control related devices which are part of the duct system. See Section(s) describing HVAC control systems. 3.11 Exterior Ductwork: A. All ductwork which is exterior to the building shall be supported with appropriate steel support system which is firmly secured to supporting base. Make any and all ductwork penetration points and any and all ductwork support penetration points permanently watertight by use of properly designed flashings and other necessary appurtenances. B. All exterior ductwork shall be completely permanently weatherproof including connections at air conditioning units, wall penetration points and all other points. 3.12 Definitions and Locations: A. Definitions of Type Designations: The following type designations are "letter abbreviations" of the duct types. The abbreviations are intended to make any drawings notes or other references more concise. L Type LPW: Low pressure, wrapped. 2. Type LPSA: Low pressure, rectangular, sound attenuating thermally lined. 3. Type LP: Low pressure, rectangular, no insulation. 4. Type LPFDI: Low pressure flexible round duct with factory insulation. 5. Type LPW-1: Low pressure, wrapped not connected to a unit. B. Location of Duct Type: The following descriptions cover the locations of each duct type. 1. Type LPSA: Where indicated. 2. Type LPFDI: All flexible supply air ductwork from any type of low pressure ductwork to connection with applicable air distribution devices. 3. Type LPW: Rectangular return and supply air ductwork to and from air conditioning units. 4. Type LPW-1: Rectangular ductwork not connected to an air handling unit, but which conveys air from a conditioned space or from a plenum above a conditioned space to another conditioned space or to another plenum (e.g., return air transfer ducts). 5. Type LP: Rectangular exhaust air ductwork. (End of Section 15850) Ductwork-Sheet Metal - Low Pressure 15850 - 9 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 15963 - FACILITY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM (FMCS) PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary for a complete and operating Facility Management and Control System (FMCS), utilizing Direct Digital Controls as shown on the drawings and as described herein. Drawings are diagrammatic only. The FMCS shall be capable of total integration of the facility infrastructure systems with user access to all system data either locally over a secure Intranet within the building or by remote access by a standard Web Browser over the Internet. This shall include the capability for HVAC control, and all trending, reporting and maintenance management functions related to normal building operations all as indicated on the drawings or elsewhere in this specification. B. All labor, material, equipment and software not specifically referred to herein or on the plans, that are required to meet the functional intent of this specification, shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner. C. For future expansion of this facility the installed system must be open protocol so that other bidders, in the future, may offer other similar products that totally integrate into this base system for these future expansions. Field controllers must be LonWorks®. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The entire Facility Management and Control System (FMCS) shall be comprised of a network of interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers communicating on an open protocol communication network to a host computer within the facility (when specified) and/or communicating via the Internet to a host computer in a remote location. The FMCS shall communicate to third party systems such as air-handling systems, energy metering systems, other energy management systems, access control systems, fire-life safety systems and other building management related devices with open, interoperable communication capabilities. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. Eight copies of shop drawings of the entire control system shall be submitted and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturers catalog data sheets and installation instructions. Shop drawings shall also contain complete wiring and schematic diagrams, software descriptions, calculations, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a system. Terminal identification for all control wiring shall be shown on the shop drawings. A complete written Sequence of Operation as well as a hard copy graphical depiction of the application control programs shall also be included with the submittal package. B. Submittal shall also include a trunk cable schematic diagram depicting the Graphical User Interface (GUI) computer, control panel locations and a description of the communication type, media and protocol. Building Automation System Section 15963 - I APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 C. Submittal shall also include a complete point list of all connected points to the DDC system. D. Upon completion of the work, provide a complete set of `as-built' drawings and application software on compact disk (CD).. Drawings shall be provided as AutoCADTM or VisioTM compatible files. Two copies of the `as-built' drawings shall be provided in addition to the documents on compact disk. E. All submittal and as-built drawings shall be reviewed and approved by a Professional Engineer (PE) in the direct employ of the controls contractor. 1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Where work specified under other Sections of these Specifications connects to equipment or systems which are a part of this Section provide proper connection(s) to such equipment including trade coordination. The following sections may have direct links to the installation of the FMS system: 1. Section 00000 - General Conditions 2. Section 15010 -Basic Mechanical Requirements 3. Section 15240 - Mechanical Sound & Vibration 4. Section 15890 - Ductwork 5. Section 15930 - Air Terminals 6. Section 15990 - Testing, Balancing & Adjusting 7. Division 16 - Electrical Work 8. Additional related work as specified in Part 3 or as shown on the design drawings 1.5 AGENCY AND CODE APPROVALS A. All products of the FMCS shall be provided with the following agency approvals. Verification that the approvals exist for all submitted products shall be provided with the submittal package. Systems or products not currently offering the following approvals are not acceptable. 1. UL-916; Energy Management Systems 2. ULC; UL - Canadian Standards Association 3. FCC, Part 15, Subpart J, Class A Computing Devices 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide factory-shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device. Maintain cartons through shipping, storage, and handling as required to prevent equipment damage. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS A. Cooperation with Other Trades: Coordinate the Work of this section with that of other sections to insure that the Work will be carried out in an orderly fashion. It shall be this Contractor's responsibility to check the Contract Documents for possible conflicts between his Work and that of other crafts in equipment location, pipe, duct and conduit runs, electrical outlets and fixtures, air diffusers, and structural and architectural features. Building Automation System Section 15963 - 2 APA 07.08 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire Station #48 A. The Manufacturer of the FMCS digital controllers shall provide documentation supporting compliance with ISO-9001 (Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation and Servicing). Product literature provided by the FMCS digital controller manufacturer shall contain the ISO-9001 Certification Mark from the applicable registrar. B. The installing control contractor shall have at least 5 years experience installing and maintaining similar systems and shall have a staff of certified control engineers within 50 miles of the project site. 1.9 ACCEPTABLE CONTROL SYSTEMS: A. Basis of design is Trane JACE System B. This is an expansion of an existing City of Clearwater control network and therefore must be fully compatible with the existing front-end software already installed in the City maintenance office. C. Bidders desiring to supply a product shall resubmit at least 10 days prior to bid day. Cut sheets and full descriptions of what they would like to supply. Any submitted controls and equipment must be based on LON controllers and Ethernet based communication. 1.10 SPECIFICATION NOMENCLATURE A. Acronyms used in this specification are as follows: FMCS Facility Management and Control System NAC Network Area Controller TLC Interoperable LonMark Controller IDC Interoperable Digital Controller IBC Interoperable BACnet Controller GUI Graphical User Interface HMI Human-Machine Interface POT Portable Operator's Terminal PMI Power Measurement Interface DDC Direct Digital Controls LAN Local Area Network OOT Object Oriented Technology PIGS Product Interoperability Compliance Statement Building Automation System Section 15963 - 3 APA 07.08 PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 GENERAL Fire Station 448 A. The Facility Management Control System (FMCS) shall be comprised of a network of interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers, a host computer system with graphical user interface software, portable operator terminals, modems, printers and other devices as specified herein. B. The installed system shall provide secure password access to all features, functions and data contained in the overall FMCS. 2.2 OPEN, INTEROPERABLE, INTEGRATED ARCHITECTURES A. The intent of this specification is to provide a peer-to-peer networked, stand-alone, distributed control system with the capability to integrate both the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-1995 BACnet and LonWorks technology communication protocols in one open, interoperable system. B. The supplied host computer software system shall employ object-oriented technology (OOT) for representation of all data and control devices within the system. In addition, adherence to industry standards including ANSI / ASHRAETM Standard 135-1995, BACnet and Lo.nMark to assure interoperability between all system components is required. The system supplier must provide a PICS document showing the installed systems compliance level. Minimum compliance is Level 3. C. All components and controllers supplied under this contract shall be true "peer-to-peer" communicating devices. Components or controllers requiring "polling" by a host to pass data shall not be acceptable. D. The supplied system must incorporate the ability to access all data using Java enabled browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration programs. An Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) or Structured Query Language (SQL) compliant server database is required for all system database parameter storage. This data shall reside on a supplier-installed server for all database access. Systems requiring proprietary database and user interface programs shall not be acceptable. E. Any mechanical equipment supplied by the project mechanical contractor such as RTU's, and the like shall have a factory installed LonWorks interface supplied with the product. F. A hierarchical topology is required to assure reasonable system response times and to manage the flow and sharing of data without unduly burdening the customer's internal Intranet network. Systems employing a "flat" single tiered architecture shall not be acceptable. 1. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 5 seconds for network connected user interfaces. 2. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 60 seconds for remote or dial-up connected user interfaces. Building Automation System Section 15963 - 4 APA 07.08 2.3 NETWORKS Fire Station 448 A. The Local Area Network (LAN) may be either a 10 or 100 Megabits/sec Ethernet network supporting BACnet, Java, XML, HTTP, and CORBA HOP for maximum flexibility for integration of building data with enterprise information systems and providing support for multiple Network Area Controllers (NACs), user workstations and, if specified, a local host computer system. B. Client access to the system shall be via the Internet from a remote location and from a local host computer system by direct connection to the Ethernet LAN. The FMCS supplier must provide a connection to the Internet to enable this access via high-speed cable modem, asynchronous digital subscriber line (ADSL) modem, or via the Intranet to a corporate server providing access to an Internet Service Provider (ISP), where available. Customer agrees to pay monthly access charges for connection and ISP. 2.4 NETWORK AREA CONTROLLER (NAC) A. The NAC shall provide the interface between the LAN the WEB and the field controllers. B. The NAC shall provide multiple user access to the system and support for ODBC or SQL. An embedded database resident on the NAC must be an ODBC-compliant database or must provide an ODBC data access or must provide an ODBC data access mechanism to read and write data stored within it. A minimum offering would be the documentation of database schemes to allow users to read/write data into other applications using appropriate ODBC syntax. C. The NAC must provide all tools for Java enabled Web browser access via the Intranet/Internet. It shall support a minimum of 30 simultaneous users in its minimum configuration. Multiple NAC configurations will use only one web access module. D. Event Alarm Notification and Actions 1. The NAC shall provide alarm recognition, storage; routing, management, and analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers. Object alarm properties shall conform to the alarm properties as defined in the BACnet specification. 2. The NAC shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location whether connected to a local network or remote via dial-up, telephone connection, or wide-area network. 3. Alarms shall have the capability to be routed to e-mail messages and paging services that support receipt of e-mail messages. 4. The NAC shall provide a timed (scheduled) routing of alarms by object, group or code. 5. The NAC shall include a master clock service for its subsystems and provide time synchronization for all distributed controllers. The NAC shall also accept time synchronization messages from trusted precision Atomic Internet Clock sites as may be selected to update its master clock time. E. Data Collection and Storage 1. The NAC shall be provided with the ability to collect data for any property of any object and store this data for future use. 2. The data collection shall be performed by a log object that shall have, at a minimum, the following configurable properties: a. Designating the log as interval or deviation. Building Automation System Section 15963 - 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 b. For interval logs, the object shall be configured for time of day, day of week and the sample collection interval. C. For deviation logs, the object shall be configured for the deviation of a variable to a fixed value. This value, when reached, will initiate logging of the object. d. For all logs, provide the ability to set the maximum number of data stores and to set whether the log will stop collecting when full, or rollover the data on a first-in, first-out basis. F. The building controller (NAC) shall include an operator display allowing the user to perform basic daily operations tasks on the building automation system. At a minimum this operator display shall: 1. Be installed on the building controller and require no additional power source. 2. Consist of a one-quarter VGA touch screen with 320 x 240 pixel resolution. The brightness and contrast of the back-lit touch screen shall be adjustable to allow for easy reading of information on the screen. 3. Be capable of having unique user identification and passwords that can be programmed to limit access to the system and operator functions. 4. Display the current state of an input/output point and equipment controller connected to the system. 5. Give the operator the ability to override the current state of an output point or HVAC equipment controller connected to the building controller. 6. Allow the operator to modify the start and stop times of any time-of-day schedule within the system. 7. Provide a visual indication that a system alarm exists and allow for an optional audible alarm annunciation. 8. Provide the ability to view and acknowledge alarms that are annunciated at that building controller. 9. Allow the operator to view custom graphical displays with dynamic status information. 10. Automatically update displayed system information every 10 seconds. 2.5 INTEROPERABLE LONMARK CONTROLLER (ILC) A. Controls shall be microprocessor based Interoperable LONMARK Controllers (ILC), bearing the applicable LONMARK interoperability logo on each product delivered. ILCs shall be provided for applications as shown on the drawings. ILCs shall be based on the Echelon Neuron 3150 microprocessor working from software program memory, which is physically located in the ILC. The application control program shall be resident within the same enclosure as the input/output circuitry, which translates the sensor signals. B. To simplify controls and mechanical service troubleshooting, the ILC shall be mounted directly in the control compartment of the unitary system. The ILC shall be provided with a sheet metal or polymeric enclosure that is constructed of material allowing for the direct mounting within the primary air stream, as defined by UL-465. The direct mounting shall allow all controls maintenance and troubleshooting to be made while at the unitary equipment. C. The ILCs shall communicate with the NAC at a baud rate of not less than 78.8K baud. The ILC shall provide LED indication of communication and controller performance to the technician, without cover removal. Building Automation System Section 15963 - 6 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 D. The ILCs shall be fully supported and communicate with the FMCS Graphical User Interface (GUI). E. The TLC Sensor shall connect directly to the TLC and shall not utilize any of the 1/0 points of the controller. The TLC Sensor shall provide a two-wire connection to the controller that is polarity and wire type insensitive. The TLC Sensor shall provide a communications jack for connection to the LON communication trunk to which the TLC controller is connected. The TLC Sensor, the connected controller, and all other devices on the LON bus shall be accessible by the POT. F. All input/output signals shall be directly hardwired to the TLC. For all non-VAV terminal applications, a minimum of two input points of the TLC shall employ a universal configuration that allows for flexibility in application ranging from dry contact, resistive, to voltage/current sourced inputs. If universal points are not available, a minimum of two input points (each) of the dry contact, resistive and analog voltage/current types must be provided on every controller. The outputs of the TLC shall be of the relay and universal analog form. All digital outputs shall be relay type. TLC devices utilizing non-relay outputs shall provide an interface relay for all points. All analog outputs shall be programmable for their start points and span to accommodate the control devices. Configuration of all I/O points shall be accomplished without physical hardware jumpers, switches or settings. Troubleshooting of input/output signals shall be easily executed with the POT or a volt-ohm meter (VOM). All 1/0 points shall be utilized by the local TLC or shall be available as I/O points for other controllers throughout the network. G. All ILCs shall be fully application programmable and shall at all times maintain their LONMARK certification. Controllers offering application selection only (non-programmable), require a 10% spare point capacity to be provided for all applications. All control sequences within or programmed into the TLC shall be stored in non-volatile memory, which is not dependent upon the presence of a battery, to be retained. H. The TLC shall be provided with the ability to interface with the POT. The interface port shall be provided at the wall sensor or within the unitary equipment, as specified on the plans. The interface port shall allow the POT to have full functionality as described in POT section of this specification. 2.6 INTEROPERABLE DIGITAL CONTROLLER (IDC) A. Controls shall be microprocessor based Interoperable LonWorks Digital Controllers (IDC), providing interoperability with all LONMARK and LonWorks devices. IDCs shall be provided for any equipment applications as required, as shown on the drawings. IDCs shall be based on the Echelon Neuron Hosted microprocessor architecture, working from software program memory that is physically located in the IDC. The application control program shall be resident within the same enclosure as the input/output circuitry, which translates the sensor signals. B. All IDCs shall be fully application programmable utilizing graphical objects. All control sequences programmed into the IDC shall be stored in non-volatile memory, which is not dependent upon the presence of a battery, to be retained. Systems that only allow selection of sequences from a library or table are not acceptable C. The IDC shall be provided with the ability to interface with the POT. The interface port shall allow the POT to have full functionality as described in POT section of this specification. Through the interface port all IDC devices on the LON bus shall be accessible by the POT. Building Automation System Section 15963 - 7 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 D. The IDCs shall communicate with the NAC at a baud rate of not less than 78.8K baud. The IDC shall have as a minimum ambient operating temperature range of 32 to 122 degrees Fahrenheit E. The IDC shall be fully supported by the Graphical User Interface (GUI). F. All input/output signals shall be directly hardwired to the IDC. All controllers shall employ a universal input configuration that allows for flexibility in application ranging from dry contact, resistive and voltage/current-source inputs. If universal points are not available, a minimum of one spare input point (each) of the dry contact, resistive and analog voltage/current types must be provided for each input point utilized. IDC devices shall provide digital and analog output types and quantities consistent with the requirements of the application requirements. Troubleshooting of input/output signals shall be easily executed with the POT or a volt-ohm meter (VOM). All 1/0 points shall be utilized by the local ILC or shall be available as I/O points for other controllers throughout the network. 2.7 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING A. A library of control, application, and graphical objects shall be provided to enable the creation of all applications and user interface screens. Applications are to be created by selecting the desired control objects from the library, dragging or pasting them on the screen, and "wiring" them together using a built in graphical connection tool. Completed applications may be stored in the library for future use. Graphical User screens are created in the same fashion. Data for the user screens is obtained by graphically linking the user screen objects to the application objects to provide "real-time" data updates. Any real-time data value or object property may be connected to display its current value on a user screen. Systems requiring separate software tools or processes to create applications and user interface screens shall not be acceptable. B. Programming Methods 1. Provide the capability to copy objects from the supplied libraries, or from a user-defined library to the user's application. Objects shall be linked by a graphical soft-wiring scheme by dragging a link from one object to another. Object links will support one-to-one, many-to-one, or one-to-many relationships. Linked objects shall maintain their connections to other objects regardless of where they positioned on the page and shall show link identification for links to objects on other pages for easy identification. Links will vary in color depending on the type of link; i.e., internal, external, hardware, etc. 2. Configuration of each object will be done through the object's property sheet using fill-in the blank fields, list boxes, and selection buttons. Use of custom programming, scripting language, or a manufacturer-specific procedural language for configuration will not be accepted. The software shall provide the ability to view the logic in a monitor mode. When on-line, the monitor mode will provide the ability to view the logic in real time for easy diagnosis of the logic execution. When off-line, the monitor mode will allow the user to set values to inputs and monitor the logic for diagnosing execution before it is applied to the system. 4. All programming shall be done in real-time. Uploading, editing, and downloading of database objects shall not be allowed. Building Automation System Section 15963 - 8 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 5. The system shall support object duplication within a customer's database. An application, once configured, can be copied and pasted for easy re-use and duplication. All links, other than to the hardware, shall be maintained during duplication. 3.8 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE SOFTWARE, EXISTING A. A graphical user interface shall be included with the host computer system software. This user interface shall allow, with proper password access, full interaction with the system including, but not limited to, viewing and modifying data, database administration, configuration of communications parameters, password and security administration, programming and configuration of objects, receipt, routing and acknowledgement of alarms, and development of graphic screens. B. The user interface shall employ browser-like functionality for ease of navigation. It shall include a tree view for quick viewing of, and access to, the hierarchical structure of the database. In addition, menu-pull downs, and toolbars shall employ buttons, commands and navigation techniques similar to those in a commercially available Web Browser. These shall include, but are not limited to, forward/backward buttons, home button, and a context sensitive locator line (similar to a URL line), that displays the location and the selected object identification. 1. Graphic screens shall be developed using any drawing package capable of generating a .GIF, BMP, or .JPG file format. Use of proprietary graphic file formats shall not be acceptable. In addition to, or in lieu of, a graphic background, the user interface shall support the use of scanned pictures. 2. Graphics developed for the user interface shall be capable of being used by a standard Web Browser client, without the need to develop additional graphic screens specifically for the Web Browser. Graphics used by the Web Browser client(s) shall be capable of being edited using a standard HTML document editor. 3. Graphic screens shall have the capability to be overlaid with text; real-time values command and adjust, animation, color spectrum, logs, graphs, HTML document links, and schedule graphic objects, as well as links to other graphic screens. 4. Modifying common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points shall be accomplished in a graphical manner. 5. Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator. 6. Using a graphical calendar, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator, shall set holidays. 7. Commands issued to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu. No entry of text shall be required. 8. Right-clicking the selected object and using a graphical slider to adjust the value shall do adjustments to analog objects, such as set points. No entry of text shall be required. C. Alarm Console 1. The system will be provided with a dedicated alarm window or console. This window will notify the operator of an alarm condition, and allow the operator to view details of the alarm and acknowledge the alarm. 2. A separate alarm notification window will supersede all other windows on the desktop and shall not be capable of being minimized or closed by the operator. This window will notify the operator of new alarms and un-acknowledged alarms. Alarm notification windows or banners that can be minimized or closed by the operator shall not be acceptable. Building Automation System Section 15963 - 9 APA 07.08 2.9 WEB BROWSER CLIENTS Fire Station 448 A. The system shall be capable of supporting an unlimited number of clients using a standard Web Browser such as Internet Explorer TM. Systems requiring additional software resident on the client machine or manufacture-specific browsers shall not be acceptable. B. The Web Browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions: 1. User log-on identification and password shall be required. If an unauthorized user attempts access, a blank web page shall be displayed. Security using Java authentication techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall be implemented. 2. Graphical screens developed for the GUI shall be the same screens used for the Web Browser client. Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the system, without requiring any graphics to be stored on the client machine. Systems that require graphics storage on each client are not acceptable. 3. Depending on user access privileges, the user shall be able to view data, modify and command objects such as start/stop, and adjust set points. In addition, users can be provided with the ability to view logs and view and acknowledge alarms. 4. The system shall provide the capability to specify a user's (as determined by the log-on user identification) home page. The capability to limit the user to just their home page shall be provided. From the home page, links to other views, or pages in the system shall be possible. 5. Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support hypertext links to other Web pages on other Internet or Intranet sites. 2.10 OBJECT LIBRARIES A. A standard library of objects shall be included for development and setup of application logic, user interface displays, system services, and communication networks. B. The objects in this library shall be capable of being copied and pasted into the user's database and shall be organized according to their function. In addition, the user shall have the capability to group objects created in their application and store the new instances of these objects in a user- defined library. C. In addition to the standard libraries specified here, the supplier of the system shall maintain an on- line accessible (over the Internet) library, available to all registered users to provide new or updated objects and applications as they are developed. D. The library shall include applications or objects for the following functions: 1. Scheduling Object. Provide a BACnet compliant, 7-day plus holiday & temporary scheduling object to allow for a minimum of 10 on/off events per day. Data entry to be by graphical sliders to speed creation and selection of on-off events. 2. Calendar Object. Provide a BACnet compliant 12-month calendar object to allow for holiday or special event data entry. Data entry to be by graphical "point-and-click" selection. This object must be "linkable" to any or all scheduling objects for effective event control. 3. Duty Cycling Object. Provide a universal duty cycle object to allow repetitive on/off time control of equipment as an energy conserving measure. Any number of these objects may be created to control equipment at varying intervals 4. Temperature Override Object. Provide a temperature override object that is capable of overriding equipment turned off by other energy saving programs (scheduling, duty cycling etc.) to maintain occupant comfort or for equipment freeze protection. Building Automation System Section 15963 - 10 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 5. Start-Stop Time Optimization Object. Provide a start-stop time optimization object to provide the capability of starting equipment just early enough to bring space conditions to desired conditions by the scheduled occupancy time. Also, allow equipment to be stopped before the scheduled un-occupancy time just far enough ahead to take advantage of the building's "flywheel" effect for energy savings. Provide automatic tuning of all start / stop time object properties based on the previous day's performance. 6. Demand Limiting Object. Provide a comprehensive demand-limiting object that is capable of controlling demand for any selected energy utility (electric, oil, and gas). The object shall provide the capability of monitoring a demand value and predicting (by use of a sliding window prediction algorithm) the demand at the end of the user defined interval period (1-60 minutes). This object shall also accommodate a utility meter time sync pulse for fixed interval demand control. Upon a prediction that will exceed the user defined demand limit (supply a minimum of 6 per day), the demand limiting object shall issue shed commands to either turn off user specified loads or modify equipment set points to effect the desired energy reduction. If the list of sheddable equipment is not enough to reduce the demand to below the set point, a message shall be displayed on the users screen (as an alarm) instructing the user to take manual actions to maintain the desired demand. The shed lists are specified by the user and shall be selectable to be shed in either a fixed or rotating order to control which equipment is shed the most often. Upon suitable reductions in demand, the demand-limiting object shall restore the equipment that was shed in the reverse order in which it was shed. Each sheddable object shall have a minimum and maximum shed time property to effect both equipment protection and occupant comfort. E. At a minimum, the library shall include services to support LonWorks and BACnet networks. F. The library shall include control objects for the following functions at a minimum: 1. Analog Input Object - Minimum requirement is to meet the BACnet standard for data sharing. Allow high, low and failure limits to be assigned for alarming. Also, provide a time delay filter property to prevent nuisance alarms caused by temporary excursions above or below the user defined alarm limits. 2. Analog Output Object - Minimum requirement is to meet the BACnet standard for data sharing. 3. Binary Input Object - Minimum requirement is to meet the BACnet standard for data sharing. The user must be able to specify either input condition for alarming. This object must also include the capability to record equipment run-time by counting the amount of time the hardware input is in an "on" condition. The user must be able to specify either input condition as the "on" condition. 4. Binary Output Object - Minimum requirement is to meet the BACnet standard for data sharing. Properties to enable minimum on and off times for equipment protection as well as interstart delay must be provided. The BACnet Command Prioritization priority scheme must also be incorporated to allow multiple control applications to execute commands on this object with the highest priority command being invoked. Provide sixteen levels of priority as a minimum. Systems not employing this contention resolution shall not be acceptable. 5. PID Control Loop Object - Minimum requirement is to meet the BACnet standard for data sharing. Each individual property must be adjustable as well as to be disabled to allow proportional control only, or proportional with integral control, as well as proportional, integral and derivative control. Building Automation System Section 15963 - 11 APA 07.08 Fire Station 948 6. Comparison Object - Allow a minimum of two analog objects to be compared to select either the highest, lowest, or equality between the two linked inputs. Also, allow limits to be applied to the output value for alarm generation. 7. Math Object - Allow a minimum of four analog objects to be tested for the minimum or maximum, or the sum, difference, or average of linked objects. Also, allow limits to be applied to the output value for alarm generation. 8. Custom Programming Objects - Provide a blank object template for the creation of new custom objects to meet specific user application requirements. This object must provide a simple BASIC-like programming language that is used to define object behavior. Provide a library of functions including math and logic functions, string manipulation, and e-mail as a minimum. Also, provide a comprehensive on-line debug tool to allow complete testing of the new object.. Allow new objects to be stored in the library for re-use. 9. Interlock Object - Provide an interlock object that provides a means of coordination of objects within a piece of equipment such as an Air Handler or other similar types of equipment. An example is to link the return fan to the supply fan such that when the supply fan is started, the return fan object is also started automatically without the user having to issue separate commands or to link each object to a schedule object. In addition, the control loops, damper objects, and alarm monitoring (such as return air, supply air, and mixed air temperature objects) will be inhibited from alarming during a user-defined period after startup to allow for stabilization. When the air handler is stopped, the interlocked return fan is also stopped, the outside air damper is closed, and other related objects within the air handler unit are inhibited from alarming thereby eliminating nuisance alarms during the off period. 10. Temperature Override Object - Provide an object whose purpose is to provide the capability of overriding a binary output to an "On" state in the event a user specified high or low limit value is exceeded. This object is to be linked to the desired binary output object as well as to an analog object for temperature monitoring, to cause the override to be enabled. This object will execute a Start command at the Temperature Override level of start/stop command priority unless changed by the user. 11. Composite Object - Provide a container object that allows a collection of objects representing an application to be encapsulated to protect the application from tampering, or to more easily represent large applications. This object must have the ability to allow the user to select the appropriate parameters of the "contained" application that are represented on the graphical shell of this container. G. The object library shall include objects to support common LonMark devices. These devices shall include, but not be limited to, devices for control of HVAC, lighting, access, and metering. 2.11 HOST COMPUTER HARDWARE (PC), EXISTING A. The PC shall be an Intel Pentium or AMD based computer (minimum processing speed of 2400 MHz with 512 MB RAM, expandable to 2 GB and a 40-gigabyte minimum hard drive, integrated Ethernet). It shall include a 48X CD-ROM drive, 3.5" floppy drive, 1-parallel ports, 2- asynchronous serial ports and 4-USB ports. A minimum 17", 28-dot pitch SVGA color monitor with a minimum 80 Hz refresh rate shall also be included. Windows XP Pro. B. A system printer shall be provided. Printer shall be ink jet type with a minimum 1200 x 1200-dpi resolution and rated for 20-PPM print speed minimum. The printer shall be a HP 6122 or approved equal. Building Automation System Section 15963 - 12 APA 07.08 Fire Station 948 2.12 PORTABLE OPERATOR'S TERMINAL (LAPTOP COMPUTER), ALTERNATE A. The Portable Operator's Terminal shall consist of an Intel Pentium or AMD based laptop computer (minimum processing speed of 1900 MHz with 256 MB RAM and a 30-gigabyte minimum bard drive, integrated Ethernet, 56k baud internal modem). It shall include a CD-ROM drive; a 3.5" floppy drive and appropriate connectors and cables for communication connection to the LonWorks networks and Ethernet. Windows XP Pro. 2.12 Temperature Sensors: A. Each room thermostat shall provide temperature indication to the digital controller; provide the capability for a software-limited set point adjustment and operation override capability. An integral LCD shall annunciate current room temperature and set point as well as override status indication. In addition, the thermostat shall include a port for connection of the portable operator's terminal described elsewhere in this specification. B. Duct Mount, Pipe Mount and Outside Air Temperature Sensors: 10,000-ohm thermistor (or 1000 ohm RTD) temperature sensors with an accuracy of f 2° F. Outside air sensors shall be mounted in an outdoor housing and shall include an integral sun shield. 2.13 Other Devices A. Current Sensitive Switches (DI): Solid state, split core (or solid core) current switch that operates when the current level (sensed by the internal current transformer) exceeds the adjustable trip point. Current switch to include an integral LED for indication of trip condition and a current level below trip set point. Select switch range so that the sensed current falls in the center of the range. B. Current Sensitive Transducer(AI): Solid state, split core (or solid sore) current transducer that continuously monitors the current flow and transmits this reading (4-20 ma) to the controller.. Select transducer range so that the sensed current falls in the center of the range. C. Power Monitoring Interface: The Power Measurement Interface (PMI) device shall include the appropriate current and potential (voltage) transformers. The PMI shall be certified under UL- 3111. The PMI shall perform continuous true RMS measurement based on 32 samples-per-cycle sampling on all voltage and current signals. The PMI shall provide outputs to the FMCS based on the measurement and calculation of the following parameters: (a) current for each phase and average of all three phases, (b) kW for each phase and total of all three phases, (c) power factor for each phase and all three phases, (d) percent voltage unbalance and (e) percent current unbalance. These output values shall be communicated to the FMCS over the open-protocol LON bus. D. Humidity sensors shall be 3% accuracy with a 4-20 ma output and shall be wall, duct or outdoor mounting as per plans. Locate at the direction of the engineer. Humidity sensor shall be a Vaisala HMW60U (wall), HMD60U (duct) or Trane 4190-7019 (wall), 4190-7020 (duct). E. Temperature Control Panels: Furnish metal temperature control panels with locking doors for mounting all devices as shown. All external wiring shall be connected to terminal strips mounted within the panel, in addition to the terminal strips that may be on the controller board. Provide engraved phenolic nameplates identifying all devices mounted on the face of control panels. A complete set of `as-built' control drawings (relating to the controls within that panel) shall be Building Automation System Section 15963 - 13 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 furnished within each control panel. No control devices, controllers or equipment will be mounted directly, without a control enclosure and terminal strip. F. C02 Sensor: 1. Space mounted (duct mounted) C02 sensors shall be provided in locations noted on the plan or as specified in the sequence of operations. 2. Sensors shall provide an analog signal proportional to their measurement range. Measurement range shall be a minimum 0 to 2000 parts per million C02. 3. Sensors shall be capable of 4-20 ma output proportional to the sensed C02- 4. Sensor accuracy shall be within +/- 100 ppm in measurements from 0-2000 parts per million. 5. Sensor shall be Vaisala GMW25 (wall) or GMD20 (duct) or Trane model # 4190-4100 (wall) or #4190-4101 (duct) where applicable. PART 2 EXECUTION OF PROJECT 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All work described in this section shall be installed, wired, circuit tested and calibrated by factory certified technicians qualified for this work and in the regular employment of the temperature control system manufacturer or its exclusive factory authorized installing contracting field office. B. Actual physical field wiring, conduit, etc. may be performed by a controls installation sub- contractor under the direct supervision, contract and direction of the installing controls contractor. C. The installing office shall have a minimum of five (5) years installation experience with the manufacturer and shall provide documentation in submittal package verifying longevity of the installing company's relationship with the manufacturer. Supervision, calibration and checkout of the system shall be by the employees of the local exclusive factory authorized temperature control contracting field office (branch or representative). D. Install system and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as detailed on the project drawing set. E. Drawings of temperature control systems are diagrammatic only and any apparatus not shown, such as relays, accessories, etc., but required to make the system operative to the complete satisfaction of the Architect shall be furnished and installed without additional cost. F. Low voltage electrical connections to control equipment shown specified or shown on the control diagrams shall be furnished and installed by the Temperature Control sub-contractor in accordance with these specifications. G. Equipment furnished by the HVAC Contractor that is normally wired before installation shall be furnished completely wired. Control wiring normally performed in the field will be furnished and installed by the Temperature Control contractor. Building Automation System Section 15963 - 14 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 H. All control devices shall be installed inside of rated control enclosures. Enclosures shall be sized to accommodate the control devices, plus room for at least one expansion device of the same type. No control devices, programmable controllers, interface boards, etc. shall be mounted directly to any mechanical room wall or any piece of mechanical equipment without a protective enclosure. Each enclosure shall have a terminal strip, sized for at least 18 ga. Wire, for landing field wiring; that is separate from the controller terminal strip as to accommodate removal of the controller without de-wiring the controller. These terminal strips are required even if the controller has "pluggable" wiring terminals. All control devices mounted on the face of control panels shall be clearly identified as to function and system served with permanently engraved phenolic labels. These devices are limited to keypads and other operator interfaces. 3.2 WIRING A. All electrical control wiring to the control panels shall be the responsibility of the FMCS contractor. B. The electrical contractor (Div. 16) shall furnish all power wiring to electrical starters and motors and power circuits to the control panels. C. All wiring shall be in accordance with the Project Electrical Specifications (Division 16), the National Electrical Code and any applicable local codes. All FMCS wiring shall be installed in the conduit types specified in the Project Electrical Specifications (Division 16) unless otherwise allowed by the National Electrical Code or applicable local codes. Plenum rated cable wiring (for low voltage control wiring) is allowed and it shall be run parallel to or at right angles to the structure, properly supported and installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, in concealed spaces only. 3.3 WARRANTY A. Equipment, materials and workmanship incorporated into the work shall be warranted for a period of one (1) year from the time of system acceptance. Further a 2"d year control system maintenance and check-up program shall be included with 4 inspections per year (quarterly) lasting at least 8 hours each. B. Within the one year warranty period, upon notice by the Owner, any defects in the FMCS due to faulty materials, methods of installation or workmanship shall be promptly (within 48 hours after receipt of notice) repaired or replaced by the Temperature Control sub-contractor at no expense to the Owner 3.4 WARRANTY ACCESS A. The Owner shall grant to the Temperature Control sub-contractor, reasonable access to the FMCS during the warranty period. The owner shall provide at no cost to the contractor, an Internet address for remote communication to the FMCS during this period. B. The Temperature Control sub-contractor shall provide and implement the remote diagnostics and notification of desired exceptions. Building Automation System Section 15963 - 15 APA 07.08 3.5 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING: Fire Station #48 A. Upon completion of the installation, the Temperature Control sub-contractor shall load all system software and start-up the system. The Temperature Control sub-contractor shall perform all necessary calibration, testing and de-bugging and perform all required operational checks to insure that the system is functioning in full accordance with these specifications. B. The Temperature Control sub-contractor shall perform tests to verify proper performance of components, routines, and points. Repeat tests until proper performance results. This testing shall include a point-by-point log to validate 100% of the input and output points of the DDC system operation. C. Upon completion of the performance tests described above, repeat these tests, point by point as described in the validation log above in presence of Owner's Representative, as required. Properly schedule these tests so testing is complete at a time directed by the Owner's Representative. Do not delay tests so as to prevent delay of occupancy permits or building occupancy. This witness test shall be at the discretion of the owner. D. System. Acceptance: Satisfactory completion is when the Temperature Control sub-contractor has performed successfully all the required testing to show performance compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. System acceptance shall be contingent upon completion and review of all corrected deficiencies. 3.6 OPERATOR INSTRUCTION, TRAINING A. During system commissioning and at such time acceptable performance of the FMCS hardware and software has been established the Temperature Control sub-contractor shall provide on-site operator instruction to the owner's operating personnel. Operator instruction shall be done during normal working hours and shall be performed by a competent representative familiar with the system hardware, software and accessories. B. The Temperature Control sub-contractor shall provide 8 hours of instruction to the owner's designated personnel on the operation of the FMCS and describe its intended use with respect to the programmed functions specified. Operator orientation of the FMCS shall include, but not be limited to; the overall operation program, equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total integrated system), commands, systems generation, advisories, and appropriate operator intervention required in responding to the System's operation. C. The training shall be in sessions as follows: 1. Initial Training: session (4 hours) after system is started up and at least one week before first acceptance test. Manual shall have been submitted at least two weeks prior to training so that the owners' personnel can start to familiarize them with the system before classroom instruction begins. 2. First Follow-Up Training: sessions (4 hours total) approximately two weeks after initial training, and before Formal Acceptance. These sessions will deal with more advanced topics and answer questions. Building Automation System Section 15963 - 16 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 3.7 POINTS LIST A. Please refer to Mechanical plans for projects point lists. Building Automation System Section 15963 - 17 APA 07.08 Fire Station 948 SECTION 15980 - TEST AND BALANCE - FINAL PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Scope: HVAC Contractor shall provide the services of an independent test and balance agency to test, balance and certify the performance of the complete heating and air conditioning system, including supply and makeup air systems and all exhaust systems. 1.2 Job Requirements: The Contractor shall provide to the approved test and balance agency a complete set of plans and specifications and an approved copy of all heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment shop drawings. The Contractor shall include the cost of all pulley, belt, and drive changes, as well as balancing dampers required to achieve proper system balance recommended by the test and balance agency. 1.3 Agency Qualifications: The test and balance agency shall be an approved member of AABC or NEBB that specializes in testing and balancing of heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems. Acceptable: Test and Balance Corp. of Tampa, Phoenix Agency, Southern Independent Test and Balance or other agency approved by Engineer. 1.4 Guarantee: The test and balance agency shall include a warranty period of ninety (90) days after completion and acceptable of test and balance work. During the warranty period, the Architect may request a re-check or re-setting of any outlet, supply fan, exhaust fan, or pump. The test and balance agency shall provide technicians, instruments, and tools to assist the Architect in conducting any test that he may require during this time. The foregoing shall be in addition to the A.A.M.C. National Project Certification Performance Guaranty which shall be forwarded with shop drawing data specified hereinbefore. 1.5 Perform all testing and balancing, adjusting and data recording necessary to establish and confirm capacity, quality and completed status of work. PART I PRODUCTS 2.1 Instruments used for test and balance shall have been calibrated within a period of six (6) months prior to the testing and balancing of this project. Letter of certification listing instrumentation used and last date of calibration shall be furnished to Architect with test report. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 National Standards: Testing and balancing shall be performed in accordance with A.A.B.C. National Standards. 3.2 Logs: Shall clearly indicate the following: A. All inlet and outlet areas. B. All applicable duct, pipe and coil sizes. C. Outside, inside, mixed and supply air conditions. D. All fluid velocities, flow rates, temperatures and pressures at significant locations (e.g., fluid pressures before and after each pump and fan, temperatures and pressures at supply and return headers and at chiller and boiler inlets and outlets, etc.) Test and Balance - Final 15980 - 1 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 E. All fan speeds. F. All motor ampere ranges. G. Descriptions of each test method used. H. Use Associated Air Balance Council log and data forms. 3.3 Adjust and calibrate all applicable items (e.g., controls, dampers, registers, diffusers, balancing cocks, valves, thermometers, gauges, etc.). 3.4 Set all distribution devices to properly distribute conditioned air. 3.5 Check all safety devices for proper operation. 3.6 Verify adequacy, acceptable quietness and proper continuous operation of at least 24 hours duration of all motors, compressors, pumps, fans, etc. 3.7 Perform spot check tests or complete tests to fully reconfirm prior test results if required by the Architect as dependent upon extent, completeness and accuracy of prior tests and logs. Do in Architect's presence if called for. 3.8 After air distribution devices have been balanced to distribute calculated design indicated air quantities and if temperature in any area (where such area does not have the particular zone temperature control thermostat located therein) of any zone is not maintained within 2 degrees plus or minus of the zone area which does have the zone temperature control thermostat, then notify the Architect in writing of such conditions and obtain Architect's approval to rebalance devices to obtain air quantities other than those indicated so that air temperature in entire zone will be as even as possible regardless of calculated design air quantities. After obtaining Architect's written approval to rebalance, perform such necessary rebalancing. 3.9 When the mechanical work is in a state of readiness for test and balance work to proceed, the test and balance contractor shall proceed with his work. If, upon this proceeding, the test and balance contractor determines that there are other items of the work (control items, sheet metal items and/or other similar specialties and proper completion of which affects the ability of the test and balance contractor to properly perform his work) which have not been completed to an extent which will allow him to complete test and balance work, then he shall make a detailed written report of these items and shall send written notification to the Contractor of such incomplete work. The Contractor shall then send a copy of this report to the Architect. The test and balance work shall not proceed until these items are corrected; such correction shall be subject to approval of Architect. 3.10 All mechanical systems shall be balanced to optimum performance capabilities of the equipment and the design. This shall be done in accordance with the standards published by the Associated Air Balance Council unless otherwise indicated. 3.11 Report: Upon completion of all testing and balancing and prior to requesting final inspection and acceptance of the project, submit three (3) complete copies of the Test and Balance Report to the Architect/Engineer for approval. No final inspection will be conducted until the final Test and Balance Report has been accepted by the Engineer. Measurements shall be taken by methods recommended in the 1989 AABC (Associated Air Balance Council) National Standards. All reports submitted for review shall contain all of the information required in the reports shown in Chapter 27 of the 1989 AABC National Standards. Test and Balance - Final 15980 - 2 APA 07.08 (End of Section 15980) Fire Station #48 Test and Balance - Final 15980 - 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes bonding methods and materials; conduit and equipment supports, anchors and fasteners; and nameplates and wire markers. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Select materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners, and supports to carry loads of equipment and raceway, including weight of wire and cable in raceway. Anchor and fasten electrical products to building elements and finishes as follows: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Expansion anchors and preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Beam clamps, spring steel clips and[welded fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Self-drilling anchors 1/4"minimum and expansion anchors3/8"minimum or as required by manufacturer. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Toggle bolts 1/4" minimum. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Expansion anchors and preset inserts. 6. Sheet Metal: Sheet metal screws 410 minimum. 7. Wood Elements: Wood screws #10 minimum. B. Identify Electrical components as follows: 1. Nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. 2. Wire marker for each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, and outlet and junction boxes. Label each outlet and junction box with circuits contained within. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog data for grounding electrodes and connections; for fastening components; and nameplates, labels, and markers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES A. Product Description: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic nameplate, black letters on white background. B. Letter Size: 1. 1/8" letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. 1/4" inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. 2.2 WIRE MARKERS A. Product Description: Cloth tape type wire markers with circuit or control wire number permanently stamped or printed. Basic Electrical Material and Methods 16050-1 APA 07.08 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Fire Station #48 A. Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel members. B. Install sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. C. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws or rivets. (End of Section 16050) Basic Electrical Material and Methods 16050-2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wire. 2. Mechanical connectors. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1. IEEE 142 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems. 2. IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment. B. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Grounding systems are existing B. Construct and test grounding systems for access flooring systems on conductive floors accordance with IEEE 1100. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. B. Product Data: Submit data on grounding electrodes and connections. C. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode: D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for active electrodes. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide grounding materials conforming to requirements of NEC, IEEE 142, and UL labeled. B. Perform Work in accordance with State of Florida Department of Management Services standard. C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. Grounding and Bonding 16060 - 1 APA 07.08 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS Fire Station #48 A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section - with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01.300 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging. D. Do not deliver items to project before time of installation. Limit shipment of bulk and multiple-use materials to quantities needed for immediate installation. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination. B. Complete grounding and bonding of building reinforcing steel prior concrete placement. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRE A. Material: Stranded copper. B. Bonding Conductor: Copper conductor insulated. 2.2 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS A. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Florida standards. B. Description: Bronze connectors, suitable for grounding and bonding applications, in configurations required for particular installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. Grounding and Bonding 16060 - 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove paint, rust, mill oils, surface contaminants at connection points. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install grounding and bonding conductors concealed from view. B. Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond to ground. C. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Install separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing. D. Permanently ground entire light and power system in accordance with NEC, including service equipment, distribution panels, lighting panelboards, switch and starter enclosures, motor frames, grounding type receptacles, and other exposed non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment. E. Install branch circuits feeding isolated ground receptacles with separate insulated grounding conductor, connected only at isolated ground receptacle, ground terminals, and at ground bus of serving panel. F. Accomplish grounding of electrical system by using insulated grounding conductor installed with feeders and branch circuit conductors in conduits. Size grounding conductors in accordance with NEC. Install from grounding bus of serving panel to ground bus of served panel, grounding screw of receptacles, lighting fixture housing, light switch outlet boxes or metal enclosures of service equipment. Ground conduits by means of grounding bushings on terminations at panelboards with installed conductor to grounding bus. G. Permanently attach equipment and grounding conductors prior to energizing equipment. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements 01700 - Execution Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4 C. Grounding and Bonding: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13. D. Perform ground resistance testing in accordance with IEEE 142. E. Perform leakage current tests in accordance with NFPA 99. F. Perform continuity testing in accordance with IEEE 142. G. When improper grounding is found on receptacles, check receptacles in entire project and correct. Perform retest. (End of Section 16060) Grounding and Bonding 16060 - 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 Grounding and Bonding 16060 - 4 APA 07.08 SECTION 16070 - ELECTRICAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Conduit supports. 2. Formed steel channel. 3. Spring steel clips. 4. Sleeves. 5. Mechanical sleeve seals. 6. Firestopping relating to electrical work. 7. Firestopping accessories. 8. Equipment bases and supports. 1.2 REFERENCES Fire Station #48 A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM El 19 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. 4. ASTM El 966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems. B. FM Global: 1. FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation. C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 4. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 5. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Firestopping Through-Penetration Protection System: Sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Firestopping Materials: ASTM El 19 ASTM E814 UL 263 UL 1479 to achieve fire ratings as noted on Drawings for adjacent construction, but not less than 1 hour fire rating. Electrical Hangers and Supports 16070-1 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 1. Ratings may be 3-hours for firestopping in through-penetrations of 4-hour fire rated assemblies unless otherwise required by applicable codes. B. Surface Burning: ASTM E84 UL 723 with maximum flame spread / smoke developed rating of 25/450. C. Firestop interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials, and components. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Firestopping: Conform to Florida Building Code FM UL for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. B. Firestopping: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location and detail of trapeze hangers. C. Product Data. 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. 2. Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria. D. Firestopping Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items, and required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent assembly. E. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze hangers and hangers and supports. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components. 2. Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation instructions. G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. H. Engineering Judgements: For conditions not covered by UL designs, submit judgements by licensed professional engineer suitable for presentation to authority having jurisdiction for acceptance as meeting code fire protection requirements. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Through Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies: UL 1479 or ASTM E814 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire F- Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour. 1. Wall Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1- hour. Electrical Hangers and Supports 16070-2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 2. Floor and Roof Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour. a. Floor Penetrations within Wall Cavities: T-Rating is not required. B. Through Penetration Firestopping of Non-Fire Rated Floor and Roof Assemblies: Materials to resist free passage of flame and products of combustion. 1. Noncombustible Penetrating Items: Noncombustible materials for penetrating items connecting maximum of three stories. 2. Penetrating Items: Materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction for penetrating items connecting maximum of two stories. C. Fire Resistant Joints in Fire Rated Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: UL 2079 to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for assembly in which joint is installed. D. Fire Resistant Joints between Floor Slabs and Exterior Walls: ASTM El 19 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for floor assembly. E. Surface Burning Characteristics: 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. F. Perform Work in accordance with State of Florida standard. G. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Pre- installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging. Electrical Hangers and Supports 16070-3 APA 07.08 1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Fire Station #48 A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. B. Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F. C. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of firestopping materials. D. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Electroline Manufacturing Company. 2. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Hanger Rods: Threaded high tensile strength galvanized carbon steel with free running threads'/4" minimum. C. Beam Clamps: Malleable Iron, with tapered hole in base and back to accept either bolt or hanger rod. Set screw: hardened steel. D. Conduit clamps for trapeze hangers: Galvanized steel, notched to fit trapeze with single bolt to tighten. E. Conduit clamps - general purpose: One hole malleable iron for surface mounted conduits. 2.2 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL A. Manufacturers: 1. Unistrut Corp. 2. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Product Description: stainless steel 302 12 gages thick. With holes 1-1/2 inches on center. 2.3 SLEEVES A. Furnish materials in accordance with Pinellas County standards. B. Sleeves for through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel. C. Sleeves for Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: PVC coated Steel pipe. D. Sleeves for Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed. Electrical Hangers and Supports 16070-4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 E. Fire-stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible. 2.4 FIRESTOPPING A. Manufacturers: 1. Specified Technology, Inc 2. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only one type for each similar application. 1. Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Single component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant. 2. Foam Firestopping Compounds: Single] component foam compound. 3. Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers. 4. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of mineral ceramic fiber stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping. 5. Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer, covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops. 6. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain. 7. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows. C. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2.5 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings. B. Dam Material: Permanent: 1. Mineral fiberboard. 2. Mineral fiber matting] 3. Sheet metal. 4. Alumina silicate fire board. C. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place. D. General: 1. Furnish UL listed products or products tested by independent testing laboratory. 2. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated. E. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where conduit is exposed. 2. For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish modular mechanical type seal consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between conduit and cored opening or water-stop type wall sleeve. Electrical Hangers and Supports 16070-5 APA 07.08 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Fire Station #48 A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves. C. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond. C. Install backing damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage.] D. Do not drill or cut structural members. 3.3 INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Anchors and fasteners shall be stainless steel 2. Concrete Structural Elements: Provide precast inserts, expansion anchors, and preset inserts. 3. Steel Structural Elements: Provide beam clamps, spring steel clips, and welded fasteners. 4. Concrete Surfaces: Provide self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 5. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Provide toggle bolts. 6. Solid Masonry Walls: Provide expansion anchors and preset inserts. 7. Sheet Metal: Provide sheet metal screws. 8. Wood Elements: Provide wood screws. B. Inserts: 1. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms. 2. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. 3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. 4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. 5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above recessed into and grouted flush with slab. C. Install conduit and raceway support and spacing in accordance with NEC. D. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. E. Install multiple conduit runs on common hangers. Electrical Hangers and Supports 16070-6 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 F. Supports: 1. Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel channel. Install hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Install spring lock washers under nuts. 2. Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. 3. In wet and damp locations install steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch off wall. 4. Support vertical conduit at every floor. 3.4 INSTALLATION - FIRESTOPPING A. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit and other items, requiring firestopping. S. Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings. C. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating, to uniform density and texture. D. Compress fibered material to maximum 40 percent of its uncompressed size] E. Place intumescent coating in sufficient coats to achieve rating required F. Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured.] G. Fire Rated Surface: 1. Seal opening at floor, wall, partition, ceiling, and roof as follows: a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element, b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of I inch void between sleeve and building element. C. Pack void with backing material. d. Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive silicone compound to meet fire rating of structure penetrated. 2. Where cable tray, bus, conduit, wireway, trough, and penetrates fire rated surface, install firestopping product in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Seal opening through non-fire rated wall, partition floor, ceiling, and roof opening] as follows: a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element. b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building element. C. Install type of firestopping material recommended by manufacturer. 2. Install escutcheons where conduit, penetrates non-fire rated surfaces in occupied spaces. Occupied spaces include rooms with finished ceilings and where penetration occurs below finished ceiling. Electrical Hangers and Supports 16070-7 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 3. Exterior wall openings below grade: Assemble rubber links of mechanical seal to size of conduit and tighten in place, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Interior partitions: Seal pipe penetrations at clean rooms, laboratories, hospital spaces] computer rooms, telecommunication rooms data room and. Apply sealant to both sides of penetration to completely fill annular space between sleeve and conduit. 3.5 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide housekeeping pads for free standing panels, switchboards and transformers of concrete, minimum 3-1/2 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond supported equipment. Refer to Section 03300. B. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct supports of steel members, or formed stainless steel channel. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. 3.6 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with adjustable interlocking rubber links. B. Conduit penetrations not required to be watertight: Sleeve and fill with silicon foam. C. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. D. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. E. Extend sleeves through floors finch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves. F. Where conduit or raceway penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between conduit or raceway and adjacent work with stuffing, fire stopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. G. Install stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements 01700 - Execution Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule. 3.8 CLEANING A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for cleaning. B. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. Electrical Hangers and Supports 16070-8 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work. B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. (End of Section 06070) Electrical Hangers and Supports 16070-9 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 16075 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates. 2. Labels. 3. Wire markers. 4. Conduit markers. 5. Stencils. 6. Underground Warning Tape. 7. Lockout Devices. B. Related Sections: I . Section - Paints and Coatings: Execution requirements for painting specified by this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's catalog literature for each product required. 2. Submit electrical identification schedule including list of wording, symbols, letter size, color coding, tag number, location, and function. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section - Execution Requirements: Requirements for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged devices; include tag numbers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Florida standard. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience. Electrical Identification 16075- 1 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Accept identification products on site in original containers. Inspect for damage. C. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. D. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. B. Install labels and nameplates only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions for adhesive are within range recommended by manufacturer. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section - Execution Requirements: Requirements for extra materials. B. Furnish two containers of spray-on adhesive. C. Furnish two blank nameplates for panels. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Thomas and Betts. 2. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on white contrasting background color. C. Letter Size: 1. 1/8 inch high letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. 1/4" inch high letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. D. Minimum nameplate thickness: 1/8 inch. 2.2 LABELS A. Manufacturers: 1. Thomas and Betts. 2. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on black background. Electrical Identification 16075 - 2 APA 07.08 2.3 WIRE MARKERS A. Manufacturers: I . Thomas and Betts. 2. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Description: Cloth tape type wire markers. Fire Station #48 C. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number as indicated on Drawings. 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number as indicated on shop drawings. 2.4 CONDUIT AND RACEWAY MARKERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Thomas and Betts 2. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Florida standards. C. Description: Labels fastened with adhesive]. D. Color: 1. Medium Voltage System: Black lettering on white background. 2. 480 Volt System: Black lettering on white background. 3. 208 Volt System: Black lettering on white background. 4. Fire Alarm System: Red lettering on white background. 5. Telephone System: Blue lettering on white background. 6. Communication System Blue lettering on White background. E. Legend: 1. Medium Voltage System: HIGH VOLTAGE 2. 480 Volt System: 480 VOLTS. HIGH VOLTAGE. 3. 208 Volt System: 208 VOLTS. 4. Fire Alarm System: FIRE ALARM. 5. Telephone System: TELEPHONE 6. Communication System: COMMUNICATION. 2.5. UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady. 2. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Description: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines. 2.6 LOCKOUT DEVICES A. Lockout Hasps: 1. Manufacturers: a. Square D Electrical Identification 16075 - 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 b. Substitutions: Permitted. 2. Anodized aluminum hasp with erasable label surface; size minimum 7-l/4 x 3 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09900 for stencil painting. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install identifying devices after completion of painting. B. Nameplate Installation: I. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. 2. Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. 3. Install nameplates for each control panel and major control components located outside panel with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. 4. Secure nameplate to equipment front using [screws] [, rivets] [, or] [adhesive]. 5. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed panelboard in finished locations. 6. Install nameplates for the following: a. Switchboards. b. Panelboards. C. Transformers. d. Service Disconnects. e. Telephone Cabinets. C. Label Installation: I . Install label parallel to equipment lines. 2. Install label for identification of individual control device stations, and telephone outlets. 3. Install labels for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. D. Wire Marker Installation: I. Install wire marker for each conductor at panelboard, gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes and each load connection. 2. Mark data cabling at each end. Install additional marking at accessible locations along the cable run. 3. Install labels at data outlets identifying patch panel and port designation. E. Conduit and Raceway Marker Installation: I. Install conduit and raceway marker for each conduit or raceway longer than 6 feet. 2. Conduit, Raceway Marker Spacing: 10 feet on center. 3. Raceway Painting: Identify conduit using field painting in accordance with Section 09900 Electrical Identification 16075 - 4 APA 07.08 a. Paint colored band on each conduit longer than 6 feet. b. Paint bands 10 feet on center. C. Color: 1) 480 Volt System: Blue. 2) 208 Volt System: Yellow 3) Fire Alarin System.: Red 4) Telephone System: Green. 5) Communication System: Orange F. Stencil Installation: I . Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09900. Fire Station #48 G. Underground Warning Tape Installation: 1. Install underground warning tape along length of each underground conduit, raceway, or cable 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried conduit, raceway, or cable. (End of Section 16075) Electrical Identification 16075 - 5 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 16100 - WIRING METHODS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes building wire and cable, conduit and tubing, surface raceway, boxes, wiring devices, wiring connectors, and connections. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Wiring Products: 1. Solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits ] 0 AWG and smaller. 2. Stranded conductors for control circuits. 3. Conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. 4. Conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits. 5. 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet B. Wiring Methods: 1. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. 2. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway 3. Above Accessible Ceilings: Building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway 4. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. 5. Exterior Locations: Building wire, Type XHHW insulation, in raceway. 6. Underground Locations: Building wire, Type XHHW insulation, in raceway C. Conductor shall be copper. D. Raceway and boxes are located as indicated on Drawings, and at other locations where required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements. E. Raceway Products: 1. Underground More than 5 Feet outside Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit. Use composite nonmetallic hand hole. 2. Underground within 5 Feet outside Foundation Wall: Use PVC coated rigid steel conduit. Use cast metal boxes. 3. In or Under Slab on Grade: Use PVC coated rigid steel conduit,. Use cast metal boxes. 4. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Use PVC coated rigid steel. Use cast metal outlet, pull, and junction boxes. 5. In Slab above Grade: Use PVC coated rigid steel conduit Use cast boxes. 6. Wet and Damp Locations: Use PVC coated rigid. Use cast metal, junction, and pull boxes. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. 7. Concealed Dry Locations: Use rigid steel conduit,. Use sheet-metal boxes. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Use hinged enclosure for large pull boxes. Wiring Methods 16100-1 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 8. Exposed Dry Locations: Use rigid steel. Use sheet-metal boxes. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Use hinged enclosure for large pull boxes. F. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4"inch unless otherwise specified. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog information for each wiring device. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY A. Manufacturers: 1. Walker. 2. Substitutions: Permitted . B. Product Description: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface metal raceway, with manufacturer's standard enamel finish. Furnish manufacturer's standard accessories; match finish on raceway. 2.2 WIREWAY A. Manufacturers: 1. Walker. 2. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Product Description: General purpose Rain tight type wireway with hinged screw cover and manufacturer's stainless steel finish. 2.3 WALL SWITCHES A. Single Pole Switch: 1. Leviton Model. 1121-2W 2. Hubbell 3. Slater 4. Substitutions: Not Permitted. B. Double Pole Switch: 1. Leviton Model.) 122-2W 2. Hubbell 3. Slater 4. Substitutions: Not Permitted. C. Three-way Switch: 1. Leviton Model. 1123-2W 2. Hubbell 3. Slater 4. Substitutions: Not Permitted. D. Four-way Switch: 1. Leviton Model, 1124-2W Wiring Methods 16100 - 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 2. Hubbell 3. Slater 4. Substitutions: Not Permitted. E. Indicator Switch: 1. Leviton Model.] 121-7PC 2. Hubbell 3. Slater 4. Substitutions: Not Permitted. F. Locator Switch: 1. Leviton Modell 121-71-W 2. Hubbell 3. Slater 4. Substitutions: Not Permitted. G. Color: White. 2.4 RECEPTACLES A. Single Convenience Receptacle: 1. Leviton Model.5341-W 2. Hubbell 3. Slater 4. Substitutions: Not Permitted. B. Duplex Convenience Receptacle: 1. Leviton Model.5341-2W 2. Hubbell 3. Slater 4. Substitutions: Not Permitted. C. GFCI Receptacle. 1. Leviton Model.8898-W 2. Hubbell 3. Slater 4. Substitutions: Not Permitted. D. Color: Ivory. 2.5 WALL PLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Leviton 2. Hubbell 3. Slater 4. Substitutions: Not Permitted. B. Medium Cover Plate% Smooth stainless steel. C. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal In use style plate with hinged threaded and gasketed device cover. Wiring Methods 16100 - 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 2.6 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLY A. Manufacturers: 1. Leviton 2. Hubbell 3. Slater 4. Wiremold 5. Substitutions: Not Permitted. B. Multioutlet Assembly: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, with pre-wired receptacles, suitable for use as multioutlet assembly. Furnish manufacturer's standard enamel finish. C. Receptacles: NEMA WD 6, type 5-15R, single receptacle. D. Receptacle Spacing: 12 inches on center. E. Fittings: Furnish manufacturer's standard couplings, elbows, outlet and device boxes, and connectors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Route raceway and cable to meet Project conditions. B. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated. C. Adjust box location up to 10 feet prior to rough-in when required to accommodate intended purpose. D. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; install boxes with minimum 24 inches separation. (End of Section 16100) Wiring Methods 16100 - 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 SECTION 16123 - BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes building wire and cable; nonmetallic-sheathed cable; direct burial cable; armored cable; metal clad cable; and wiring connectors and connections. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION B. Product Requirements: Provide products as follows: 1. Solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. 2. Stranded conductors for control circuits. 3. Conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. 4. Conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits. 5. 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet. C. Wiring Methods: Provide the following wiring methods: 1. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. 2. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. 3. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. 4. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN in raceway. 5. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire XHHW in raceway. 6. Underground Locations: Use only building wire, Type XHHW in raceway. 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS D. Conductor shall be copper. E. Aluminum conductors shall not be installed. 1.4 SUBMITTALS F. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. G. Product Data: Submit for building wire. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS H. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for submittals. 1. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS J. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. Building Wire and Cable 16123-1 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS K. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. 1.8 COORDINATION L. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination. M. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine routing and lengths required. N. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILDING WIRE A. Manufacturers: 1. Essex Group Inc. 2. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Product Description: Single conductor insulated wire. C. Conductor: Copper. D. Insulation: 600 volt rating; material rated 90 degrees C. 2.2 WIR ING CONNECTORS A. Split Bolt Connectors: 1. Erico. 2. Substitutions Permitted. B. Solderless Pressure Connectors: I. Ilsco PTA style. 2. Substitutions Permitted. C. Spring Wire Connectors: 1. Ideal. 2. Substitutions: Permitted. D. Compression Connectors: 1. Burndy. 2. Substitutions Permitted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. Building Wire and Cable 16123 - 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 B. Verify interior of building has been protected from weather. C. Verify mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. D. Verify raceway installation is complete and supported. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Route wire and cable to meet Project conditions. B. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. C. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 16075. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated. D. Special Techniques--Building Wire in Raceway: 1. Pull conductors into raceway at same time. 2. Install building wire 4 AWG and larger with pulling equipment. E. Special Techniques - Cable: 1. Protect exposed cable from damage. 2. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels. 3. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. F. Special Techniques - Wiring Connections: 1. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. 2. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. 3. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor. 4. Install split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. 5. Install solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. 6. Install insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller. 7. Install suitable reducing connectors or mechanical connector adaptors for connecting copper conductors to mechanical lugs where required. G. Install solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. H. Install stranded conductors for branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. However, when stranded conductors are used in lieu of solid, then install crimp on fork terminals for device terminations. Do not place bare stranded conductors directly under screws. Building Wire and Cable 16123 - 3 APA 07.08 3.4 WIRE COLOR Fire Station #48 A. General 1. For wire sizes 10 AWG and smaller, install wire colors in accordance with the following: a. Black and red for single phase circuits at 120/240 volts. b. Black, red, and blue for circuits at 120/208 volts single or three phase. 2. For wire sizes 8 AWG and larger, identify wire with colored tape at terminals, splices and boxes. Colors are as follows: a. Black and red for single phase circuits at 120/240 volts. b. Black, red, and blue for circuits at 120/208 volts single or three phase. B. Neutral Conductors: White. When two or more neutrals are located in one conduit, individually identify each with proper circuit number. C. Branch Circuit Conductors: Install three or four wire home runs with each phase uniquely color coded. D. Feeder Circuit Conductors: Uniquely color code each phase. E. Ground Conductors: 1. For 6 AWG and smaller: Green. 2. For 4 AWG and larger: Identify with green tape at both ends and visible points including junction boxes. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. (End of Section 16123) Building Wire and Cable 16123 - 4 APA 07.08 SECTION 16130 - RACEWAY AND BOXES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Fire Station #48 A. Section includes conduit and tubing, surface raceways, wireways, outlet boxes, pull and junction boxes. 1.2 UNIT PRICE - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT B. Raceway: 1. Basis of Measurement: By linear foot. 2. Basis of Payment: Includes materials, delivery, handling, and installing. C. Boxes: 1. Basis of Measurement: By cubic foot. 2. Basis of Payment: Includes materials, delivery, handling, and installing. 1.3 REFERENCES D. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. 2. ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. 3. ANSI C80.5 - Aluminum Rigid Conduit - (ARC). E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 2. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. 3. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. 4. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION F. Raceway and boxes located as indicated on Drawings, and at other locations required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide raceway to complete wiring system. G. Underground More than 5feet outside Foundation Wall: Provide plastic coated rigid conduit,. Provide composite nonmetallic handholes with PVC junction boxes within the handhole. H. Underground Within 5 feet from Foundation Wall: Provide plastic coated rigid conduit,. Provide cast metal boxes. 1. In or Under Slab on Grade: Provide plastic coated rigid conduit. Provide cast iron boxes. Provide plastic coated rigid conduit at all slab penetrations. Design Raceway and Boxes 16130 - 1 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 J. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Provide plastic coated rigid steel conduit. Provide cast metal outlet, pull, and junction boxes. K. In Slab above Grade: Provide plastic coated rigid steel conduit. Provide cast iron boxes. L. Wet and Damp Locations: Provide rigid steel conduit, Provide cast metal outlet, junction, and pull boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. M. Concealed Dry Locations: Provide rigid steel conduit. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes. N. Exposed Dry Locations: Provide rigid steel conduit. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes. 1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 0. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4". 1.6 SUBMITTALS P. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. Q. Product Data: Submit for the following: 1. Flexible metal conduit. 2. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 3. Raceway fittings. 4. Conduit bodies. 5. Surface raceway. 6. Wireway. 7. Pull and junction boxes. R. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS S. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures. T. Project Record Documents: 1. Record actual routing of conduits larger than 1 inch trade size 2. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes. 2.01 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. Design Raceway and Boxes 16130 - 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. 1.8 COORDINATION D. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. E. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 16150. F. Coordinate mounting heights, orientation and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT G. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Permitted. H. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. 1. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; all steel fittings. 2.2 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Product Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating 40 mil thick. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating to match conduit. 2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Permitted. Design Raceway and Boxes 16130 - 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 B. Product Description: interlocked steel construction. C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. 2.4 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Product Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. 2.5 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Product Description: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface metal raceway. C. Size 12x12 inch D. Finish: Gray enamel E. Fittings, Boxes, and Extension ings: Furnish manufacturer's standard accessories; match finish on raceway. 2.6 WIREWAY A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Produ ts. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Product Description: Raintight type wireway. C. Knockouts None. D. Size: 12 x 12 inch; length as indicated on Drawings. Design Raceway and Boxes 16130 - 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 E. Cover: Hinged cover with full gaskets. F. Connector: Slip-in Flanged. G. Fittings: Lay-in type with removable top, bottom, and side; captive screws drip shield. H. Finish: Stainless Steel. 2.7 OUTLET BOXES A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wirernold Co. 6. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; furnish 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required. 2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type. C. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2. D. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Furnish gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Furnish threaded hubs. E. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 16140. F. Wall Plates for Unfinished Areas: Furnish gasketed cover. 2.8 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wirernold Co. 6. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. C. Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 16131. D. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4 4X 6; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box: 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron Cast aluminum. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. Design Raceway and Boxes 16130 - 5 APA 07.08 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Fire Station 448 A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify outlet locations and routing and termination locations of raceway prior to rough- in. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Ground and bond raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 16060. B. Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes in accordance with Section 16070. C. Identify raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 16075. D. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. 3.3 INSTALLATION - RACEWAY A. Raceway routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route to complete wiring system. B. Arrange raceway supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. C. Support raceway using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. D. Group related raceway; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel specified in Section 16070; provide space on each for 25 percent additional raceways. E. Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports F. Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires or other piping systems. G. Construct wireway supports from steel channel specified in Section 1.6070. H. Route all raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls. 1. Route raceway installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. J. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point. K. Maximum Size Conduit in Slab Above Grade: 3/4 inch. Do not cross conduits in slab L. Maintain clearance between raceway and piping for maintenance purposes. M. Maintain 12 inch clearance between raceway and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F Design Raceway and Boxes 16130 - 6 APA 07.08 3.4 Fire Station #48 N. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends. 0. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. P. Install conduit hubs to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes. Q. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Install conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Install hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate, factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size. R. Avoid moisture traps; install junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. S. Install fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where raceway crosses, control and expansion joints. T. Install suitable pull string or cord in each empty raceway except sleeves and nipples. Label each end of pull string with designation of opposite end U. Install suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. V. Surface Raceway: Install flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to surfaces; mount plumb and level. Install insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings. W. Close ends and unused openings in wireway. INSTALLATION - BOXES A. install wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as indicated on Drawings. Or as specified in section for outlet device. B. Adjust box location up to 10 feet prior to rough-in to accommodate intended purpose. C. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 16140. D. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. E. In Accessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. F. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. G. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; install with minimum 6 inches separation. Install with minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls. H. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. Install stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. 16130 - 7 1. Design Raceway and Boxes APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 J. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. K. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. L. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems. M. Support boxes independently of conduit. N. Install gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. 0. Install gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. 3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods in accordance with Section 07840. B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation specified in Section 075. C. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as indicated on Drawings reflected ceiling plan. D. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. C. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes. 3.7 CLEANING A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. C. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. (End of Section 06130) Design Raceway and Boxes 16130 - 8 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 16131- CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes hinged cover enclosures, cabinets, terminal blocks, and accessories. 1.2 REFERENCES B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 2. NEMA ICS 4 - Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks. 1.3 SUBMITTALS C. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard data for enclosures, cabinets, and terminal blocks. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS F. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS G. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. H. Furnish two of each key. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Hoffmann Enclosures. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements Permitted. B. Construction: NEMA 250, Type 1,3R and 4x stainless steel enclosure. C. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by key or hasp and staple for padlock. Cabinets and Enclosures 16131-1 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 D. Furnish interior metal panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components; finish with white enamel. E. Enclosure Finish: stainless steel. 2.2 CABINETS A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Hoffmann Enclosures 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements Permitted. B. Boxes: Stainless Steel steel.. C. Box Size: 24 inches wide x 24 inches high x 6 inches deep. D. Backboard: Furnish 3/4 inch thick plywood backboard for mounting terminal blocks. Paint matte white. E. Fronts: Steel, surface type with concealed trim clamps, door with concealed hinge, and flush lock keyed to match branch circuit panelboard. Finish with gray baked enamel. F. Knockouts: none. G. Furnish metal barriers to form separate compartments wiring of different systems and voltages. H. Furnish accessory feet for free-standing equipment. 2.3 TERMINAL BLOCKS A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices 3. Panduit. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements Permitted. B. Terminal Blocks: NEMA ICS 4. C. Power Terminals: Unit construction type with closed back and tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 600 volts. D. Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, suitable for channel mounting, with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts. E. Furnish ground bus terminal block, with each connector bonded to enclosure F. Furnish suitable end caps for terminal block strips. G. Terminal blocks shall be finger touch safe. Cabinets and Enclosures 16131-2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner in accordance with Section 16070. B. Install cabinet fronts plumb. 3.2 CLEANING A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and harmful materials. C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. D. Clean finishes and touch up damage. (End of Section 16131) Cabinets and Enclosures 16131-3 APA 07.08 SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES Fire Station 448 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes wall switches; wall dimmers; receptacles; multi-outlet assembly; and device plates and decorative box covers. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16130 - Raceway and Boxes: Outlet boxes for wiring devices. 1.2 REFERENCES C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. N.EMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. 2. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS D. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. E. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. F. Samples: Submit two samples of each wiring device and wall plate illustrating materials, construction, color, and finish. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS G. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS H. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. 1. Furnish two of each style, size, and finish wall plate. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Leviton 2. Slater 3. Arrow Hart Wiring Devices 4. Eagle Electrical. 5. Siemens Co. 6. Square D. 7. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements Not permitted. Wiring Devices 16140-1 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 B. Product Description: NEMA WD 1, Heavy-Duty, AC only snap switch. C. Body and Handle: Ivory plastic with toggle rocker handle. D. Indicator Light: Lighted handle type switch Separate pilot strap; clear color handle lens. E. Locator Light: Lighted handle type switch; white color handle. F. Ratings: 1. Voltage: 120-277 volts, AC. 2. Current: 20 amperes. G. Ratings: Match branch circuit and load characteristics. 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Leviton 2. Slater 3. Arrow Hart Wiring Devices 4. Eagle Electrical. 5. Siemens Co. 6. Square D. 7. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements Not permitted. B. Product Description: NEMA WD 1, Heavy-duty use receptacle. C. Device Body: white plastic. D. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as indicated on Drawings. E. Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-20. F. GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory requirements. 2.3 WALL PLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Leviton 2. Slater 3. Arrow Hart Wiring Devices 4. Eagle Electrical. 5. Siemens Co. 6. Square D. 7. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements Not permitted. B. Cover Plate: Medium Size. Smooth lined 302 stainless steel. C. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal plate with hinged in use gasketed device cover. Wiring Devices 16140 - 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 2.4 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLY A. Manufacturers: 1. Leviton 2. Slater 3. Arrow Hart Wiring Devices 4. Eagle Electricl. 5. Siemens Co. 6. Square D. 7. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements Not permitted. B. Multi-outlet Assembly: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, with pre-wired receptacles, suitable for use as multi-outlet assembly. C. Size As indicated on Drawings. D. Receptacles: NEMA WD 6, type 5-15R, single receptacle. E. Receptacle Spacing: 12 inches on center or as indicated on Drawings. F. Receptacle Color: white. G. Channel Finish: white Buff enamel. H. Fittings: Furnish manufacturer's standard couplings, elbows, outlet and device boxes, and connectors PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper height. C. Verify wall openings are neatly cut and completely covered by wall plates. D. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean debris from outlet boxes. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install devices plumb and level. B. Install switches with OFF position down. C. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer. Wiring Devices 16140 - 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 D. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers. E. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. F. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. G. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. H. Connect wiring devices by wrapping solid conductor around screw terminal. Install stranded conductor for branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. When stranded conductors are used in lieu of solid, use crimp on fork terminals for device terminations. Do not place bare stranded conductors directly under device screws. 1. Use jumbo size 302 stainless steel plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. J. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets. 3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16130 to obtain mounting heights as specified and as indicated on drawings. B. Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor. C. Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor. D. Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above counter back splash of counter or horizontally in backsplash in pass through counter areas. E. Install dimmer 48 inches above finished floor. F. Coordinate installation of wiring devices with under floor raceway service fittings provided under Section 161.34. G. Coordinate installation of wiring devices with floor box service fittings provided under Section 16135. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Inspect each wiring device for defects. C. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. D. Verify each receptacle device is energized. E. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. F. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. Wiring Devices 16140 - 4 APA 07.08 3.6 ADJUSTING Fire Station #48 A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 3.7 CLEANING A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish. (End of Section 06140) Wiring Devices 16140 - 5 APA 07.08 SECTION 16150 - WIRING CONNECTIONS Fire Station 448 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes electrical connections to equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16123 - Building Wire and Cable. 2. Section 16130 - Raceway and Boxes. 1.2 REFERENCES C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. 2. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS D. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. E. Product Data: Submit wiring device manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, configurations, and construction. F. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.4 CLO SEOUT SUBMITTALS G. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Submittal procedures. H. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations, sizes, and configurations of equipment connections. 1.5 COORDINATION 1. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. J. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections. K. Determine connection locations and requirements. L. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation of equipment. M. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment. Wiring Connections 16150-1 APA 07.08 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CORD AND PLUGS Fire Station #48 A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell. 2. Daniel Woodhead. 3. Arrow-Hart. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements Permitted. B. Attachment Plug Construction: Conform to N.EMA WD 1. C. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet furnished for equipment. D. Cord Construction: Type SO multi-conductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations. E. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify equipment is ready for electrical connection, for wiring, and to be energized. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Make electrical connections. B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered. D. Install receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug. E. Install cord and cap for field-supplied attachment plug. F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements. H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. Wiring Connections 16150 - 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 1. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements. J. Coolers and Freezers: Cut and seal conduit openings in freezer and cooler walls, floor, and ceilings. Install connections to cooler and freezer solenoids, thermostats and timeclocks. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Cooperate with utilization equipment installers and field service personnel during checkout and starting of equipment to allow testing and balancing and other startup operations. Provide personnel to operate electrical system and checkout wiring connection components and configurations. (End of Section 16150) Wiring Connections 16150 - 3 APA 07.08 SECTION 16411 _ ENCLOSED SWITCHES Fire Station #48 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes fusible and non-fusible switches. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16491 - Fuses. 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 2. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). B. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit switch ratings and enclosure dimensions. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed switches and ratings of installed fuses. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D 2. Siemens 3. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements not Permitted. Enclosed Switches 16411-1 APA 07.08 2.2 2.3 Fire Station 448 B. Product Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position, enclosed load interrupter knife. switch. Handle lockable in OFF position. C. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU 1, Class R and J fuses. D. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from stainless steel. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R 4. 3. Industrial Locations: Type 4 4X 5 12 12K. E. Service Entrance: Switches identified for use as service equipment are to be labeled for this application. Furnish solid neutral assembly and equipment ground bar. F. Furnish switches with entirely copper current carrying parts. NONFUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D 2. Siemens 3. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements not Permitted. B. Product Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position. C. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from stainless steel. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R 4. 3. Industrial Locations: Type 4 4k 5 12 12K. D. Service Entrance: Switches identified for use as service equipment are to be labeled for this application. Furnish solid neutral assembly and equipment ground bar. E. Furnish switches with entirely copper current carrying parts. SWITCH RATINGS A. Switch Rating: Horsepower rated for AC or DC as indicated on Drawings. B. Short Circuit Current Rating: UL listed for 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by Class H or K fuses (30-600 ampere) 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by Class R or Class J fuses (30-600 ampere switches employing appropriate fuse rejection schemes). 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by Class L fuses (800-1200 ampere). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosed switches plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 16070. Enclosed Switches 16411-2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 B. Height: 5 feet to operating handle. C. Install fuses for fusible disconnect switches. Refer to Section 16491 for product requirements. D. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 16075. E. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01.400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and Inspection Services 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5. (End of Section 16411) Enclosed Switches 16411-3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 16423 - ENCLOSED CONTACTORS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes enclosed contactors for lighting and general purposes. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16491 - Fuses. 1.2 REFERENCES C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. 2. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 3. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC. 4. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices. 5. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures. 6. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). D. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS E. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. F. Product Data: Submit dimensions, size, voltage ratings and current ratings. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS G. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures. H. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations and ratings of enclosed contactors. 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for replacing and maintaining coil and contacts. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS J. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. Enclosed Contactors 16423 - 1 APA 07.08 PART I PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS 2.2 Fire Station #48 A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D 2. Siemens 3. Substitutions. Section 01600 -.Product Requirements not Permitted. B. Product Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose magnetic contactor. C. Coil operating voltage: 120volts, 60 Hertz. D. Poles: To match circuit configuration and control function. E. Product Features: I. Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5, heavy-duty type with Form Z contacts, rated A150 2. Pushbutton: ON/OFF function, with shrouded lockable configuration. 3. Selector Switch: ON/OFF/AUTOMATIC function, with rotary action. 4. Indicating Light: GREEN lens, led lamp. 5. Auxiliary Contacts: One, normally open normally closed field convertible in addition to seal-in contact. 6. Relays: NEMA ICS 2. 7. Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary, 100VA minimum, in each enclosed contactor. Furnish fused primary and secondary, and bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure. F. Combination Contactors: Combine contactors with enclosed knife switch conforming to NEMA KS 1, with externally operable handle and fuse clips designed to accommodate NEMA FU 1, Class R J fuses. G. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with manufacturer's standard gray enamel aluminum gray plastic. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R 4. 3. Locations: Type. LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Manufacturers: I . Square D 2. Siemens 3. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements not Permitted. B. Product Description: NEMA ICS 2, magnetic lighting contactor. C. Configuration: Mechanically held, 3 wire control. D. Coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz. E. Poles: To match circuit configuration and control function. Enclosed Contactors 16423 - 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 F. Contact Rating: Match branch circuit overcurrent protection, considering derating for continuous loads. G. Accessories: 1. Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5, heavy-duty type with Form Z contacts, rated A150. 2. Pushbutton: ON/OFF function, with shrouded lockable configuration. 3. Selector Switch: ON/OFF/AUTOMATIC function, with rotary action. 4. Indicating Light: GREEN lens, led lamp. 5. Auxiliary Contacts: One, normally open normally closed field convertible in addition to seal-in contact. 6. Relays: NEMA ICS 2. 7. Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary, 100VA minimum, in each enclosed contactor. Furnish fused primary and secondary, and bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure. H. Combination Contactors: Combine contactors with enclosed knife switch conforming to NEMA KS 1, with externally operable handle and fuse clips designed to accommodate NEMA FU 1, Class R J fuses. I. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with manufacturer's standard gray enamel aluminum gray plastic. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type I . 2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R 4. 3. Locations: Type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosed contactors as indicated on Drawings, in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install enclosed contactors plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 16070. C. Height: 5 ft to operating handle. D. Install fuses for fusible switches. Refer to Section 16491 for product requirements. E. Install engraved plastic nameplates. Refer to Section 16075 for product requirements and location. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and Inspection Services 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.16.1. (END OF SECTION 16423) Enclosed Contactors 16423 - 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes distribution and branch circuit panelboards, electronic grade branch circuit panelboards, and load centers. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding. 2. Section 16075 - Electrical Identification 3. Section 16491 - Fuses. 1.2 REFERENCES C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: I. IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA AB I - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. 2. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 3. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC. 4. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices. 5. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). 6. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. 7. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. E. International Electrical Testing Association: L NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. F. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 67 - Safety for Panelboards. 2. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters. 3. UL 1449 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS H. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. I. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes. Panel Boards 16442 - 1 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 J. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing specified features of standard products. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS K. Section 01789 - Closeout Submittals: Requirements for submittals. L. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual circuiting arrangements. M. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS N. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS 0. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Data: Requirements for maintenance products. P. Furnish two of each panelboard key. Panelboards keyed alike to Owner's current keying system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D 2. Siemens 3. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements not Permitted. B. Product Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard. C. Panelboard Bus: Copper, current carrying components, ratings as indicated on Drawings. Furnish copper ground bus in each panelboard; furnish insulated ground bus as indicated on Drawings. D. For non-linear load applications subject to harmonics furnish 200 percent rated, plated copper, solid neutral. E. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240 volt panelboards; 14,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards, or as indicated on Drawings. F. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on plug-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles, listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits, Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers as indicated on Drawings. Do not use tandem circuit breakers. Panel Boards 16442 - 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 G. Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, coordinated with automatically resetting current limiting elements in each pole. interrupting rating 100,000 symmetrical amperes, let-through current and energy level less than permitted for same size NEMA FU 1, Class RK-5 fuse. H. Enclosure: Stainless steel NEMA PB 1, Type 1 or Type 3R. Cabinet Box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide for 240 volt and less panelboards, 20 inches wide for 480 volt panelboards. J. Cabinet Front: Flush Surface cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's stainless steel PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and load centers in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1. B. Install panelboards and load centers plumb. C. Install recessed panelboards and load centers flush with wall finishes. D. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard and load center; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more than 4 inches above floor. E. Install filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. F. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard and load center. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes to balance phase loads. G. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 16075. H. Install spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to accessible location above ceiling and below floor in raised floor areas . Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch. Identify each as SPARE. 1. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 16060. Connect equipment ground bars of panels in accordance with NFPA 70. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL J. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and Inspection Services 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. K. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. L. Perform circuit breaker inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6. M. Perform switch inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5. Panel Boards 16442 - 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 N. Perform controller inspections and tests listed in META ATS, Section 7.16.1. 3.3 ADJUSTING 0. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements 01750 - Starting and Adjusting: Requirements for starting and adjusting. P. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in panelboard to balance phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits. (END OF SECTION 16442) Panel Boards 16442 - 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 16491 - FUSES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes fuses and spare fuse cabinet. 1.2 REFERENCES B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS C. Select fuses to provide appropriate levels of short circuit and overcurrent protection for the following components: wire, cable, bus structures, and other equipment. Design system to maintain component damage within acceptable levels during faults. D. Select fuses to coordinate with time current characteristics of other overcurrent protective elements, including other fuses, circuit breakers, and protective relays. Design system to maintain operation of device closest to fault operates. 1.4 FUSE PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS E. Main Service Switches Larger than 600 amperes: Class L time delay. F. Main Service Switches: Class RK1 time delay. G. Power Load Feeder Switches Larger than 600 amperes: Class L time delay H. Power Load Feeder Switches: Class RK1 (time delay). (non-time-delay). RK5. J (non- time-delay). (time delay). T. 1. Motor Load Feeder Switches: Class RK1 time delay. J. Lighting Load Feeder Switches Larger than 600 amperes: Class L time delay. K. Lighting Load Feeder Switches: Class RK1 time delay. L. Other Feeder Switches Larger than 600 amperes: Class L time delay.. M. Other Feeder Switches: Class RK1 time delay. N. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1 time delay. 1.5 SUBMITTALS 0. Section 01330 _ Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. P. Product Data: Submit data sheets showing electrical characteristics, including time- current curves. Fuses 16491-1 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Q. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures. R. Project Record Documents: Record actual sizes, ratings, and locations of fuses. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS S. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS T. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. U. Furnish two fuse pullers. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS V. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Data: Requirements for extra materials. W. Furnish three spare fuses of each Class, size, and rating installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FUSES A. Manufacturers: 1. Littlefuse. 2. Bussman. 3. Shawmut. 4. Substitutions: Sectior101600 - Product Requirements Permitted. B. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or as indicated on Drawings. C. Voltage: Rating suitable for circuit phase-to-phase voltage. 2.2 SPARE FUSE CABINET D. Manufacturers: 1. Littlefuse. 2. Sussman. 3. Shawmut. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements Permitted. E. Product Description: Wall-mounted sheet metal cabinet with shelves, suitably sized to store spare fuses and fuse pullers specified. F. Doors: Hinged, with hasp for Owner's padlock. 16491-2 Fuses APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 G. Finish: Primed for field painting. Gray enamel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install fuse with label oriented so manufacturer, type, and size are easily read. B. Install spare fuse cabinet as indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION Fuses 16491-3 APA 07.08 SECTION 16510 - INTERIOR LUMINAIRES Fire Station 448 PARTI GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes interior luminaires, lamps, ballasts, and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09547 - Integrated Ceilings. 2. Section 16530 - Emergency lighting. 1.2 REFERENCES C. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI C82.1 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballast-Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast. 2. ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts-for High-Intensity- Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type). 1.3 SUBMITTALS D. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. E. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire. F. Product Data: Submit dimensions, ratings, and performance data. G. Samples: Submit two color chips 3 x 3 inch in size illustrating luminaire finish color where indicated in luminaire schedule or as directed by the architect. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS H. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.5 MOCK-UP 1. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Mock-up requirements. J. Provide luminaires in ceiling assembly. K. Locate where directed by Architect/Engineer. Or where indicated on Drawings. L. Incorporate accepted mockup as part of Work. M. Remove mockup when directed by Architect/Engineer. 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS N. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. Interior Luminaires 16510-1 APA 07.08 1..7 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS Fire Station #48 0. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. P. Furnish two of each plastic lens type. Q. Furnish one replacement lamps for each lamp installed. R. Furnish two of each ballast type. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES A. Product Description: Complete interior luminaire assemblies, with features, options, and accessories as scheduled. B. Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements for product options. Substitutions are not permitted. 2.2 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS C. Man 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. ufacturers: Magnetek Inc Philips Electronic North America Sylvania Universal Substitutions: Not Permitted. D. Product Description: Electronic ballast less than 20 percent THD High-power-factor type certified by Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc. to comply with ANSI C82.1, suitable for lamps specified, with voltage to match luminaire voltage. 2.3 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) BALLASTS E. Manufacturers: 1. Magnetek Inc 2. Philips Electronic North America 3. Sylvania 4. Universal 5. Venture Lighting International Inc 6. Substitutions: Not Permitted. F. Product Description: ANSI C82.4, metal halide or high pressure sodium lamp ballast, suitable for lamp specified, with voltage to match luminaire voltage. 2.4 FLUORESCENT DIMMING BALLASTS AND CONTROLS G. Manufacturers: 1. Lutron 2. Magnetek Inc 3. Philips Electronic North America Interior Luminaires 16510 - 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 4. Sylvania 5. Universal 6. Substitutions: Not Permitted. H. Product Description: Electrical assembly of control unit and ballast to furnish smooth dimming of fluorescent lamps. 1. Control Unit: Linear slide type, rated 1000 watts minimum at 120 277 volts. J. Ballast: Selected by dimming system manufacturer as suitable for operation with control unit and suitable for lamp type and quantity specified for luminaire. 2.5 INCANDESCENT LAMPS K. Manufacturers: 1. GE 2. Philips 3. Sylvania 4. Substitutions: Not Permitted. 2.6 FLUORESCENT LAMPS L. Manufacturers: 1. GE 2. Philips 3. Sylvania 4. Substitutions: Not Permitted. 2.7 HID LAMPS M. Manufacturers: 1. Philips Electronic North America 2. Sylvania 3. GE 4. Venture Lighting International Inc 5. Substitutions: Not Permitted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Install pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height. B. Support luminaires independent of ceiling framing. C. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on Drawings. D. Install surface mounted luminaires plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. Interior Luminaires 16510 - 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 E. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface-mounted luminaires on grid ceiling directly from building structure Install auxiliary members spanning ceiling grid members to support surface mounted luminaires Fasten surface mounted luminaires to ceiling grid members using bolts, or suitable clips. F. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. G. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. H. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place. 1. Install wall-mounted luminaires at height as indicated on Drawings. J. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. K. Connect luminaires to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 16130 using flexible conduit as indicated on Drawings. L. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. M. Install specified lamps in each luminaire. N. Ground and bond interior luminaires in accordance with Section 16060. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 0. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services 01700 - Starting and Adjusting: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. P. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. 3.3 ADJUSTING Q. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. R. Aim and adjust luminaires as indicated on Drawings. 3.4 CLEANING S. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning. T. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. U. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. V. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK W. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Protecting finished work. Interior Luminaires 16510 - 4 APA 07.08 X. Re-lamp luminaires having failed lamps at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Fire Station 448 Interior Luminaires 16510 - 5 APA 07.08 SECTION 16530 - EMERGENCY LIGHTING Fire Station #48 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes emergency lighting units and exit signs. B. Related Sections: C. Section 16510 - Interior Luminaires: Exit signs. 1.2 REFERENCES D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION E. Emergency lighting to comply with requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS F. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: G. Product Data: Submit dimensions, ratings, and performance data. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS H. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS 1. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. J. Furnish one replacement lamps for each lamp installed. K. Furnish one replacement battery for each battery type and size. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Cooper Industries 2. Hubbell 3. Daybrite 4. Lithonia. 5. Substitutions: Not Permitted. Emergency Lighting 16530- 1 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 B. Product Description: Self-contained incandescent emergency lighting unit. C. Battery: 12 volt, nickel-cadmium, with 1.5 hour capacity. D. Battery Charger: Dual-rate type, with sufficient capacity to recharge discharged battery to full charge within twelve hours. E. Lamps: 12 watt minimum, sealed beam type in nickel or chrome plated steel housing. F. Remote Fixtures: Match fixtures on unit. G. Housing: Steel. H. Indicators: Lamps to indicate AC ON and RECHARGING. Self diagnostic function. 1. TEST switch: Transfers unit from external power supply to integral battery supply. J. Electrical Connection: Conduit connection. K. Input Voltage: 120 277 volts. 2.2 EXIT SIGNS L. Manufacturers: I . Cooper Industries 2. Hubbell 3. Daybrite 4. Lithonia. 5. Substitutions: Not Permitted. M. Product Description: Exit sign fixture with integral battery power supply. N. Face: Translucent face with red letters on white background. 0. Input Voltage: 120 or 277 volts. P. Directional Arrows: Universal type for field adjustment. Q. Mounting: Universal, for field selection. R. Battery: 12 volt, nickel-cadmium type, with 1.5 hour capacity. S. Battery Charger: Dual-rate type, with sufficient capacity to recharge discharged battery to full charge within twelve hours. T. Lamps: LED. U. Input Voltage: 120 277 volts. V. Accessories. Self Diagnostic Functions Emergency Lighting 16530 - 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station 448 2.3 FLUORESCENT LAMP EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY W. Man 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. ufacturers: Bodine Magnetek Inc Philips Electronic North America Sylvania Universal Substitutions: Not Permitted. X. Product Description: Emergency battery power supply suitable for installation in ballast compartment of fluorescent luminaire. Y. Lamp Ratings: One lamp providing 1100 lumens, minimum. Z. Battery: Sealed, rated for 10 year life. AA. Include TEST switch and AC ON indicator light, installed to be operable and visible from outside of assembled luminaire. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install suspended exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Install pendant length required to suspend sign at indicated height. B. Install surface-mounted emergency lighting units and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. C. Install wall-mounted emergency lighting units and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings. D. Install accessories furnished with each emergency lighting unit and exit sign. E. Connect emergency lighting units and exit signs to branch circuit as indicated on Drawings. F. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within unit. G. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit and exit sign. H. Ground and bond emergency lighting units and exit signs in accordance with Section 16060. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. Emergency Lighting 16530 - 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station 948 J. Operate each unit after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. 3.3 ADJUSTING K. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. L. Aim and adjust lamp fixtures as indicated on Drawings. M. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated on Drawings. 3.4 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK N. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Protecting finished work. 0. Relamp emergency lighting units and exit signs having failed lamps at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Emergency Lighting 16530 - 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. The contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials necessary for the installation of complete system for fire detection and annunciation. These materials shall include, but not limited to: 1.. Fire alarm control panel. 2. Manual fire alarm stations. 3. Automatic smoke and heat detectors. 4. Fire alarm signaling appliances. 5. Sprinkler suppression system monitoring and control. 1.2 REFERENCES 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 2. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code. 3. NFPA 90A - Air Conditioning Systems 4. NFPA 101- Life Safety Code® 5. Americans with Disabilities Act. 6. Provide products and components which have been UL listed and labeled. 7. Florida Building Code & Fire Prevention Code. 8. ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. 9. Factory Mutual Research Approved. 10. UL 864 - Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 11. UL 268 - Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 12. UL 268A - Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications. 13. UL 217 - Single and Multiple Station Smoke Alarms 14. UL 521 - Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 15. UL 464 - Audible Signaling Appliances. 16. UL 38 - Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes for Use with Fire-Protective Signaling Systems 17. UL 346 - Water flow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 18. UL 1971 - Signaling Devices for the Hearing-Impaired. 19. UL 1481 - Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 20. UL 1711 - Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 21. UL 1635 - Digital Alarm Communicator System Units 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The system shall use closed loop initiating device circuits with individual address supervision, individual indicating appliance circuit supervision, incoming and standby power supervision. Provide and install a fire detection and alarm system consisting of: 1. The existing Fire Alarm control panel is located as shown on the drawings. Provide fire alarm components as required to accommodate the new construction. 2. Manual pull stations shall be located at all exits, and as shown on the drawings. 3. Area smoke detection shall be provided as shown on drawings. 4. Area heat detection shall be provided as shown on drawings. 5. Duct smoke detection shall be provided at each air handler as shown on the electrical or mechanical drawings. 6. Monitor the sprinkler system water flow(s) and valve supervisory switch(s). Refer to Fire Alarm and Detection System 16721-1 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 the sprinkler system shop drawings for locations. 7. Provide audible appliances located throughout the building Audible appliances shall produce a sound level 15 dBA above ambient. 8. Provide synchronized visual appliances located throughout the building, as shown on the drawings. 9. Provide fan shutdown controls as shown on drawings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall consist of the following data to be submitted concurrently as one package. Submittals which do not include shop drawings will be returned without review. 1. Complete point to point wiring diagram indicating all devices addresses signal circuits, and conductor quantities in plan view (not conceptual) and riser style. Conceptual diagrams will be rejected. 2. The contractor shall submit complete documentation showing the type, size, rating, style, catalog number, manufacturer's names, and catalog data sheets, for all items to ensure compliance with these specifications. Required copies of this information shall be submitted to the engineer and shall be subject to his approval. Any wiring which is indicated on the drawings is for the purpose of defining intent and not intended to relieve the contractor of any responsibility with respect to furnishing a complete operational system in accordance with the plans and specifications. 3. Battery calculations (in alarm) for the FACP, and each notification appliance signal expander. 4. Contractor shall obtain architectural backgrounds to create their shop drawings. Contractor is to submit their signed and sealed shop drawings to the local authority as the local authority requires for permit and receive approval prior to shop drawing submittal. 5. Include any and all exceptions, variances or substitutions listed at the time of bid. Any such exceptions, variances or substitutions which were not listed at the time of bid and are identified in the submittal, shall be grounds for return without review. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Two (2) copies of the following documents shall be delivered to the building owner's representative at the time of system acceptance. The close out submittals shall include: 13. Location of the controls, alarm actuating devices and audible alarm signaling devices shall be as shown on the plans. Any necessary deviances shall be approved by the engineer and indicated on as-built documents to remain on site at an accessible location. As-Built drawings shall consist of a scaled plan of each building floor showing the placement of each individual item of the Integrated Life Safety System equipment as well as raceway size and routing, junction boxes, and conductor size, quantity, and color in each raceway. All drawings must reflect point to point wiring, device address and programmed characteristics as verified in the presence of the engineer and/or the end user. C. Project specific operating manuals covering the installed integrated life safety system. The manual shall contain a detailed narrative description of the system architecture, inputs, notification signaling, auxiliary functions, annunciation, sequence of operations, expansion capability, application considerations and limitations. Manufacturer's data sheets and installation manuals/instructions for all equipment supplied. A generic or typical owner's instruction and operation manual shall not be acceptable to fulfill this requirement. Fire Alarm and Detection System 16721 - 2 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 D. All drawings shall be provided in standard AutoCad format. A vellum plot of each sheet shall also be provided. E. The application program listing for the system as installed at the time of acceptance by the building owner and/or local AHJ (disk, hard copy printout, and all required passwords). F. Provide the name, address and telephone of the authorized factory representative. G. A filled out Record of Completion similar to NFPA 72, 2002 edition figure 1-6.2.1. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to inspect the job site and become familiar with the conditions under which the work will be performed. B. All work, except for any required outages, may be conducted during normal working hours, 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, by properly coordinating the work with the Owner. Noise restrictions do apply. The core drilling, testing of evacuation signals and other work disruptive to neighbors will be prohibited during hours indicated in the pre-bid conference. Contractor is to include, in his base bid, all overtime necessary to complete his work. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for prior coordination of all work and demolition with the Owner. 1.7 SYSTEM OPERATION A. The system alarm operation subsequent to the alarm activation of any manual pull station, automatic detection device, or sprinkler flow switch shall be as follows: 1. The internal audible device shall sound at the control panel or command center. 2. Display the alarm event on the graphical workstation. 3. The LCD Display shall indicate all applicable information associated with the alarm condition including: zone, device type, device location and time/date. 4. All system activity/events shall be documented on the system printer. 5. Any remote or local annunciator LCD/LED's associated with the alarm zone shall be illuminated. 6. Provide audible alarm as required by the Fire Marshal. The following actions shall occur simultaneously: a. Activate visual strobes. The visual strobes shall be synchronized and continue to flash until the system has been reset. The visual strobe shall not stop operating when the "Alarm Silence" is pressed. 7. Transmit signal to the building automation system. 8. Transmit signal to the central station with point identification. 9. Activate automatic smoke control sequences, and shut down all air handling equipment greater than 2000 cfm not required for smoke control. 10. All automatic events programmed to the alarm point shall be executed and the associated outputs activated. 11. All stairwell/exit doors shall unlock throughout the building. 12. All self-closing fire/smoke doors held open shall be released. 13. The appropriate initiating device type, location, and address shall be indicated on the control panel and the remote annunciator until the alarm has been silenced at the control panel or the remote annunciator. A subsequent alarm received shall scroll the Fire Alarm and Detection System 16721 - 3 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 alarm devices addresses on the LCD on the control panel. An alarm tone shall occur within the control panel until silenced. B. The supervisory activation of any duct smoke detector, the following functions shall automatically occur: 1. The internal audible device shall sound at the control panel or command center. 2. The LCD display shall indicate all applicable information associated with the supervisory condition including; zone, device type, device location and time/date. 3. All system activity/events shall be documented on the system printer. 4. Any remote or local annunciator LED's associated with the alarm zone shall be illuminated. 5. Transmit signals to remote annunciators located in building entry, and the building management office. 6. Shutdown the local air handling unit. 7. All automatic events programmed to the alarm point shall be executed and the associated outputs activated. C. The alarm indicating appliances may be silenced by authorized personnel upon entering the locked control cabinet and operating the alarm acknowledge key or by use of the key operated switch at the remote annunciator. Such operation will cause the flashing "Alarm" LED to glow steadily. A subsequent initiating device circuit alarm shall reactivate the signals. D. The system shall include a sprinkler supervisory sequence which shall operate as follows: 1. The activation of any standpipe, detector check valve, fire pump off-normal or sprinkler tamper switch shall activate a distinctive system supervisory audible signal at the control panel in the command center, illuminate a "Supervisory" LED at the system controls and the remote annunciator, and sequence up to three messages on the alphanumeric display. There shall be no confusion between valve tamper activation and opens and/or grounds on fire alarm initiation circuit wiring. 2. Activating the supervisory acknowledge key will silence the supervisory audible signal while maintaining the "Supervisory" LED indicating the tamper contact is still activated. 3. Restoring the valve to the normal position shall cause the audible signal and LED to pulse at a March time rate. 4. Activating the trouble acknowledge key will silence the supervisory audible signal, cause "Trouble" LED to glow, and restore the system to normal. 5. Each such switch shall have a separate supervisory address. 6. All system activity/events shall be documented on the system printer. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. All panels and peripheral devices shall be compatible with existing FACP and equipment. B. All equipment in the system shall be Factory Mutual Research Approved. The manufacturer's product brochures for the fire alarm system shall be submitted to engineer for review. C. All Factory Mutual Research Approved materials are required to have the approval mark on the packaging or material itself. Materials without proper labeling are not Factory Mutual Research Approved and shall not be accepted. Fire Alarm and Detection System 16721 - 4 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 2.2 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP) A. FACP is existing. B. The control panel shall receive 120 VAC power (as noted on the plans) via a dedicated circuit breaker and UL 1449 surge suppressor installed at FACP. C. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system upon loss of normal 120 VAC power in a normal supervisory mode of a period of twenty- four (24) hours with fifteen (15) minutes, but not less than that required by the local authority, of alarm indication at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to the standby batteries upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic. Batteries, once discharged, shall recharge at a rate to provide a minimum of 70% capacity in 12 hours. All signal expander batteries shall be sized for 100% signal device load on each circuit. D. All circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be individually fused at the control panel. E. All auxiliary manual controls shall be supervised so that all switches must be returned to the normal automatic position to clear system trouble. F. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure shall be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel. A "Power" LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present. G. The system batteries shall be supervised so that disconnection of a battery shall be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel. H. The system expansion modules connected by ribbon cables shall be supervised for module placement. Should a module become disconnected, the system trouble indicator shall illuminate and audible trouble signal shall sound. I. Field Programming 1. The system shall be programmable, configurable and expandable in the field without the need for special tools, laptop computers, or other electronic interface equipment. 2. There shall be no firmware changes required to field modify the system time, point information, equations, or annunciator programming/information. 3. It shall be possible to program through the standard FACP keyboard all system functions. 4. All field defined programs shall be stored in non-volatile memory. 5. It shall be the responsibility of the equipment supplier /installer to ensure that all equipment supplied will fit in locations designated on plans and in the specifications. R. Specific System Operations 1. Smoke Detector Sensitivity Adjust: Means shall be provided for adjusting the sensitivity of any or all analog intelligent smoke detectors in the system from the system keypad or from the keyboard of the video terminal. Sensitivity range shall be within the allowed UL window. Fire Alarm and Detection System 16721 - 5 APA 07.08 2.3 INITIATING DEVICES Fire Station #48 A. Manual Pull stations - Semi flush, double-action. B. Smoke detectors - Photoelectric type, duct mounted, housing with relay base sampling tube(s). Division 16 Contractor is to provide control wiring to location required for Division 15 to terminate control circuit of air handling unit via relay base to shut down fans. Detectors are to be furnished by the Division 16 contractor installed by the Division 15 contractor, and circuited by the Division 16 subcontractor. Provide with remote test station (RTS). Locate RTS at 46" AFF on wall or in ceiling tile face down nearest unit. C. Heat detectors - fixed temperature and rate of rise with base. Provide with relay base if necessary to satisfy 1.06 E above. Shunt-trip control power shall be supervised in accordance with ASME A17.1. D. Water flow and tamper switches - Furnished and installed by sprinkler contractor. Provide monitor modules, to satisfy above. 2.4 PERIPHERAL DEVICES A. Strobe Units - Wall mounted (80" AFF to bottom of lens), 75 cd strobes will not be accepted. Must comply with ADA for spacing shown on plans. Furnish with synchronization modules as necessary. B. Magnetic door holders C. Horn/Strobe Units - Wall mounted (80' spacing shown on plans. Furnish synchronization requirements. ' AFF to bottom of lens). Must comply with ADA for with DSM sync modules. Refer to plans for 2.5 AUXILIARY DEVICES A. Initiating Device Circuit (IDC) analog loop drivers - capable of monitoring 96 addressable devices and 94 addressable modules per circuit. Driver is capable of providing a separate alarm and trouble indication for each addressable device. EC is responsible for providing quantity of drivers required to support all of the addressable devices. B. Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) Expander - shall be supplied to provide sufficient signal capacity for the total signal demand in alarm. Each of the panels provides an 8.0 amp, 24 volt DC power supply dedicated to four 2.0 amp, supervised channels. Provide at least 20% expansion capacity on each signal circuit. Provide batteries sized to handle full expander capacity. The expander panels shall be powered from a 120 volt dedicated circuit. C. Control Relays - For fan shut-down, elevator recall, magnetic door holder release, alarm signal monitoring by security and smoke control systems. D. Surge Suppressor- UL 1449 listed, hardwired to FACP, EDCO FAS-120AC. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Fire Alarm and Detection System 16721 - 6 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 A. The contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any field inspector directives prior to proceeding. Failure to notify the Engineer may result in forfeit of change order. B. Contractor is to move any and all device circuits to the existing FACP whether indicated on the drawings or not and is to demolish and remove the old smoke detector system and old fire alarm system in the areas of the facility within the scope of this project. C. All device addresses shall be programmed to indicate device type and location. D. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Install manual station with operating handle 46 inches above finished floor. Install audible and visual signal devices 80 inches above finished floor to bottom of device lens. No visual signal devices are to be ceiling mounted. F. All wire will be installed in conduit and shall be a minimum gauge as required by circuit requirements and UL listed for FPL fire rated service, in accordance with NEC Article 760 and 725 for Class 2 and 3 power limited 105 degrees Centigrade, 300 volt fire protective signaling circuits. The cables shall be color coded with an integral polarizing stripe molded into the insulation. All wiring will be color coded the same throughout the entire installation. Wiring for signaling, initiating device and notification circuits shall be arranged using Class A wiring (Style 7, Style E, and Style Z respectively). G. For alarm initiating circuits - #16 AWG (minimum) twisted, shielded pair, stranded per NEC Article 760. H. For bell circuits, 24 VDC power, door holder wiring - #16 AWG (minimum.) twisted pair, stranded per NEC Article 760. 1. All conduit to be electrical metallic tubing (EMT) 3/a" minimum All conduits to contain #16 AWG equipment ground unless manufacturer provides documentation to the engineer which negates the need for this conductor. Mount end-of-line device in box with last device or separate box adjacent to last device in circuit as required by manufacturer. K. Mount outlet box for magnetic door holders to withstand 80 pounds pulling force. L. Make conduit and wiring connections to door release devices, sprinkle flow switches, sprinkler valve tamper switches, fire suppression system control panels, duct smoke detectors and other fire alarm system devices installed by others. M. Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 72 and manufacturer's instructions. N. Junction boxes shall be spray painted red. 0. Contractor shall provide a framed typewritten address schedule which clearly indicates devices connected to each alarm initiating device circuit and signal circuit and hang adjacent to the FRCP. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Fire Alarm and Detection System 16721 - 7 APA 07.08 Fire Station #48 A. Test in accordance with NFPA 72 and local fire department requirements. B. All work shall be performed by a State of Florida Certified Electrical Contractor (EC) or Alarm Contractor I (EF). 3.3 SUPERVISION AND TESTING A. The installation shall be supervised by an authorized manufacturer's representative. B. Upon completion, the system shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 in the presence of the owner and tenant's representative, the Fire Marshal, and an authorized manufacturer's representative. C. Manufacturer's and contractor's certification of completed, operable, and successfully tested system shall be furnished to the owner. D. Indicate satisfactory completion of required tests and inspections. END OF SECTION Fire Alarm and Detection System 16721 - 8 APPENDIX Table of Contents: ASBESTOS REPORT Appendix.doc i 10/9/2008 ASBESTOS REPORT Appendix.doc 10/9/200$ E Greenfield Environmental REPORT OF THE NESHAP RENOVATION SURVEY, SAMPLING AND EVALUATION OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS at the FIRE STATION #48 1700 NORTH BELCHER ROAD CLEARWATER, FLORIDA September 29, 2008 GE Project Number 1051-1028 Submitted to: City of Clearwater Mr. Robert Maue, P.E. Public Works Administration 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Suite #220 Clearwater, Florida. 33738-5.520 Prepared by: Greenfield Environmental, Inc. 432 3'" Street North St. Petersburg, Florida 33701 432 31d Street North, St. Petersburg, FL 33701 Phone. 727.896.1266 - Fax: 727.896.1566 GE Project No. 1051A028DAS EXECUTIVE SUMMARY The survey and laboratory analysis conducted at the Fire Station #48 located at 1700 North Belcher Road in Clearwater, Florida indicated that five (5) of the materials sampled were found to contain asbestos in amounts greater than one (1) percent. These materials include Category I non-friable sink mastic, vinyl floor tile and three (3) types of friable (Regulated) vinyl floor sheeting. GE recommends that all asbestos containing materials discovered during the survey be removed from the structure by a Florida Licensed Asbestos Abatement Contractor prior to renovation activities that may disturb the materials. Proper notification must be provided to Pinellas County prior to asbestos removal activities. Prior to renovation activities the carpeting within the building will need to be evaluated for materials that may be located under it. Also, the ductwork in the wall areas will need to be evaluated if it is going to be disturbed during renovation activities. The roof was not sampled as a part of this survey in order to not cause water intrusion. The structure was occupied at the time the survey was conducted. TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Page 1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................... ..............................1 2.0 FACILITY DESCRIPTION ............................ -........... ...............,...........,...,...........,...2 3.0 SURVEY METHODS AND LABORATORY ANALYSIS ............................................3 4.0 SUSPECTED ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS ...........................................5 5.0 DESCRIPTION OF MATERIALS .............................................................................6 6.0 CONCLUSIONS .........................................................................................................8 LIST OF APPENDICES APPENDIX A- LABORATORY ANALYTICAL RESULTS APPENDIX B- CERTIFICATIONS GE Project No. 1051-1028DA;: 1.0 INTRODUCTION A survey for asbestos-containing materials (ACMs) was conducted by Greenfield Environmental, Inc. (GE) at the Fire Station #48 located at 1700 North Belcher Road in Clearwater, Florida. The survey was performed on September 22, 2008 by Kevin Kitch, Accredited EPA Asbestos Inspector for GE. Greenfield Environmental, Inc. is a Florida Licensed Asbestos Consulting Firm with a corresponding license number of ZA-0000268. The survey was conducted in order to identify any asbestos-containing materials which may exist priorto renovation activities in accordance with the National Emissions Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) Regulation. More specifically, our scope of services for this project consisted of the five following steps. Site Walk-Through and Observations, Bulk Sampling of Suspect ACMs, - Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) Analysis of Bulk Samples, Hazard Assessment and Evaluation, and Final Report Development. The findings of this report represent Greenfield Environmental, Inc.'s (GE) best professional judgement and no other warranty is expressed or implied. This report is intended only for the use of THE CITY OF CLEARWATER and its agents. The contents should not be relied upon by any other parties without the expressed written consent of GE. 1 GE Project No. 1051-1028DAs 2.0 FACILITY DESCRIPTION The structure was observed to be constructed of concrete block and steel. Interior walls were finished with drywall and plaster.. Ceilings were finished with drop-in ceiling tile panels and drywall. Floors were finished with vinyl floor tile, vinyl floor sheeting and carpeting. The HVAC duct was fiberglass-insulated sheet metal and fiberglass flex-duct. The roof consists of a built-up roofing system. The attached garage bay consisted of painted block, concrete coating and steel. 2 GE Project No. 1051-1026DA5 3.0 SURVEY METHODS AND LABORATORY ANALYSIS The sampling conducted in this asbestos survey was performed in accordance with the requirements of Title 40, Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Part 763 for suspect ACMs. The EPA regulations require that sample locations be randomly selected. All suspect asbestos-containing materials and PACM (materials presumed to contain asbestos under the OSHA Asbestos Rule, 29 CFR 1910) were identified and samples of each different type of material were obtained. The bulk sampling procedure utilized for the collection of samples suspected of being asbestos-containing materials required the establishment of homogeneous sampling areas. A homogeneous sampling area is defined as an area of friable or non-friable material of similar type that appeared to be applied or constructed during the same general period of time. This is the most acceptable method for the sampling of suspect asbestos-containing Store materials. Samples which were collected from these pre-determined homogeneous sampling areas were labeled and transported to Air Quality Environmental, Inc. for analysis. Air Quality Environmental, Inc. is a National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) accredited laboratory (NVLAP No. 200759-0). All sample locations were identified with numbers corresponding to those listed in Section 5.0 " Description of Materials" of this report. All samples were analyzed using Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) coupled with dispersion staining. PLM is the EPA approved method of analysis that utilizes the unique optical crystallographic properties of the various crystalline forms in the samples. Properties such 3 GE Project No. 1051-1028DAS as refractive indices, birefringence, sign of elongation and extinction angle are unique to crystalline asbestos forms and are used to identify the type of asbestos mineral as chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite, anthophyllite, tremolite or actinolite. Each type of asbestos displays unique characteristics when subjected to these tests. Percentages of the identified types of asbestos are determined by visual estimation. Attempts are made to mix the sample thoroughly to provide a more accurate percentage. Any material containing greater than one percent (1 %) by weight of any type of asbestos is considered by the EPA to be an ACM and if disturbed must be handled according to specific state and federal regulations. 4 GE Project No. 1051-102BOAS 4.0 SUSPECTED ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS The following is a summary of the materials sampled and tested during the survey and evaluation of the Fire Station #48: • Sink Mastic Drywall, Tape and Compound Ceiling Tile • Vinyl Cove Molding • Plaster • Vinyl Floor Tile with Mastic • Vinyl Floor Sheeting 5 GE Project No. 1051-10280AS 5.0 DESCRIPTION OF MATERIALS The following is a description of the materials sampled at the Fire Station #48: Homo. Sample Description/ Asbestos Frbiliti Condition y Apprax: Area Number,, '. Location Content ;:?trantit?y, 01 Pitted Ceiling Tile Located No 1 02 in the Hallway and Bunk Asbestos Friable Good ------ 03 Rooms Detected 04 Dot & Furrow Ceiling Tile No 2 05 Located in the Offices and Asbestos Friable Good 06 Living Room Detected 07 Grey Vinyl Cove Molding No 3 08 Located at Selected Asbestos N°n- Good 09 interior Floor Areas Detected Friable ----- Brown Pebble Vinyl 10 Floor Sheeting Located 28% 600 4 11 In the Dining Room, Chrysotile Friable Good Square 12 Hallway, Kitchen, Utility Asbestos Feet Room and Living Room _J I 13 White Pebble Vinyl Floor 28% 200 5 14 Sheeting Located in the Chrysotile Friable Good Square 15 Dining Room and Living Asbestos Room Feet 16 Gold Pebble Vinyl Floor 28% 100 6 17 Sheeting Located in the Chrysotile Friable Good Square 18 Dining Room and Living Asbestos Feet Room 19 Black Vinyl Cove Molding No Non- ? 20 Located in the Attached Asbestos Good ------ 21 Garage Bay Detected Friable 22 Blue Vinyl Cove Molding No Non- 8 23 Asbestos Good 24 Located in the Offices Detected Friable '--_-- 25 Blue Vinyl Floor Sheeting No 9 26 Located in the Offices Asbestos Friable Good ------ 27 Detected 28 Plaster Located at No 10. 29 Selected Wall and Ceiling Asbestos Friable Good ------ 30 Areas Detected 31 Drywall, Tape and No 11 32 Compound Located at Asbestos Friable Good 33 Selected Wall and Ceiling Detected ------ Areas GE Project No. 1051-1028DAS Homo. Sample Description/ Asbestos C t t Friability Condition Approx. Quantity Area Number Location en on -- 31 Drywall, Tape and 11 32 Compound Located at Asbestos Friable Good ------ 33 Selected Wall and Ceiling Detected Areas 12 34 35 Rose Sink Mastic 5% Chrysotile Non- F i bl Good 5 Square Feet 36 Located in the Kitchen Asbestos r e a Tile-2% Chrysotile 37 1210 x 12" Brown Vinyl Asbestos Non- 4 Square 13 38 Floor Tile with Mastic Friable Good Feet 39 Located in the Hallways Mastic- No Asbestos Detected Note-Quantities are provided for convenience only and shall not be used for any bidding purposes. GE Project No. 1051-1028DAS 6.0 CONCLUSIONS The results of our observations and laboratory testing at the Fire Station W located at 1700 North Belcher Road in Clearwater, Florida indicated that of the thirty-nine (39) samples collected, five (5) of the materials sampled were found to contain asbestos in amounts greater than one (1) percent. Category I noon-friable asbestos-containing materials were discovered during our survey in the form of sink mastic and vinyl floor tile. Category I non-friable asbestos-containing materials are those in which the asbestos fibers are bound with other materials in such a way that the release of those fibers into the air from casual contact or normal wear is unlikely. If these materials are left undisturbed, they present a low threat to release harmful asbestos fibers. Category i non-friable ACMs should not be removed, cut or abraded in any way as these actions may result in a significant fiber release episode. Friable (Regulated) materiels were discovered during our inspection in the form three (3) types of vinyl floor sheeting. Friable AGMs are those which, when dry, may be crumbled or reduced to powder by hand pressure. Friable ACMs pose the greatest threat to human health because of the tendency to release harmful asbestos fibers into the air when disturbed. GE recommends that all asbestos containing materials discovered during the survey be removed from the structure by a Florida Licensed Asbestos Abatement Contractor prior to renovation activities that may disturb the materials. Proper notification must be provided to Pinellas County prior to asbestos removal activities. 8 GE Proud No. 1051-1028 Prior to renovation activities the carpeting within the building will need to be evaluated for materials that may be located under it. Also, the ductwork in the wail areas will need to be evaluated if it is going to be disturbed during renovation activities. The roof was not sampled as a part of this survey in order to not cause water intrusion. 9 PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATIONS The discussions and conclusions contained in this asbestos survey have been prepared and reviewed by the following environmental professionals. vllz,?'?-,- - I - -41 Kevin E. Kitch Project Manager AHERA Inspector #7ME03060701AIR0021 Michael Rothenburg, PE Florida Licensed Asbestos Consultant #EA0000041 APPENDIX A LABORATORY ANALYTICAL RESULTS ??,??? ? ?u?c?at??rt ??7rn?va?c°ta?rn?r?rn?e?mi?tatll, 1[mrtcp f ?' (• . .t CJl]f1J'Cr?(JJ'y 4JCr9?fi't!!c ?)325 S inoic Boulevard. Seminole, Florida 33772 (727) 308-0900 FAX (727) 398-0996 Client Name: Greenfield Environmental Project Name: 1051-1028 City of Clearwater 432 3rd. Street North Fire Station #48 St. Petersburg, Florida 33701 Date Analyzed: September 23, 2008 Asbestos, Bulk Sample Anal sis Test Method: PLM / DS - EPA Method 6001R-931116 Lab # Client # Sample Type Description % Asbestos % Other Fibers % Binders 78738 1 78739 2 78740 3 78741 4 78742 5 78743 6 78744 7 78745 8 ceiling Tile Ceiling Tile Ceiling Tile Ceiling Tile Ceiling Tile Ceiling Tile Cove Base Cove Base white 1 gray NAD vhite / gray NAD Nhite / gray NAD white / tan NAD white / tan NAD white / tan NAD gray vinyl WAD tan mastic NAD gray vinyl NAD tan mastic NAD 30% Cellulose 30% Mineral Wool 30% Cellulose 30% Mineral Wool 30% Cellulose 30% Mineral Wool 25% Cellulose 25% Mineral Wool 25% Cellulose 2.5% Mineral Wool 25% Cellulose 25% Mineral Wool 40% Perlite and Binders 40% Perlite and Binders 40% Perlite and Binders 50% Perlite and Binders 50% Perlite and Binders 50% Perlite and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 78746 9 Cove Base gray vinyl NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders tan mastic NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders 78747 10. Vinyl Flooring brown layer NAD' 100% Carbonates and Binders gray mat layer 28% Chrysotile 72% Binders yel mastic layer NAD 100% Binders 78748 11 Vinyl Flooring Not.Analyzed, First Positive Stop Protocol 1 1 78749 12 Vinyl Flooring Not Analyzed, First Positive Stop Protocol ,t7riese s amples were analyzed by layer. Specdic tayar ear eomponont astadstois 6:mtar4t is krdicated when relevant. The t pA c, nsi !wry a matarlal to betnebesuaacorftining only Kitcontaina more than 1%asb(,,stas t7y Calibrated Virtual Area Estimaum (CVAE). EPA regulations, Woo inmate that Roqutoteaa Asbestos ContainingMataaials which arrs friable or may become friable. ' Quolity EnvMonmental b" fl rN+rrr )nah zed by palm courAing when the rolwits indicate less than 10% ast assns trf CVAE. Air uhti?es CVAE. an a routine basis and does not include point coUOdng unless specllicalty rotgauottted_ Additionally, these, results Atw } ecd by? mpy net ix reproduced except in W. Poll ? ooh data is tp..tre interpreted"by the Person (e) Whom have collected the samples. FurthwTretre, this report may tot be used as a dalm to pnae ac't certification. apprdaal'or endorsemant by NVLAP, l(l mel ?th F d ` over ara a e PST or anyotlaarager?ye f Fk)pr T"tie and other resiriousty bound mateiSale, whan analyzed by EPA method, may yield false negative results because of 4t r?lt m t? p altizin lvmn 2,t an5 in separating closely bound fibers and m detr0rig fibers of small'tenaM and diameter_ when a definitive result is A012 recommends vtl axing attarnattve methods otidentl0cation, IncfudMgTransrr slen EleMon Microscopy. uired te Mfcr wcopist , q Lab File Number, 13334 NVLAP Lab No. 200759»0 Analysis .-ages 1 of 3 Client i4ame: Greenfield Environmental Project Name: 1051-1028 City of Clearwater 432 3rd Street North Fire Station #48 St. Petersburg, Florida 33701 Date Analyzed: September 23, 2008 Asbestos, Bulk Sample Analysis Test Method: PLM / DS - EPA Method 600113-931116 Lab # Client # Sample Type Description % Asbestos % Other Fibers % Binders 78750 13 Vinyl Flooring gray layer NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders gray mat layer 28% Chrysotile 72% Binders 78751 78752 78753 14 15 16 78754 17 78755 18 78756 19 78757 20 78758 21 78759 22 78760 23 78761 24 78762 25 78763 26 78764 27 78765 28 Vinyl Flooring Vinyl Flooring Vinyl Flooring Vinyl Flooring Vinyl Flooring Cove Base Cove Base Cove Base Cove Base Cove Base Cove Base Vinyl Material Material Vinyl Material Piaster System Not Analyzed, First Positive Stop Protocol I I Not Analyzed, First Positive Stop Protocol yellow layer NAD gray mat layer 28% Chrysotile Not Analyzed, First Positive Stop Protocol I I Not Analyzed, First Positive Stop Protocol black vinyl NAD yellow mastic NAD black vinyl NAD yellow mastic NAD black vinyl NAD yellow mastic NAD blue NAD blue NAD blue NAD blue vinyl NAD yellow mastic NAD blue vinyl NAD yellow mastic NAD blue vinyl NAD yellow mastic NAD white plaster NAD brown mat NAD 100% Cellulose 100% Carbonates and Binders 72% Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Binders 100% Binders I 100% Binders 100% Binders 100% Binders 100% Binders 100% Quartz and Binders 78766 29 Plaster System white plaster NAD 100% Quartz and Binders brown mat NAD 100% Cellulose f 1besare samples were analyzed by layers. $p Eft layer or compArterittabealaatotxalerM is ktdeated when raiovsm. The EPA considers a materal to be asbestos containing only it It ooriteft moro !tart 1% a mbesi be by Cameral d Vlsual Area Estirnation (CVAE). EPA regulations also Indicate that RequkAedAsbagIwCpnlstd t MOW "We Which aril "able, or nray become htabie, be further analyzed by point cowitirtg when ttte results Ytdiaewd !sett ftin 1096;eriwlisseoe by CVAE. Air OLWRy Envl ? vil tzes CVAE on s mtO,*& basis and dose not indude point polrr? unlace spiegM q rageraalptt_ Act or>epy. these results An s1 yrxd by^: MMY not be reproduced tkgapt in full. This MPWI data Is b be Interprewad try On Person (s) wham heft collected dre samples. Furthermore, this report may not be used as a deim to product cartUllm0ion. approval dr endorsement by NVI.AP', - NI8T orany otheregency of the Federal GovemmenL tRo r Tile and oftr resinously bound materials, when an0fy by EPA meths d. may yield leese negative r=uts because of Wolllring l'aidun Hrr tuns in sepant" closely bound Fibers and In dirteeft Fibers of.arttei length and dMowler. When a deflnttive re>asult is Microscoplst required, AQE recommends utilizing altaffmWe methods of b}enN{foaaon. Rtdudbtq TrAmmission Etaevm Microscopy, Lab File Number: 13334 NVLAP Lab No. 200759-0 Analysis Pages 2 of 3 Client Name: Greenfield Environmental 432 3rd Street North St. Petersburg, Florida 33701 Asbestos, Bulk Sample Analysis Lab # Client # Sam le T pe Description 78767 30 Plaster System white plaster brawn mat 78768 31 78769 32 78770 78771 78772 78773 78774 78775 78776 33 34 35 36 37 38 Project Name_ 1051-1028 City of Clearwater Fire Station #48 Date Analyzed: September 23, 2008 Test Method: PLM / DS - EPA Method 6001R-93/116 % Asbestos % Other Fibers % Binders NAD 100% Quartz and Binders NAD 100% Cellulose Drywall System joint compound NAD mat layer NAD 100% Cellulose powder layer NAD 8% Cellulose Drywall System joint compound NAD mat layer NAD 100% Cellulose powder layer NAD 8% Cellulose Drywall System joint compound NAD mat layer NAD 100% Cellulose powder layer NAD 8% Cellulose Sink Undercoat Sink Undercoat Sink Undercoat Floor Tile Floor Tile Floor Tile pink 5% Chrysotile Not. Analyzed, Fi{rst.Positive Stop Protocol Not Analyzed, First Positive Stop Protocol brown tile 2% Chrysotile yellow mastic NAD Not Analyzed, First Positive Stop Protocol I I Not Analyzed, First Positive Stop Protocol f These npies weM'anghmW by tayers. 8pegiflc layer br oompvnan13s3b ttas carrtent Is trrrlloated when.relevat+t. Ths SPA t.a a etdo'bY Calibrated V?uuel Area patimatekan considers a maierf:al to be asbestos containing only'(f itcontafns M Om than (CVAE). EPA re3qut ant, also Indicate that Regutatecl A$bestars tanwinin9 Mata tato which are trlabile or may baaome "hie be further nnatvzw py point eaunting when the results Indieat, less than 10%aebitstos by CVAE Air 0onfity EWronmentai utflizes GYRE cn a rovfrnC basla and does not inclUdb point counting unless aaecl OWtV tettuested. Additionally, these results, may not be reproduced er.Copt ir1.I01, ThIs report data is to t)e intorlwted **. Izy the person(*) whom have "ecl" the samples, Further=re. N3 tepon May pot be used as a daim to product eartf R,A, approval or endaarsemem by NVLAI? KIST oar any other Rge'ncy-afthe Fedwat Governmeant. tMoorTlta and other realnot sly bound miat als, when enfy"d by EPAmattwd. mey.yhgd fame negative.results beoause of limitatlonsi in separating closely bound tibam and In detectino fibers of smwit length arks diameter, When a deenlilve resuit is required,AOIRrecommendsetlfbstngalternative methodofidentiticstlen,including TranismlsslooElectron Mic ©py. Lab Fite Number: 13334 100% Carbonates and Binders 92% Gypsum and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 92% Gypsum and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 92% Gypsum and Binders. 95% Binders 98% Carbonates and Binders 100% Binders Analyzed by. QN? '?hrrf?ti°,l;in? r?iltri2ln MtCroSCc>?ict NVLAP Lab No. 200759-0 Analysis Pages 3 of 3 APPENDIX B CERTIFICATIONS ,et}+f t>+ i rr? ?t ? 5•t5f k {+rt? ? §}.? '? sty t Pon slV`d. C4 W I Irvl . , 4. r 3 r? ? ? ? v Q q 9 , ch r? r?'i i ? ? 3 5i k a.?F ll? s{?f?i {i1t i i i j { (J!+' 't{+rr.ti .? 51j$;?p y}til{r "+ }?ff}? f °1 r f-• r r }i !}}??TSt`7[? ????? 1 tt rr- 4 1Df??'.ta?4?},t!i?5?t???YV}4? 9d+.,`?f }? 11 1 ti -.f} fhr.' f?}r}k{t}tf 1ff>{i + .r...rfW"r rliif , t+ a t e wry ;r }?t ?r? • •? ???' ? °vkfr`~r Los .ia t T r'r sftSTATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION r?5+ r?r?lJ H ???-. ASBESTOS LICENSING UNIT •r 1940 NORTH MONROE STREET (850) 487-1395 Y"V TALLAHASSEE FL 32399-0783 GREENFIELD ENVIRONMENTAL INC MICHAEL ROTHENBURG 432 3RD STREET NORTH ST. PETERSBURG FL 33701 ?, ?»•?;_, STATE OF FLORIDA AC# 3.38 71 DEA'R,TMENT OF BUSINESS AND i 'PRotESSIONAL REGULATION ZAO0 09/04/07 0701326 ; ASBESTOS BUSINESS ORGANIZATION OREE901ELD ENVIRONMENTAL INC -MICHAEL ROTHENBURG IS LICENSZD under the,pzovisiona of Ch.469 E SxpirattoA Gattlb. ?;OV 30 p ' 2.0:0.9 L070904037 DETACH HERE A0# 3387150 STATE'OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OIL0"' BtT99:=80': J] PROFESSIONAL REGULATION CPS LT. LENSING UNIT..'. SEQ#L0,70964.0311 A $E5 ' WrAtei., I RI] J11: LICENSE NBR I l 09 04 2007 .070.,132.620 ZAk,Q ;a The.ASB.ESTOS.BUSINESS ORO IZATION Named below IS . LICENSED Under the provisions of Chapter 469 FS. Expiration date: NOV 30, 2009 GREENFIELD ENVIRONMENTAL TNC, MICHAEL ROTHENBURG 432 3RD STREET NORTH ST. PETERSBURG FL 3-17,01 CHARLIE CRIST IkOLLY BENSON GOVERNOR ??... ,;.. ,.,.??, :,....... SECRETARY SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Table of Contents: CONTRACT BOND ..................................................................................................................... 1 CONTRACT .................................................................................................................................. 3 CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT ..................................................... 6 PROPOSAL BOND ...................................................................................................................... 7 AFFIDAVIT .................................................................................................................................. 8 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT ............................................................................................... 9 PROPOSAL ....................... ................................................................... 10 CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET ................................................................. 13 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL ............................................................................................................. 14 SectionV.doc Page i 9/24/2008 FRONT PAGE OF PUBLIC PAYMENT BOND Florida Statute 255.05 BOND NO. 5046788 CONTRACTOR: Cairns Corporation 5303 E. Longboat Blvd Tampa, FL 33615 813-891-1889 SURETY: SureTec Insurance Company 952 Echo Lane, Suite 450 Houston, TX 77024 713-812-0800 AGENT: Nielson, Wojtowicz, Neu & Associates, Inc. 1126 Central Avenue, Suite 200 St. Petersburg, FL 33705 (727) 209-1803 OBLIGEE: City of Clearwater F.O. Box 4748 Clearwater, FL 33758 727-562-4750 PROJECT: Fire Station #48 Renovation (07-0052-FI) Clearwater, FL Pinellas County A Member of: Nielson, Woitowicz, Neu & Associates Nielson &Company, lnc. THERE IS A DIFFERENCE... May 7, 2009 Cairns Corporation 5303 East Longboat Blvd. Tampa FL 33615 RE: City of Clearwater, as Obligee Fire Station #48 Renovation 07-0052-FI, as project Bond No. 5046788 Dear Ladies and Gentlemen: Please supply us with the following information for the above captioned final bond: Executed Contract with Date: X This letter is also giving Cairns Corporation , as Principal and/or City of Clearwater, as Obligee, the authority to complete these bonds by dating the bonds with the contract date, execution and Power of Attorney dates. The contract date MAY BE THE SAME date as the execution of the bond or PRIOR to the execution date of the bonds. We will forward this information onto your surety company upon our receipt. Please return as soon as possible. Thank you for your cooperation. inc , e 'n . Wojtowicz Licensed Agent Providing Bonds for the Construction Industry C:\DOCUME-1\MSchulli D rgLj KXV *gyit2?-#:cpc*tersburg, FL 33705 (727) 209-1803 - Toll Free (800) 965-9597 - Fax (727) 209-1335 www.performancebonds.com This bond is given to comply with section 255.05 Florida Statutes, and any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in Section 255.05(2), Florida Statutes STATE OF FLORMA COUNTY OF RILLSBOROUGH BOND NC.i47.13ER, 5046788 C:ONTR1C'l' B0N_D Fa?O V AL,L MEN 131x' TL;;ESE PRESEM.- That we CM..12NS_COR,PORATION, Cumra.ctor and >?xlt ??ct' (Surctyj ctFllrrsc 1tc7tne ttcidress i? **SureTec Insurance Company 952 Echo Lane, Suite 450 Houston, TX 77024 HEREINAFTER CALLED THE "Surew", are held and Emily bowed into the Cite of Clearwater, Florida (hereinafter called the ".Ginner") in file penal suns of', `T'HRFE :RLN13Ct_l D NL'ET`l' aNE TT,10U.-SA ND MINE, HUNDRED SEVENTY DOLrlaARS A:,M) 7(l CE? TS ($391.,970.70) for the patinl7cMtt.t of which we bind ckurgolves, caur heirs, executors, adnlinistr ors, su.ucessors, and assigns f6r tile l:ail.} fal prrformtmce of a ecc nin written contract, dated the 13 -clay Of (*a., 2009, entet'ed into between the Contractor wed the City of'Cieuwatar ferr: ? 14RE STATION S RENOVATION 07-0052.-Fl a cqv olwh.iuh said contract.is ict orporated heroin by refcrcnoe ailtl .is tYtztde at part llercctt a.s i.f.fttlly copied hereill. NONV I'LTERDIt'C1.RE, TELL, COI\DtTiONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, that if the Contractor shall in all respezis comply with the 'terms and conditions of said contract, i.tichidi g tlae one-y4ar parEantee of material and labor, and hAs obligai.ions t.hereund.cr, including the contra-ct documents (wITicll iilclud(: the AdvertisG'IT eat fur P,ids, 17orm of l'rgposal, Form of Contra.e:r, Forni of Surot`v Bond, lrt9U'tictions to Bidders. General Conditions and Technical Spmifications) and th.c .('lens and Spc:cifietd.i.trns (herein referral to and made ar part thereof, and such alterttt:ions ns tljnyr be made, in said I'lans and Specific:tt.tians as therein provided for, and shall imlernuify, and save harnt.less ffie, said 0% ner against maid fl•oni all costs, expenses, datmagcs. injury or conduct, %vai 1. of mre or tit ill. uegUge.cc or default, iJtcluding patent i.nfi ingenients on the part of tllc said C ont,rirtC7r r?ec=ats or omplaye-cs, in the exec;_idon or pc6ortlian-ce of said contract, including errors in the. plattis tiirt4shod by the Cbntractor,. and ftrl -her, if such "Coatractc r" or "Contractors" shall promptly make tr2y'111.Ba]tS ro till persons Supplying binl, them or it, labor, material, and ,stippli.es used directly Or indirectly by salt! Contractor, Contractors, Sub-Con-traotor, cu, Sub- Coil tractors, in the ,prosoctit:ir?n of the work provided for in said Contract, thhis obligation skull be void, othorwise., the ('ontra.ctor and Surety jrrindy and severally aggrec to pay to the own-el. ally difference between the stint to x1lich 1"he said Contractor would be cut"stled on the cctmplerirul of th.e (.7ontract, and that which the Owner tnaN, he obliged to }lays for the completion of said work by contract or otherwise. L% at]y da. mi?p, direct or i.ndirecd, or consecluetltial, wl-iC.h said t. wna:r r3lay-stmati-i.n on atecoutlt of such work, or on account of the fi iure of the said Contractor to prtcperll' and in all thingst keep and mzcute all (be pi-ovis-icttt< of said cont act. Page I CONTRACT BOND .knd the said Contract-or vd Surety hereby fu.rthex bizacl thernselves, their ,wce.esscirs, executor, adminiwators, and assig=ns, jointly and severzal.ly, thzrt they -wi-11 amply and fully. protect the aticl Chvntrr against, and wi.11 pay any and till an-Lounts, dainages, costs and tudginents which tnay lrc recovered against or which the Owner nuy be called upon to pay to any person or corporation by reasvii of any, damages arising. from the perfbmtance of said work, or of the repair or maintenance then of cir the manner of doing the samc or the neglect of the said Contractor or his ag,ent:s M servants or the improper performauo of the said work by Ow Contrac-tor or 1-tis agQmt; or servants, or the infFingemonts of any patent 6i its by reason of the use of any manurial Furudshed or ;a od; lone, as afbraid, nr otherwise. And the -, id C~ontrartor and Surcty heraky further bind tlienasel ves, their suocessnrs, heirs, excuutors, admi.niswelot5, and assigns, jointly and severa[ly, trj repay the mviaer any.strt» which the. O;vner may he compelled tta pay because of any lien for labor matczi;il hirnished for the work, embviced by.said Cowract_ An.d the said Surv,tY, for the value received, horclly stipulates and agrees that no ehange., extension of time, alteration or addition to die terns of the Contract cir to the work to be perfornw?d thereunder ar the speci`luation, aUwIllpanying th-e same shrill in any way oCfect its obligations on this bun.cl, azA it does hereby waive nodoe of an.y sur-li cl7am ., extension of time, alivrtion or aclditi + the terrns ol.' he ccantrac-t or to Ehc ;work or to the speci.fical.iiar s, LN TESTIMONY VVIIEit.EOF, wivaess the hands turd sca.is of the par- ios ber?loyliiS day of i[ O-91 / R 11'I"T'!ti.?S S Margare A. Schulz COUNTERSIGNED: By: SureTec Insu ante Company- ?? SURETY 1\': Kevin Wojtowicz AT'1'( RXEI' - I-N-FACT & FL Licensed Agent N/A N/A NIF. A:#_. 910004 PO use ec Insurance .Company LINUTE.D POWER OF ATTORNEY Know AM Men by :These ;Presents; That SURET EC 'INSURANCE COMPANY the "Company„), a corporation duly organized and existing: wilder the laws of the. State of Texas, and having its principal office in. Houston, Harris County, Texas, does by these presents make, constitute and appoint Kevin Wojtowicz, John R. Neu its true and lawful Attorney-in-fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recognizances, undertakings or other instruments or contracts of suretyship to include waivers to the conditions of. contracts and consents of surety, providing the bond penalty does not exceed Three Million Dollars and no/100 ($3;000,000.00) and to bind the Company thereby as fully. and to the same extent as if such bond were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate seal. of the Company and drily attested by its Secretary., hereby ratifying and confirming all that the said Attomey(s)-in-Fact may do in the premises. Said appointment shall continue in force until 9/30/10 and is made under and by authority of the following resolutions of the Board.of Directors of the SureTec Insurance Company: Be it Resatvee,, that the President, any Vice-President; any Assistant Vice-President, any Secretary or any Assistant Secretary shall be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint any one .or more suitable.persons as Attorney(s-?itt-Fact to represent and act for. and.on I*haif of the Company subject to the following provisions: Attorney-fn Fact,may be given full pvwer.and authority for and in the. name of and of behalf of the Company, to execute, acknowledge and :deliver, any and all bonds, recd gmrices, contracts agreements or indeitwity and other conditional or obligatory u-idettakings. and -my and all notices. and. documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability thereunder, and any such instruments so executed by any such Attorney-in-Fact shall be binding upon the Company as if signed. by.the President. and scaled and effected by the Corporate. Secretary. Be it. Resolvv4 that the signature of any authorized officer and seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed to any:power of attorney or anycertificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any power.of attorney or certificate bearing facsimile.signature or facsimile seal: shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect: to any bond or undertaking to .which:.it is attached:.:: (Adopted at a nreeting: held on 20 of April, 199.9.) f P. gn y ? rpItz Wittaess'l?Yhereci , SURET'1~C INSURANCE COMPANY has caused these resentsxo be si ed b its Presiden and its corporate seal .....to be. hereto :aMxed this 28th day of October, A.D. 2008. SURETEC INS ?iCE COMPANY By B.J.. xi esident State of Texas ss: ?? ?L d County of Harris :On this 28hi day. of October, 2008 before.me personally came B.J. King, to me known, who, .being by me duly-sworn, did depose and say . that he resides m Houston, .Texas,; that he is President..ofSUMTEC INSURANCE. COMPANY, the company described in. and which executed the above instrument; that he.k.nows.the seal of said Company; that the seal affixed to said :instrument' is such corporate seal, that it was so affixed by:.order of .the Board of .Directors of said Company; and that he signed his name thereto by like order. Alottiry Putt?lo of Te 8S ??'??.aD17 (? ----------------------- Michelle Denny, Notary :P. c: My commission expires August 27, 2012 y .. :. .:.. I, M. Brent Beaty, Assistant Secretary of SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY, dc= hereb certify that the above and fortgoi g n. is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney, execrated by said Company, which .'is still in frill force and effect; and furthermore, the resolutions' of the Board of threctors. set out in the Power.of Attorney are in full force and. effect. Given under rely hand and the seal o f said Company at.Houston, Texas this day of A:.a M. Brent aty, Assis anteTreta ry Any instrument Issued in.excess of the penalty stated above is totally void and without any validity. - For. verification of the authority of this. power you may call (743) 812-0800 any business day between 8:00 am and. 5;00 pr.. C-ST. :. .. CONTRACT This CONTRACT made and entered into this J3 day of , 2009 by and between the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinaft r designated as the "City", and CAIRNS CORPORATION of the City of TAMPA, County of HILLSBOROUGH and State of FLORIDA hereinafter designated as the "Contractor". WITNESSETH: That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows: The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the following: FIRE STATION #48 RENOVATION (07-0052-FI) IN THE AMOUNT OF: THREE HUNDRED NINETY ONE THOUSAND NINE HUNDRED SEVENTY DOLLARS AND 70 CENTS ($391,970.70) In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, proposal and bond, which may be hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City. If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in accordance with the provisions as contained herein. THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB-CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED CONTRACTOR, SUB-CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES. Page 3 CONTRACT (2) In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements: In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay-off or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non-discrimination clause. The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub-contractors for standard commercial supplies or raw materials. It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor the sum of $1000.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 per day shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract. It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or sureties upon such performance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form satisfactory to it. Page 4 CONTRACT (3) IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have executed this Agreement, in duplicate, the day and year first above written. CITY OF CLEARWATER IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA By. iam B. Horne, II ity Manager Countersigned: By: Hibbard, Mayor-Councilmember (Contractor must indicate whether Corporation, Partnership, Company or Individual.) (The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation). ?oE THE Attest: LA?- E , a.,:?? C hia E. Goudeau, Assistant City Attorney R R P pqa ?1;p= S By:: I z 13EAL) n -r% ? r Page 5 Camilo Soto CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT (CORPORATION FORM) STATE OF COUNTY OF On this day personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority, duly authorized to administer oaths and take acknowledgments, , who after being duly sworn, deposes and says: That he is the (TITLE) of CAIRNS CORPORATION a Florida Corporation, with its principal place of business located at 5303 E. LONGBOAT BOULEVARD TAMPA FLORIDA 33615 (herein, the "Contractor"). That the Contractor was the general contractor under a contract executed on the day of 2009, with the CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, a municipal corporation, as owner, and that the Contractor was to perform the construction of: FIRE STATION #t48 RENOVATIONS (07-0052-FI) That said work has now been completed and the Contractor has paid and discharged all sub-contractors, laborers and material men in connection with said work and there are no liens outstanding of any nature nor any debts or obligations that might become a lien or encumbrance in connection with said work against the described property. That he is making this affidavit pursuant to the requirements of Chapter 713, Florida Statutes, and upon consideration of the payment of (FInal Full Amount of Contract in full satisfaction and discharge of said contract. That the Owner is hereby released from any claim which might arise out of said Contract. The word "liens" as used in this affidavit shall mean any and all arising under the operation of the Florida Mechanic's Lien Law as set forth in Chapter 713, Florida Statutes. Sworn and subscribed to before me This day of , 2009 CAIRNS CORPORATION AFFIANT BY: NOTARY PUBLIC My Commission Expires: PRESIDENT Page 6 PRQPOSAL BQNj2 (Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted) KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned, Cairns Corporation as Principal, and Developers Surety and Indemnity Com an as Surety, who's address i7730 itch, ui e 06. Irvine CA 92623 , are held and firmly bound unto a sum of Ten-PercentDf_AMQunLQ the City of Clearwater, Florida, the minimum of 10% f Contractors t tal bid amount) Dollars ° ) (being ° for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly anti severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. 'l,he condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of Cairns Corporation as Principal, and Developers Surety and Indemnity Company as Surety, for work specified as: Renovations of 435 9F Fire StatiQ0 Project #QZ-0052-Fl all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and specifications provided herefor, all within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of said award enter into a contract, in writing, and furnish the required Performance Bond with surety .or sureties to be approved by the City Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same Shall be in full force and virtue by law and the full amount of this Proposal Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages. Signed this 20th day of February 20 09 (Principal must indicate whether corporation, partnership, company or individual) Cairns Corporation ?.. - ncilas.l Pfi ri The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title; the person signing for a corporation must, by affidavit, show his authority to bind the corporation. I Title Developers u nd Idemnity Company Surety Kevin R. Wojtowicz- Attorney-in-Fact and FL Licensed Agent SectlonV.doc Page 7 of 14 9/24/2008 POWER OF ATTORNEY FOR DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY PO Box 19725, IRVINE, CA 92623 (949) 263-3300 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that as except as expressly limited, DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY, do each, hereby make, constitute and appoint ***Charles J. Nielson, Warren M. Alter, Charles D. Nielson, Brett M. Rosenhaus, Kevin R, Wojtowicz, John R. Neu, jointly or severally*** as their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, to make, execute deliver and acknowledge. for and on behalf of said corporations, as sureties, bonds, undertakings and contracts of surety- ship giving arid granting unto said Attorney(s)-in -Fact full power and authority to do arid to perform every act necessary, requisite or proper to be done in connection therewith as each of said corporations could do, but reserving to each of said corporations full power of substitufon and revocation, and all of the acts of said Attorney(s)-in-Fact, pursuant to these presents, are hereby ratified and confirmed. This Power of Attorney is granted arid is signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolutions adopted by the respective Board of Directors of DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY, effective as of January 1st, 2008. RESOLVED, that the chairman of the Board, the President and any Vice President of the corporation be, and that each of them hereby is, authorized to execute Powers of Attorney, qualifying the attorney(s) named in the Powers of Attorney to execute, on behalf of the corporations, bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship. and that the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary of the corporations be, arid each of them hereby is, authorized to attest the execution of any such Power of Attorney, RESOLVED, FURTHER, that the signatures of such officers may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile. and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures shall be valid and binding upon the corporations when so affixed and in the future with respect to any bond, undertaking or contract of suretyship to which it is attached. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY have severally caused these presents to be signed uy their respective Vice President and attested by their respective Assistant Secretary this January 1st. 2008. B Y'..... e-• ----........._...----- - ..,........ ' Q dert Pies Stephen T. Pate. Senior Vic s :: URP O Rql • ;Far _i?J OCT w _ Assistant Secretary Charles L Day, 9 3 6 =-.? -.• ? ? : 'ab = , . .. w , : }a State of California County of Orange On _ August 13th, 2008before me Date personally appeared JENNY TT NGUYEN COMM, # 1791840 NOTARY PUBLIC CAUFOFiPAA ORANGEf0IMiY My comm. expires Pei 1%2012 Place Notary Seal Above Here Insert Name and Title of the Officer Stephen T. Pate and Charles L. Day Name(s) of Signer(s) p scribed to who roved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to he the persons whose name(f s) is/are sub the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/shelthey executed the same in h slhen'thei, a.iVronzed capacdy(ies), and that by hrslher1heir signalure(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the oerson(s) acted. executed the instrument I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my hand and official seal, Signature .. . Je TT Ng in I CERTIFICATE The undersigned, as Assistant Secretary of DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY, does hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney remains in ful force and has not been revoked, and furthermore. that the provisions of the resolutions of the respective Boards of Directors of said corporations set forth in the Power of Attorney are in force as of the date of this Certificate. ` r- This Certificate is executed in the City of Irvine Caifonna the d y °y. -- - ._... Albert Hillebrand, Assistant e ry D-1438(Wet)(Rev,10l11) AFFIDAVIT (To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation) STATE, OF FLORIDA ) COUNTY OF ) being duly sworn, deposes and says that he/she is Secretary of and corporation organized and? existing render and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, . principal . having its office at: ,?. - - ----------- Street & Number City County ate Al further says that h, is Earniliar with the, records, minute books and by-laws of ^......--.--.._ .__ L (Name of Corporation) 1 Aftiant further says that is (Officer's Name) to sign the Pro osal for of the for said corporation by virtue of 0() (state whether a provision of by lather a provision of by laws c Directors. If by Resoluti EL) csc:?leition o e Board o I ive da e adoption). Sworn to before me this Zul-?- day ?tl_(]CL" otary Public Type/print/stamp name of Notary _ n b67? gr) Title or rank, and Serial No., if' any CHHISSY CIMINNA MY COMMISSION # UQ 703080 EXPIRES: August 7, 2011 zi? Banded By National Notary Assn. Page 8 of 14 9/24/2008 5el'LiC1rl?.liUC NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT STATE OF FLORIDA ) COUNTY OF being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is the party slaking the lbregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or CollusiCn, or Coillmunlcatton or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or afhant or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed contract, and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that such bidder has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the conicnts thereof, or divulged Hil'ormation or data relative thereto to any association or to any member or agent thereo f'. Sworn to and subscribed before me this da _...... Notary CHNI:>5'd CI(JIINKA *'9 `' ?y GD(VINIISSION # DD 7D3D8D 2D11 EXPIkES- August 7, onal Notary Assn. Banded BY Nati Sectionv.doc Nags 9 of 14 9/24/2008 1"ROPOSAL (1) 'FO THE CITY OF CJ,EARWATER, FLORIDA, for FIRE STATION #48 BUILDING' RENOVATION (07-0052-FI) and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked FIRE STATION #48 BUILDING RENOVATION (07-0052-Fi) livery bidder must take: notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents signed by the bidder to wham an award is made and by those officials authorized to do sci oil behalf of the City of Clearwater, Florida. that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract without a certificate from the 1,inarice Director that funds are available to raver the cost of-the work to be done, or without the approval ofthe City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all the pertinent documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is hereby charged with this notice. The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal. that lie has carefully examined the Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications. Plans, SUpplcmelltal Specifications, General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Contract Bond, that lie or his representative hits made such investigation as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and lie proposes and agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or apparatus, do all the work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following prices to wit: seciionv.doe Page 10 of 14 9/24/2008 PROPOSAL (2) If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein. Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on j Bank, for the surn of Q ?........T (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount). "The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing; bid are as follows: (if corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements, enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub-contractor, materialman, agent, supplier, or employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder). NAMES: ADDRESSES: C ?(Al" Signature of Bidder: (The bidder must indicate whether orporati,Partnership, Colr?pa?di ridual). SectionV.doc Page 11 o1' 14 9124/2008 , * * x, 1'110POSAL (3) l he person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title. Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice-President, lie must, by affidavit, show his authority, to bind the corporation. Principal: L. to 5 F,l ?.. ._._... t Title: By: vt) Business Address of Bidder: ?_._...--... Zip Code City and State: l FL . L day of 'I- ? Dated at .,this n U0 ? SectionVAoc Page 12 of 14 9/24/3008 BIDDER'S REVISED PROPOSAL PROJECT: FIRE STATION #48 BUILDING RENOVATION (07-0052-FI) CONTRACTOR: PO i 0A) IAW5?ww 1(r/0 (umbers) BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL $ BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL (Words) ?lf? ?v1v ?t1??-ANA i.?a,? iV? f/??J S?(l?vrY ?" • "'?/..? THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS. UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH SECTION. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. BID FORM BID ITEM DESCRIPTION ITEM 1 Buildina Renovation UNIT QUANTITY UNIT PRICE LS 1 EXTENDED PRICE ($) 356t33"I.°° j5p ?r •. WAipa SUBTOTAL CONTINGENCY (10%) GRAND TOTAL BID ALTERNATIVE BID ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY UNIT EXTENDED ITEM PRICE $ PRICE $ 2 Removal of existing hose LS 1 1 ? (7D I J?? tower , ,, , jqllflo SectionV.doc Page 14 of 14 9/24/2008 CITY OF CL,EARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET PROJECT: FIRE S'T'ATION #48 BUILDING RENOVATION (07-0052-FI) Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance ot'Plans and Specifications. Addendum No. ? bate: ) 6 ":> 1 '7 Addendum No. c Date: ,n-? 0 1 Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendut No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: (Name f Bidder) gnature of Officer) (Title of Officer) (Date) sectionv.doc Page 13 of 14 9/24/2008